HP LaserJet P4010 And P4510 Series Printers Service Manual ENWW P4014_P4015_P4515_Service_Manual P4014 P4015 P4515
User Manual: P4014_P4015_P4515_Service_Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 534
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series Printers Service Manual HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series Printers Service Manual Copyright and License Trademark Credits © 2008 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows®XP are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Windows Vista™ is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Part number: CB506-90950 Edition 1, 3/2008 UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Table of contents 1 Product basics Quick access to product information .................................................................................................... 2 Product comparison ............................................................................................................................. 3 HP LaserJet P4014 models ................................................................................................. 3 HP LaserJet P4015 models ................................................................................................. 4 HP LaserJet P4515 models ................................................................................................. 5 Product features ................................................................................................................................... 6 Product walkaround .............................................................................................................................. 8 Front view ............................................................................................................................ 8 Rear view ............................................................................................................................. 9 Interface ports .................................................................................................................... 10 Model and serial-number label location ............................................................................. 11 Supported operating systems ............................................................................................................. 12 Supported product software ............................................................................................................... 13 Software included with the product .................................................................................... 13 Software for Windows ....................................................................................... 13 HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................................. 13 Embedded Web server ..................................................................... 13 HP Easy Printer Care ....................................................................... 14 Software for Macintosh ..................................................................................... 14 HP Printer Utility ............................................................................... 14 Supported printer drivers ................................................................................................... 16 Supported printer drivers for Windows .............................................................. 16 Supported printer drivers for Macintosh ............................................................ 16 Software for other operating systems ................................................................................ 17 Connectivity ........................................................................................................................................ 18 Supported network protocols ............................................................................................. 18 2 Control panel Control-panel layout ........................................................................................................................... 20 Use the control-panel menus ............................................................................................................. 22 Show Me How menu .......................................................................................................................... 23 Retrieve Job menu ............................................................................................................................. 24 Information menu ............................................................................................................................... 25 ENWW iii Paper Handling menu ......................................................................................................................... 26 Configure Device menu ...................................................................................................................... 27 Printing submenu ............................................................................................................... 27 Print Quality submenu ....................................................................................................... 30 System Setup submenu ..................................................................................................... 33 Stapler Stacker submenu .................................................................................................. 37 MBM-5 (multi-bin mailbox) submenu ................................................................................. 37 I/O submenu ...................................................................................................................... 38 Resets submenu ................................................................................................................ 44 Diagnostics menu ............................................................................................................................... 45 Service menu ..................................................................................................................................... 46 3 Paper and print media Supported paper and print media sizes .............................................................................................. 48 Supported paper and print media types ............................................................................................. 50 Supported paper types for input options ............................................................................ 50 Supported paper types for output options .......................................................................... 51 Tray and bin capacity ......................................................................................................................... 52 Special paper or print media guidelines ............................................................................................. 53 Load trays ........................................................................................................................................... 54 Paper orientation for loading trays ..................................................................................... 54 Load letterhead, preprinted, or prepunched paper ............................................ 54 Load envelopes ................................................................................................. 55 Load Tray 1 ....................................................................................................................... 56 Load Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray ......................................................................... 57 Load an optional 1,500-sheet tray .................................................................................... 59 Configure trays ................................................................................................................................... 61 Configure a tray when loading paper ................................................................................. 61 Configure a tray to match print job settings ....................................................................... 61 Configure a tray by using the Paper Handling menu ......................................................... 62 Select the paper by source, type, or size ........................................................................... 62 Source ............................................................................................................... 62 Type and size .................................................................................................... 62 Use paper output options .................................................................................................................. 63 Print to the top (standard) output bin ................................................................................. 63 Print to the rear output bin ................................................................................................. 63 Print to the optional stacker or stapler/stacker ................................................................... 64 Print to the 5-bin mailbox ................................................................................................... 64 4 Manage and maintain the product Print the information and show-me-how pages .................................................................................. 66 Use the HP Easy Printer Care software ............................................................................................. 68 Open the HP Easy Printer Care software .......................................................................... 68 iv ENWW HP Easy Printer Care software sections ............................................................................ 68 Use the embedded Web server .......................................................................................................... 71 Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection ..................................... 71 Embedded Web server sections ........................................................................................ 72 Use HP Web Jetadmin software ........................................................................................................ 74 Use security features .......................................................................................................................... 75 IP Security ......................................................................................................................... 75 Secure the embedded Web server .................................................................................... 75 Secure stored jobs ............................................................................................................. 75 Lock the control panel menus ............................................................................................ 76 Lock the formatter cage ..................................................................................................... 77 Manage supplies ................................................................................................................................ 78 Supplies life ....................................................................................................................... 78 Approximate print-cartridge replacement intervals ............................................................ 78 Manage the print cartridge ................................................................................................. 78 Print-cartridge storage ....................................................................................... 78 Use genuine HP print cartridges ....................................................................... 78 HP policy on non-HP print cartridges ................................................................ 78 Print-cartridge authentication ............................................................................ 79 HP fraud hotline and Web site .......................................................................... 79 Replace supplies and parts ............................................................................................... 79 Supply replacement guidelines ......................................................................... 79 Change the print cartridge ................................................................................. 80 Load staples ...................................................................................................... 82 Perform preventive maintenance ...................................................................... 83 Reset the maintenance-kit counter ................................................... 83 Install memory, internal USB devices, and external print server cards ............................. 84 Overview ........................................................................................................... 84 Install memory ................................................................................................... 84 Install product memory ..................................................................... 84 Check DIMM installation ................................................................................... 88 Save resources (permanent resources) ........................................................... 88 Enable memory for Windows ............................................................................ 89 Install internal USB devices .............................................................................. 90 Install HP Jetdirect print server cards ............................................................... 93 Install an HP Jetdirect print server card ............................................ 93 Remove an HP Jetdirect print server card ........................................ 94 Clean the product .............................................................................................................. 95 Clean the exterior .............................................................................................. 95 Clean the paper path ......................................................................................... 95 Clean the paper path automatically ................................................................... 95 Upgrade the firmware ........................................................................................................ 96 Determine the current firmware version ............................................................ 96 Download new firmware from the HP Web site ................................................. 96 ENWW v Transfer the new firmware to the product ......................................................... 96 Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser ......................... 96 Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection ............ 97 Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware .............................. 98 Use Microsoft Windows commands to upgrade the firmware .......... 98 Upgrade the HP Jetdirect firmware ................................................................... 98 5 Theory of operation Basic operation ................................................................................................................................. 102 Major print systems .......................................................................................................... 102 Internal components ........................................................................................................ 103 Operating sequence ........................................................................................................ 106 Engine-control system ...................................................................................................................... 108 DC controller PCA ........................................................................................................... 108 Motors and fans ............................................................................................................... 109 Failure detection .............................................................................................. 110 Motor failure .................................................................................... 110 Fan motor failure ............................................................................ 110 Engine power supply ....................................................................................... 110 Fuser-control circuit ........................................................................ 110 Low-voltage power supply .............................................................. 112 High-voltage power supply ............................................................. 112 Overcurrent/overvoltage protection ................................................ 113 Laser/scanner system ...................................................................................................................... 114 Laser failure detection ..................................................................................................... 115 Image-formation system ................................................................................................................... 116 Image-formation process ................................................................................................. 116 Block 1: Latent image formation ...................................................................... 117 Step 1: Primary charging ................................................................ 117 Step 2: Laser-beam exposure ........................................................ 118 Block 2: Developing ........................................................................................ 118 Step 3: Developing ......................................................................... 118 Block 3: Transfer ............................................................................................. 119 Step 4: Transfer .............................................................................. 119 Step 5: Separation .......................................................................... 120 Block 4: Fusing ................................................................................................ 120 Step 6: Fusing ................................................................................ 120 Block 5: Drum cleaning ................................................................................... 120 Step 7: Drum cleaning .................................................................... 121 Step 8: Drum charge elimination .................................................... 121 Pickup, feed, and delivery system .................................................................................................... 122 Pickup-and-feed block ..................................................................................................... 123 Fuser/delivery block ......................................................................................................... 124 vi ENWW Paper trays ...................................................................................................................... 124 Printing from Tray 1 ......................................................................................... 124 Printing from Tray 2 ......................................................................................... 124 Formatter system ............................................................................................................. 124 Sleep mode ..................................................................................................... 125 Resolution Enhancement technology .............................................................. 125 EconoMode ..................................................................................................... 125 Input/output ..................................................................................................... 126 USB ................................................................................................ 126 Embedded print server ................................................................... 126 Expanded I/O .................................................................................. 126 Hard-disk accessory ....................................................................... 126 CPU ................................................................................................ 126 Product memory .............................................................................................. 126 Read-only memory ......................................................................... 126 Random-access memory ................................................................ 126 DIMM slot ....................................................................................... 126 Nonvolatile memory ........................................................................ 127 Memory Enhancement technology ................................................. 127 PJL overview ................................................................................................... 127 PML ................................................................................................................. 127 Control panel ................................................................................................... 127 6 Removal and replacement Removal and replacement strategy ................................................................................................. 130 Warnings, cautions, notes, and tips ................................................................................. 130 Electrostatic discharge ..................................................................................................... 130 Required tools ................................................................................................................. 131 Service approach ............................................................................................................................. 132 Before performing service ................................................................................................ 132 After performing service ................................................................................................... 132 Post-service tests ............................................................................................................ 133 Test 1 (print-quality test) ................................................................................. 133 Types of screws ............................................................................................................... 134 Parts removal order ......................................................................................................... 135 Product input trays and cabinet wheel locks .................................................................... 136 DC controller diagram ...................................................................................................... 137 User-replaceable parts .................................................................................................................... 139 Print cartridge .................................................................................................................. 139 Memory DIMM ................................................................................................................. 141 Tray 2 ............................................................................................................................... 142 Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers ...................................................................... 143 Transfer roller ................................................................................................................. 145 ENWW vii Top-accessory cover ....................................................................................................... 146 Envelope feed accessory covers .................................................................................... 147 Duplex accessory or cover ............................................................................................. 148 Tray 2 extension door ...................................................................................................... 149 Rear output bin ................................................................................................................ 150 Fuser ................................................................................................................................ 151 Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA ...................................................... 152 Reinstallation notes, formatter ........................................................................ 153 Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller ........................................ 153 Service replaceable parts ................................................................................................................. 154 Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers ......................................................................................... 154 Tray 1 separation roller .................................................................................................... 157 Registration assembly ..................................................................................................... 159 Top cover ......................................................................................................................... 161 Right-side cover ............................................................................................................... 163 Reinstall the right cover ................................................................................... 164 Left-side cover ................................................................................................................. 166 Right-front cover .............................................................................................................. 168 Rear-upper cover ............................................................................................................. 171 Control-panel assembly ................................................................................................... 172 Front cover ....................................................................................................................... 174 Fan FN102 ....................................................................................................................... 176 Fan FN103 ....................................................................................................................... 178 Pickup-motor assembly (M101) ....................................................................................... 180 Drum-motor assembly (M102) ......................................................................................... 182 Lifter-motor assembly (M103) .......................................................................................... 185 DC controller PCA ........................................................................................................... 188 Reinstallation tip .............................................................................................................. 191 Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller ......................................................... 191 Pickup-drive assembly ..................................................................................................... 192 Reinstall the pickup-drive assembly ................................................................ 196 Fuser-motor assembly (M299) ......................................................................................... 197 Drum-drive assembly ....................................................................................................... 199 Reinstall the drum-drive assembly .................................................................. 201 Fan FN101 ....................................................................................................................... 202 Fan FN301 ....................................................................................................................... 204 Environmental sensor (TH3) ............................................................................................ 206 High voltage power supply ............................................................................................... 208 Feed-guide assembly ...................................................................................................... 213 Reinstall the feed-guide assembly .................................................................. 214 Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly ......................................................................................... 216 Feed-roller assembly ....................................................................................................... 218 Laser/scanner assembly .................................................................................................. 219 Paper-delivery assembly ................................................................................................ 221 viii ENWW Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly ............................................................ 224 1,500-sheet feeder assembly ........................................................................................................... 225 1,500-sheet feeder feed rollers ........................................................................................ 225 1,500-sheet feeder separation roller ................................................................................ 226 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover ......................................................................................... 227 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover ................................................................................. 228 1,500-sheet feeder left-side cover ................................................................................... 229 1,500-sheet feeder door .................................................................................................. 232 1,500-sheet feeder motor ................................................................................................ 234 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA ........................................................................................ 235 1,500-sheet feeder lift-drive assembly ............................................................................. 236 7 Solve problems Troubleshooting checklist ................................................................................................................. 240 Menu map ........................................................................................................................................ 241 Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................. 242 Power-on checks ............................................................................................................. 242 Overview ......................................................................................................... 242 Troubleshooting tools ....................................................................................................................... 245 Individual component diagnostics .................................................................................... 245 LED diagnostics .............................................................................................. 245 Understand lights on the formatter ................................................. 245 Formatter test ................................................................................. 246 Engine diagnostics .......................................................................................... 246 Engine test ...................................................................................... 246 Half self test .................................................................................................... 247 Drum rotation test ............................................................................................ 247 Paper path sensors test .................................................................................. 248 Paper path test ................................................................................................ 250 Sensor test (interactive) .................................................................................. 250 Manual sensor test (special mode test) .......................................... 250 Manual sensor test 2 (special mode test) ....................................... 258 Print/stop test .................................................................................................. 259 Component tests ............................................................................................. 261 Diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 262 Block diagrams ................................................................................................ 262 Main assemblies ............................................................................. 262 Main parts ....................................................................................... 263 Motors and fans .............................................................................. 264 PCAs .............................................................................................. 265 500-sheet feeder ........................................................................... 265 1,500-sheet feeder ........................................................................ 266 Connectors ...................................................................................................... 268 ENWW ix DC controller PCA connectors ........................................................ 268 Product base connectors ................................................................ 270 500-sheet paper tray connectors .................................................... 270 1,500-sheet paper tray connectors ................................................. 271 Duplexer connectors ....................................................................... 272 Envelope feeder connectors ........................................................... 272 General timing chart ........................................................................................ 273 Circuit diagrams .............................................................................................. 273 Print quality troubleshooting tools .................................................................................... 280 Repetitive image defect ruler .......................................................................... 280 Cleaning page ................................................................................................. 280 Control-panel messages .................................................................................................................. 282 Event log messages ......................................................................................................................... 302 Print an event log ............................................................................................................. 302 Show an event log ........................................................................................................... 302 Sample event log ............................................................................................................. 303 Paper-handling problems ................................................................................................................. 304 Jams ................................................................................................................................ 304 Common causes of jams ................................................................................. 304 Jam locations .................................................................................................. 306 Clear jams ...................................................................................................... 307 Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas ................ 307 Clear jams from the optional envelope feeder ................................ 309 Clear jams from the trays ............................................................... 311 Clear jams from the optional duplexer ........................................... 314 Clear jams from the fuser area ....................................................... 315 Clear jams from the output areas ................................................... 320 Jam recovery ................................................................................................... 325 Product feeds incorrect page size ................................................................................... 326 Output is curled or wrinkled ............................................................................................. 327 Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly ................................................................ 328 Solve image quality problems .......................................................................................................... 329 Image defects .................................................................................................................. 329 Solve performance problems ........................................................................................................... 334 Solve connectivity problems ............................................................................................................. 335 Solve direct-connect problems ........................................................................................ 335 Solve network connectivity problems ............................................................................... 335 Solve network printing problems ..................................................................... 335 Ping test .......................................................................................................... 336 Service mode functions .................................................................................................................... 337 Service menu ................................................................................................................... 337 Product resets .................................................................................................................. 338 Restore factory-set defaults ............................................................................ 338 Hard disk initialization ..................................................................................... 338 x ENWW NVRAM initialization ........................................................................................ 338 Service ID ........................................................................................................ 339 Restore the service ID .................................................................... 339 Convert the service ID to an actual date ........................................ 339 Reset page counts .......................................................................................... 339 Cold reset paper .............................................................................................. 339 8 Parts Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................ 342 Order directly from HP ..................................................................................................... 342 Order through service or support providers ..................................................................... 342 Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software .............................................. 342 Order replacement parts .................................................................................................................. 342 Paper-handling accessories ............................................................................................ 343 Print cartridges ................................................................................................................. 344 Maintenance kits .............................................................................................................. 344 Memory ............................................................................................................................ 345 Cables and interfaces ...................................................................................................... 345 Paper ............................................................................................................................... 346 How to use the parts lists and diagrams .......................................................................................... 349 Customer/field-replaceable units ...................................................................................................... 350 Assembly locations ........................................................................................................................... 352 Covers .............................................................................................................................................. 356 Internal components ......................................................................................................................... 358 PCAs ................................................................................................................................................ 386 Input devices .................................................................................................................................... 392 Output devices ................................................................................................................................. 416 Alphabetical parts list ....................................................................................................................... 425 Numerical parts list ........................................................................................................................... 460 Appendix A Service and support Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .................................................................................... 495 Print cartridge limited warranty statement ........................................................................................ 496 Customer self-repair warranty service .............................................................................................. 497 Customer support ............................................................................................................................. 498 HP maintenance agreements ........................................................................................................... 499 On-site service agreements ............................................................................................. 499 Next-day on-site service .................................................................................. 499 Weekly (volume) on-site service ..................................................................... 499 Repacking the device ...................................................................................................... 499 Extended warranty ........................................................................................................... 500 Appendix B Specifications ENWW xi Physical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 502 Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................... 502 Acoustic specifications ..................................................................................................................... 504 Operating environment ..................................................................................................................... 504 Appendix C Regulatory information FCC regulations ............................................................................................................................... 506 Declaration of conformity .................................................................................................................. 507 Declaration of conformity ................................................................................................. 507 Safety statements ............................................................................................................................. 508 Laser safety ..................................................................................................................... 508 Canadian DOC regulations .............................................................................................. 508 VCCI statement (Japan) .................................................................................................. 508 Power cord statement (Japan) ......................................................................................... 508 EMI statement (Korea) ..................................................................................................... 508 Laser statement for Finland ............................................................................................. 509 Substances table (China) ................................................................................................ 510 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 511 xii ENWW 1 ENWW Product basics ● Quick access to product information ● Product comparison ● Product features ● Product walkaround ● Supported operating systems ● Supported product software ● Connectivity 1 Quick access to product information Use the following Web site to find information about the product. ● www.hp.com/support/hpljp4010series or www.hp.com/support/hpljp4510series Table 1-1 Product guides 2 Guide Description HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series Getting Started Guide Provides step-by-step instructions for installing and setting up the product. HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series Series User Guide Provides detailed information for using the product and problem-solving. Available on the product CD or in the Windows Program Group if the software is installed on a computer. HP Easy Printer Care To check the product status and settings, and to view problem-solving information and online documentation, use the HP Easy Printer Care. You must have performed a complete software installation in order to use the HP Easy Printer Care. See the user guide for more information about software installation. Online Help Provides information about options that are available in the printer drivers. To view a Help file, open the online Help through the printer driver. Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Product comparison HP LaserJet P4014 models HP LaserJet P4014 printer HP LaserJet P4014n printer CB506A CB507A ● Prints up to 45 pages per minute (ppm) on Letter size paper and 43 ppm on A4 size paper Has the same features as the HP LaserJet P4014 printer, plus the following: ● Contains 96 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM). Expandable to 640 MB. ● Embedded HP Jetdirect networking ● Contains 128 MB RAM. Expandable to 640 MB. ● HP print cartridge, rated for up to 10,000 pages ● Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets ● Tray 2 holds up to 500 sheets ● 500-sheet face-down output bin ● 100-sheet face-up output bin ● 4-line graphical control-panel display ● Hi-speed USB 2.0 port ● Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot ● One open dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot ENWW Product comparison 3 HP LaserJet P4015 models 4 HP LaserJet P4015n printer HP LaserJet P4015tn printer HP LaserJet P4015x printer CB509A CB510A CB511A ● Prints up to 52 pages per minute (ppm) on Letter size paper and 50 ppm on A4 size paper Has the same features as the HP LaserJet P4015n printer, plus the following: Has the same features as the HP LaserJet P4015n printer, plus the following: ● Embedded HP Jetdirect networking ● ● ● One additional 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3) Contains 128 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM). Expandable to 640 MB. ● Duplex-printing accessory for automatic printing on both sides ● HP print cartridge, rated for up to 10,000 pages ● Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets ● Tray 2 holds up to 500 sheets ● 500-sheet face-down output bin ● 100-sheet face-up output bin ● 4-line graphical control-panel display ● Numeric keypad ● Hi-speed USB 2.0 port ● Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot ● One open dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot Chapter 1 Product basics One additional 500-sheet input tray (Tray 3) ENWW HP LaserJet P4515 models HP LaserJet P4515n printer HP LaserJet P4515tn printer HP LaserJet P4515x printer CB514A CB515A CB516A HP LaserJet P4515xm printer CB517A ENWW ● Prints up to 62 pages per minute (ppm) on Letter size paper and 60 ppm on A4 size paper ● Embedded HP Jetdirect networking ● Contains 128 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM). Expandable to 640 MB. ● HP print cartridge, rated for up to 10,000 pages ● Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets ● Tray 2 holds up to 500 sheets ● 500-sheet face-down output bin ● 100-sheet face-up output bin ● 4-line graphical controlpanel display ● Numeric keypad ● Hi-speed USB 2.0 port ● Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot ● One open dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot Has the same features as the HP LaserJet P4515n printer, plus the following: Has the same features as the HP LaserJet P4515n printer, plus the following: Has the same features as the HP LaserJet P4515n printer, plus the following: ● ● One additional 500sheet input tray (Tray 3) ● One additional 500sheet input tray (Tray 3) ● Duplex-printing accessory for automatic printing on both sides ● Duplex-printing accessory for automatic printing on both sides ● One 500-sheet, 5-bin mailbox for sorting jobs One additional 500sheet input tray (Tray 3) Product comparison 5 Product features Feature Description Performance ● 400 MHz processor User interface ● Control-panel help ● Four-line graphical display with numeric keypad. (The keypad is not included for the HP LaserJet P4014 models.) ● HP Easy Printer Care software (a Web-based status and problem-solving tool) ● Windows® and Macintosh printer drivers ● Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies (for network-connected models only) ● HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver for Windows (HP UPD PCL 5) ● HP PCL 6 ● HP postscript emulation Universal Print Driver for Windows (HP UPD PS) ● FastRes 1200—produces 1200-dots-per-inch (dpi) print quality for fast, high-quality printing of business text and graphics ● ProRes 1200—produces 1200-dpi printing for the best quality in line art and graphic images ● 600 dpi—provides the fastest printing ● Fonts, forms, and other macros ● Job retention ● 103 internal scalable fonts available for PCL and 93 for HP UPD postscript emulation ● 80 device-matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution ● Additional fonts can be added through USB ● HP 500-sheet input tray (up to four additional trays) ● HP 1,500-sheet high-capacity input tray ● HP LaserJet 75-sheet envelope feeder ● HP LaserJet printer stand ● HP LaserJet automatic duplexer ● HP LaserJet 500-sheet stacker ● HP LaserJet 500-sheet stapler/stacker ● HP LaserJet 500-sheet 5-bin mailbox Printer drivers Resolution Storage features Fonts Accessories NOTE: Each model can accept up to four optional 500-sheet input trays or up to three 500-sheet input trays and one 1,500-sheet high-capacity input tray. If a 1,500-sheet high-capacity input tray is installed, it must always be below the other trays. Connectivity 6 Chapter 1 Product basics ● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 connection ● HP Jetdirect full-featured embedded print server (optional for the HP LaserJet P4014 printer) with IPv4, IPv6, and IP Security. ENWW Feature Supplies Supported operating systems Accessibility ENWW Description ● HP Web Jetadmin software ● Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot ● The supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining. ● The product checks for an authentic HP print cartridge at installation. ● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities (using HP Easy Printer Care) ● Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, and Windows Vista™ ● Macintosh OS X, V10.2.8 , V10.3, V10.4, V10.5, and later ● Novell NetWare ● Unix® ● Linux ● The online user guide is compatible with text screen-readers. ● The print cartridge can be installed and removed by using one hand. ● All doors and covers can be opened by using one hand. ● Paper can be loaded in Tray 1 by using one hand. Product features 7 Product walkaround Front view 1 2 3 4 5 8 1 Top output bin 2 Control panel 3 Top cover (provides access to the print cartridge) 4 Tray 1 (pull to open) 5 Tray 2 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Rear view 1 5 2 4 ENWW 3 1 Rear output bin (pull to open) 2 Duplex accessory cover (remove this to install the duplex printing accessory) 3 Interface ports 4 Right cover (provides access to the DIMM slot) 5 On/off switch Product walkaround 9 Interface ports 1 2 3 4 6 10 5 1 RJ.45 Network connection (not available for the HP LaserJet P4014 printer) 2 EIO slot 3 Power connection 4 Host USB connection, for adding fonts and other third-party solutions (this connection might have a removable cover) 5 Slot for a cable-type security lock 6 Hi-speed USB 2.0 connection, for connecting directly to a computer Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Model and serial-number label location The label that contains the model and serial numbers is on the inside of the top cover. ENWW Product walkaround 11 Supported operating systems The product supports the following operating systems: ● Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit) ● Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit) ● Windows 2000 ● Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit) ● Mac OS X V10.2.8, V10.3, V10.4, V10.5, and later NOTE: For Mac OS X V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported. 12 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Supported product software Software included with the product Software for Windows HP Web Jetadmin HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your intranet, and it should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer. To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin. When installed on a host server, a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later) by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host. Embedded Web server The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox. The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server. The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a networkconnected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66.) For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see Use the embedded Web server on page 71. ENWW Supported product software 13 HP Easy Printer Care HP Easy Printer Care software is a program that you can use for the following tasks: ● Check the product status ● Check the supplies status and use HP SureSupply to shop online for supplies ● Set up alerts ● View product usage reports ● View product documentation ● Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools ● Use HP Proactive Support to routinely scan your printing system and to prevent potential problems. HP Proactive Support can update software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can view HP Easy Printer Care software when the product is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. Supported operating systems Supported browsers ● Microsoft® Windows 2000 ● Microsoft Windows XP, Service Pack 2 (Home and Professional editions) ● Microsoft Windows Server 2003 ● Microsoft Windows Vista™ ● Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or 7.0 To download HP Easy Printer Care software , go to www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare. This Web site also provides updated information about supported browsers and a list of HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software. For more information about using HP Easy Printer Care software, see Open the HP Easy Printer Care software on page 68. Software for Macintosh HP Printer Utility Use the HP Printer Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver. You can use the HP Printer Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is connected to a TCP/IP-based network. Open the HP Printer Utility Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2.8 14 1. Open the Finder, and then click Applications. 2. Click Library, and then click Printers. 3. Click hp, and then click Utilities. Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW 4. Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector. 5. Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility. Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 and V10.4 1. Open the Finder, click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility. 2. Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility. Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.5 From the Printer menu, click Printer Utility. -orFrom the Print Queue, click the Utility icon. ENWW Supported product software 15 HP Printer Utility features The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list. The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages. Item Description Configuration Page Prints a configuration page. Supplies Status Shows the device supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering. HP Support Provides access to technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and recycling and return information. File Upload Transfers files from the computer to the device. Upload Fonts Transfers font files from the computer to the device. Firmware Update Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device. Duplex Mode Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode. Economode & Toner Density Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density. Resolution Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting. Lock Resources Locks or unlocks storage products, such as a hard disk. Stored Jobs Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk. Trays Configuration Changes the default tray settings. IP Settings Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server. Bonjour Settings Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name that is listed on a network. Additional Settings Provides access to the embedded Web server. E-mail Alerts Configures the device to send e-mail notices for certain events. Supported printer drivers Supported printer drivers for Windows ● HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PCL 5) ● HP PCL 6 ● HP postscript emulation Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PS) The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver. NOTE: For more information about the UPD, see www.hp.com/go/upd. Supported printer drivers for Macintosh The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs), and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers. 16 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device features. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer. Software for other operating systems ENWW OS Software UNIX For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing to download the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX. Linux For information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting. Supported product software 17 Connectivity Supported network protocols The product supports the TCP/IP network protocol, the most widely used and accepted networking protocol. Many networking services utilize this protocol. The following tables list the supported networking services and protocols. Table 1-2 Printing Service name Description port9100 (Direct Mode) Printing service Line printer daemon (LPD) Printing service Table 1-3 Network device discovery Service name Description SLP (Service Location Protocol) Device-discovery protocol, used to help find and configure network devices. Used primarily by Microsoft-based programs. Bonjour Device-discovery protocol, used to help find and configure network devices. Used primarily by Apple Macintosh-based programs. Table 1-4 Messaging and management Service name Description HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) Allows Web browsers to communicate with embedded Web server. EWS (embedded Web server) Allows you to manage the product through a Web browser. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Used by network applications for product management. SNMP v1 and standard MIB-II (Management Information Base) objects are supported. Table 1-5 IP addressing 18 Service name Description DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) For automatic IP address assignment. The DHCP server provides the product with an IP address. Generally, no user intervention is required for the product to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) For automatic IP address assignment. The BOOTP server provides the product with an IP address. Requires the administrator to input a product's MAC hardware address on the BOOTP server for the product to obtain an IP address from that server. Auto IP For automatic IP address assignment. If neither a DHCP server nor a BOOTP server is present, the product uses this service to generate a unique IP address. Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW 2 ENWW Control panel ● Control-panel layout ● Use the control-panel menus ● Show Me How menu ● Retrieve Job menu ● Information menu ● Paper Handling menu ● Configure Device menu ● Diagnostics menu ● Service menu 19 Control-panel layout Use the control panel to obtain product and job status information and to configure the product. 1 2 3 4 14 5 6 13 7 8 10 11 12 Number Button or light Function 1 Control-panel display Shows status information, menus, help information, and error messages 2 Up arrow 3 Help button 4 OK button Navigates to the previous item in the list, or increases the value of numeric items Provides information about the message on the control-panel display ● Saves the selected value for an item ● Performs the action that is associated with the item that is highlighted on the control-panel display ● Clears an error condition when the condition is clearable 5 Stop button Cancels the current print job and clears the pages from the product 6 Down arrow Navigates to the next item in the list, or decreases the value of numeric items 7 Back arrow Backs up one level in the menu tree or backs up one numeric entry 8 Menu button ● Opens and closes the menus. ● On: The product is online and ready to accept data to print. ● Off: The product cannot accept data because it is offline (paused) or has experienced an error. ● Blinking: The product is going offline. The product stops processing the current job and expels all of the active pages from the paper path. ● On: The product has data to print, but is waiting to receive all of the data. ● Off: The product has no data to print. ● Blinking: The product is processing or printing the data. ● On: The product has experienced a problem. See the control-panel display. ● Off: The product is functioning without error. ● Blinking: Action is required. See the control-panel display. 9 10 11 20 9 Ready light Data light Attention light Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Number Button or light Function 12 Folder or STAR (Secure Transaction Access Retrieval) button Provides quick access to the RETRIEVE JOB menu NOTE: This item is not included for the HP LaserJet P4014 or HP LaserJet P4014n printers. 13 C Clear button Returns values to their defaults and exits the help screen NOTE: This item is not included for the HP LaserJet P4014 or HP LaserJet P4014n printers. 14 Numeric keypad Enter numeric values NOTE: This item is not included for the HP LaserJet P4014 or HP LaserJet P4014n printers. ENWW Control-panel layout 21 Use the control-panel menus To gain access to the control-panel menus, complete the steps below. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow 3. Press OK to select the appropriate option. 4. Press the back arrow 5. Press Menu 6. Press the help button to see additional information about an item. . or the up arrow to navigate the listings. to return to the previous level. to exit the menu. The following are the main menus. Main menus SHOW ME HOW RETRIEVE JOB INFORMATION PAPER HANDLING CONFIGURE DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE 22 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Show Me How menu Each choice in the SHOW ME HOW menu prints a page that provides more information. ENWW Item Explanation CLEAR JAMS Prints a page that shows how to clear paper jams. LOAD TRAYS Prints a page that shows how to load the input trays. LOAD SPECIAL MEDIA Prints a page that shows how to load special paper, such as envelopes and letterhead. PRINT ON BOTH SIDES Prints a page that shows how to use the two-sided (duplex) printing function. SUPPORTED PAPER Prints a page that shows supported paper types and sizes for the product. PRINT HELP GUIDE Prints a page that shows links to additional help on the Web. Show Me How menu 23 Retrieve Job menu This menu provides a list of the stored jobs in the product and access to all the job-storage features. You can print or delete these jobs at the product control panel. This menu appears when the product has a minimum of 80 MB of base memory. NOTE: If you turn the product off, all stored jobs are deleted unless an optional hard disk is installed. NOTE: Press the folder button to go directly to this menu. Item Sub-item Values Explanation USER NAME ALL JOBS (WITH PIN) PRINT USER NAME: The name of the person who sent the job. DELETE ● PRINT: Prints the selected job, after you enter the PIN. COPIES: Select the number of copies to print (1 to 32000). ALL JOBS (NO PINS) 24 Chapter 2 Control panel ● DELETE: Deletes the selected job from the product, after you enter the PIN. PRINT ● PRINT: Prints the selected job. DELETE ALL JOBS ● DELETE: Deletes all the jobs from the product. The product prompts you to confirm the action before it deletes the jobs. ENWW Information menu The INFORMATION menu contains product information pages that give details about the product and its configuration. Scroll to the information page that you want, and then press OK. ENWW Item Explanation PRINT MENU MAP Prints the control-panel menu map that shows the layout and current settings for the controlpanel menu items. PRINT CONFIGURATION Prints the current product configuration. If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, an HP Jetdirect configuration page will print out as well. PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE Prints a supplies status page that shows the supplies levels for the product, an approximate number of pages remaining, cartridge-usage information, the serial number, a page count, and ordering information. This page is available only if you are using genuine HP supplies. PRINT USAGE PAGE Prints a page that shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product, lists whether they were one-sided or two-sided, and shows a page count. PRINT FILE DIRECTORY Prints a file directory that shows information for all installed mass-storage devices. This item appears only if a mass-storage device that contains a recognized file system is installed in the product. PRINT PCL FONT LIST Prints a PCL font list that shows all the PCL fonts that are currently available to the product. PRINT PS FONT LIST Prints a PS font list that shows all the PS fonts that are currently available to the product. Information menu 25 Paper Handling menu Use this menu to set the paper size and type for each tray. The product uses this information to produce pages with best possible print quality. For more information, see Configure trays on page 61. Some items on this menu are also available in the software program or the printer driver. Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings. Item Values Explanation ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE List of available paper sizes for the envelope feeder Use this item to set the value to correspond with the paper size that is currently loaded in the envelope feeder. ENVELOPE FEEDER TYPE List of available paper types for the envelope feeder Use this item to set the value to correspond with the type of paper that is currently loaded in the envelope feeder. TRAY1 SIZE List of available paper sizes for Tray 1 Use this item to set the value to correspond with the paper size that is currently loaded in Tray 1. The default setting is ANY SIZE. ANY SIZE: If both the type and size for Tray 1 are set to ANY, the product will pull paper from Tray 1 first if paper is loaded in the tray. A size other than ANY SIZE: The product does not pull from this tray unless the type or size of the print job matches the type and size that is loaded in this tray. TRAY1 TYPE List of available paper types for Tray 1 Use this item to set the value to correspond with the type of paper that is currently loaded in Tray 1. The default setting is ANY TYPE. ANY TYPE: If both the type and size for Tray 1 are set to ANY, the product will pull paper from Tray 1 first if the paper is loaded in the tray. A type other than ANY TYPE: The product does not pull from this tray. TRAY[N] SIZE List of available paper sizes for Tray 2 or the optional trays TRAY[N] TYPE List of available paper types Sets the value to correspond with the paper type that is currently for Tray 2 or the optional trays loaded in Tray 2 or the optional trays. The default setting is ANY TYPE. 26 Chapter 2 Control panel The tray automatically detects the paper size based on the position of the guides in the tray. The default setting is either LTR (letter) for 110 V engines or A4 for 220 V engines. ENWW Configure Device menu Use this menu to change the default printing settings, adjust the print quality, and change the system configuration and I/O options. Printing submenu Some items on this menu are available in the program or printer driver. Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings. In general, it is better to change these settings in the printer driver, if applicable. Item Values Explanation COPIES 1 to 32000 Set the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 32000. Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies. For products that do not have a numeric keypad, press the up arrow or the down arrow to select the number of copies. This setting applies only to print jobs that do not have the number of copies specified in the program or printer driver, such as a UNIX or Linux program. The default setting is 1. NOTE: It is best to set the number of copies in the program or printer driver. (Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings.) DEFAULT PAPER SIZE Displays a list of available paper sizes. Set the default image size for paper and envelopes. This setting applies to the print jobs that do not have a paper size specified in the program or printer driver. The default setting is LETTER. DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE UNIT OF MEASURE Set the default custom paper size for Tray 1 or any 500-sheet tray. XDIMENSION YDIMENSION UNIT OF MEASURE: Use this option to select the unit of measure (INCHES or MILLIMETERS) to use when you set custom paper sizes. XDIMENSION: Use this item to set the measurement of the width of the paper (measurement from side to side in the tray). The range is 76 to 216 mm (3.0 to 8.50 inches). YDIMENSION: Use this item to set the measurement of the length of the paper (measurement from front to back in the tray). The range is 127 to 356 mm (5.0 to 14.0 inches). PAPER DESTINATION Displays a list of possible paper destinations. Configure the output paper bin destination. The list varies according to which output accessory is attached. The default is STANDARD TOP BIN. DUPLEX OFF This item appears only when an optional duplexer is installed. Set the value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper. ON The default setting is OFF. DUPLEX BINDING LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE Change the binding edge for duplex printing. This item appears only when an optional duplexer is installed and DUPLEX is set to ON. The default setting is LONG EDGE. OVERRIDE A4/LETTER ENWW NO Select YES to print an A4-size job on Letter-size paper if A4-size paper is not loaded in the product (or vice versa). Configure Device menu 27 Item MANUAL FEED Values Explanation YES The default setting is YES. OFF Feeds the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than automatically from another tray. If MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1 is empty, the product goes offline when it receives a print job. MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE] appears on the control-panel display. ON The default setting is OFF. COURIER FONT REGULAR Selects the version of Courier font to use: DARK REGULAR: The internal Courier font that is available on the HP LaserJet 4 series products. DARK: The internal Courier font that is available on the HP LaserJet III series products. The default setting is REGULAR. WIDE A4 NO Changes the number of characters that can be printed on a single line of A4-size paper. YES NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. The default setting is NO. PRINT PS ERRORS OFF Determines whether a PS error page prints. ON OFF: PS error page never prints. ON: PS error page prints when PS errors occur. The default setting is OFF. PRINT PDF ERRORS OFF Determines whether a PDF error page prints. ON OFF: PDF error page never prints. ON: PDF error page prints when PDF errors occur. The default setting is OFF. 28 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Item Values Explanation PCL SUBMENU FORM LENGTH Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size. ORIENTATION Sets the default page orientation as LANDSCAPE or PORTRAIT. NOTE: It is best to set the page orientation in the program or printer driver. (Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings.) ENWW FONT SOURCE Select the font source as INTERNAL, or EIO DISK. FONT NUMBER The product assigns a number to each font and lists the numbers on the PCL Font List. The font number appears in the Font # column of the list. The range is 0 to 102. FONT PITCH Select the font pitch. This item might not appear, depending on the font selected. The range is 0.44 to 99.99. FONT POINT SIZE Select the font point size. The range is 4.00 to 999.75. The default is 12.00. SYMBOL SET Select any one of several available symbol sets at the product control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for linedraw characters. APPEND CR TO LF Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed that the product encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line using only the line feed control code. Use this option to append the required carriage return to each line feed. SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES When generating your own PCL, extra form feeds are included that would cause one or more blank pages to be printed. Select YES for form feeds to be ignored if the page is blank. MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING Select and maintain trays by number when you are not using the printer driver or when the software program has no option for tray selection. CLASSIC: Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models. STANDARD: Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models. Configure Device menu 29 Print Quality submenu Some items on this menu are available in the program or printer driver. Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings. In general, it is best to change these settings in the printer driver, if applicable. Item Values Explanation SET REGISTRATION PRINT TEST PAGE Shifts the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom, and left to right. You can also align the image that is printed on the front with the image that is printed on the back. Allows for one-sided and two-sided printing alignment. SOURCE ADJUST TRAY [N] PRINT TEST PAGE: Prints a test page that shows the current registration settings. SOURCE: Selects the tray for which you want to print the test page. ADJUST TRAY [N]: Sets the registration for the specified tray, where [N] is the number of the tray. A selection appears for each tray that is installed, and registration must be set for each tray. ● X1 SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray. For duplexing, this side is the second side (back) of the paper. ● X2 SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray, for the first side (front) of a duplexed page. This item appears only if the product includes a built-in duplexer and DUPLEX is ON. Set the X1 SHIFT first. ● Y SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray. The default setting for SOURCE is TRAY 2. The default setting for ADJUST TRAY 1 and ADJUST TRAY 2 is 0. FUSER MODES List of available paper types Configures the fuser mode associated with each paper type. Change the fuser mode only if you are experiencing problems printing on certain paper types. After you select a type of paper, you can select a fuser mode that is available for that type. The product supports the following modes: NORMAL: Used for most types of paper. LIGHT1: Used for most types of paper. LIGHT2: Use this mode if you are experiencing wrinkled media. HEAVY: Used for rough paper. The default fuser mode is LIGHT1 for all print media types except transparencies (LIGHT2) and rough paper (HEAVY). 30 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Item Values Explanation CAUTION: Do not change the fuser mode for transparencies. Failure to use the LIGHT2 setting while printing transparencies can result in permanent damage to the product and fuser. Always select Transparencies as the type in the print driver and set the tray type at the product control panel to TRANSPARENCY. When selected, RESTORE MODES resets the fuser mode for each paper type back to its default setting. OPTIMIZE Optimizes certain parameters for all jobs rather than (or in addition to) optimizing by paper type. RESOLUTION LINE DETAIL Turn this setting on if you are having problems with blurred print or scattered lines. RESTORE OPTIMIZE Use this item to return all the OPTIMIZE settings to OFF. 300 Select the resolution. All values print at the same speed. 600 300: Produces draft print quality and can be used for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of products. FASTRES 1200 PRORES 1200 600: Produces high print quality for text and can be used for compatibility with the HP LaserJet 4 family of products. FASTRES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi print quality for fast, highquality printing of business text and graphics. PRORES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi print quality for fast, highquality printing of line art and graphic images. NOTE: It is best to change the resolution in the program or print driver. (Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings.) The default setting is FASTRES 1200. RET OFF Use the Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) setting to produce print with smooth angles, curves, and edges. LIGHT MEDIUM DARK REt does not affect print quality if the print resolution is set to FastRes 1200 or ProRes 1200. All other print resolutions benefit from REt. NOTE: It is best to change the REt setting in the program or print driver. (Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings.) The default setting is MEDIUM. ECONOMODE ON OFF EconoMode is a feature that allows the product to use less toner per page. Selecting this option will extend the life of the toner supply and may reduce cost per page. However, it will also reduce print quality. The printed page is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs. HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you will need to install a new print cartridge, even if there is toner supply remaining in the cartridge. ENWW Configure Device menu 31 Item Values Explanation NOTE: It is best to turn EconoMode on or off in the program or printer driver. (Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings.) The default setting is OFF. TONER DENSITY 1 to 5 Lighten or darken the print on the page by setting the toner density. Select a setting ranging from 1 (light) to 5 (dark). The default setting of 3 usually produces the best results. AUTO CLEANING OFF Use this feature to automatically clean the paper path after the product has printed a specific number of pages. Use the CLEANING INTERVAL item to set the number of pages. ON The default is OFF. CLEANING INTERVAL 1000 This item appears only if AUTO CLEANING is on. 2000 Select the number of pages at which the product should perform the cleaning process. 5000 10000 20000 AUTO CLEANING SIZE 32 LETTER This item appears only if AUTO CLEANING is on. A4 Use to set the size for the automatically generated cleaning page. CREATE CLEANING PAGE There is no value to select. Press OK to print a cleaning page (for cleaning toner from the fuser). Follow the instructions on the cleaning page. For more information, see Clean the paper path on page 95. PROCESS CLEANING PAGE There is no value to select. This item is available only after a cleaning page has been created. Follow the instructions that are printed on the cleaning page. The cleaning process might take up to 2.5 minutes. Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW System Setup submenu Items on this menu affect product behavior. Configure the product according to your printing needs. Item Values Explanation DATE/TIME DATE Sets the date and time settings. DATE FORMAT TIME TIME FORMAT JOB STORAGE LIMIT 1 to 100 Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that can be stored on the product. The default setting is 32. JOB HELD TIMEOUT OFF Sets the amount of time that held jobs are kept before being automatically deleted from the queue. 1 HOUR The default setting is OFF. 4 HOURS 1 DAY 1 WEEK SHOW ADDRESS AUTO OFF Defines whether the IP address IS shown on the display if the product is connected to a network. If AUTO is selected the IP Address of the product appears with the Ready message. The default setting is OFF. ENWW Configure Device menu 33 Item Values Explanation TRAY BEHAVIOR USE REQUESTED TRAY Select whether the product tries to pull paper from a different tray than the one that you selected in the print driver. MANUALLY FEED PROMPT SLEEP DELAY ● EXCLUSIVELY: Sets the product to pull from the tray that you selected and not pull from another tray, even if the tray that you selected is empty. ● FIRST: Sets the product to pull from the tray that you selected first, but allows the product to pull from another tray automatically if the tray that you selected is empty. Select when the product shows a prompt regarding pulling from Tray 1 if your print job does not match the type or size that is loaded in any other tray. ● ALWAYS: Select this option if you always want to be prompted before the product pulls from Tray 1. ● UNLESS LOADED: Prompts you only if Tray 1 is empty. PS DEFER MEDIA Control whether the PostScript (PS) or HP paper-handling model is used to print jobs. ENABLE causes PS to defer to the HP paper-handling model. DISABLE uses the PS paperhandling model. SIZE/TYPE PROMPT Control whether the tray configuration message and its prompts are shown whenever a tray is opened and closed. These prompts instruct you to set the type or size if the tray is configured for a type or size other than the type or size that is loaded in the tray. USE ANOTHER TRAY Enable or disable the prompt to select another tray. DUPLEX BLANK PAGES Configure the way the product treats blank pages when using the optional duplexer. Select AUTO for the fastest performance. Select YES to always pass the sheet through the duplexer, even if it is printed on only one side. TRAY 2 MODEL Specify whether Tray 2 is the STANDARD TRAY or the CUSTOM TRAY. IMAGE ROTATION Sets how the product arranges the image on the page when an output accessory is installed. 1 MINUTE ● STANDARD: The product automatically rotates the image, so you can always load paper the same way, even if an output accessory is attached. ● ALTERNATE: The product does not automatically rotate the image, so you might need to load paper differently for certain types of output. Sets how long the product remains idle before it enters Sleep mode. 15 MINUTES Sleep mode does the following: 30 MINUTES 45 MINUTES 60 MINUTES 90 MINUTES ● Minimizes the amount of power that the product consumes when it is idle. ● Reduces wear on electronic components in the product (turns off the display backlight, but the display is still readable). 2 HOURS 34 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Item Values Explanation 4 HOURS The product automatically comes out of Sleep mode when you send a print job, press a product control-panel button, open a tray, or open the top cover. The default setting is 30 MINUTES. WAKE TIME MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY Sets a “wake-up” time for the product to warm up each day. The default for each day is OFF. If you set a wake time, HP recommends setting an extended sleep delay time period, so that the product will not return to sleep mode soon after waking. THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS A value from 1 to 10 Controls the brightness of the control panel display. The default is 5. PERSONALITY AUTO Selects the default product language (personality). The possible values are determined by which valid languages are installed in the product. PS PDF PCL SUBMENU Normally, you should not change the product language. If you change it to a specific product language, the product will not switch automatically from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the product. The default setting is AUTO. CLEARABLE WARNINGS JOB Sets the amount of time that a clearable warning appears on the product control-panel display. ON JOB: The clearable warning message appears until the end of the job that generated the message. ON: The clearable warning message appears until you press OK. The default setting is JOB. AUTO CONTINUE OFF ON Determines how the product reacts to errors. If the product is on a network, you probably want to turn AUTO CONTINUE to ON. ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message appears on the product control-panel display, and the product goes offline for 10 seconds before returning online. OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message remains on the product control-panel display, and the product remains offline until you press OK. The default setting is ON. REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE STOP AT LOW Determines how the product behaves when the print cartridge is low or out. STOP AT OUT OVERRIDE AT OUT ENWW STOP AT LOW: The product stops printing when the print cartridge reaches the low threshold. Press OK to continue printing. Configure Device menu 35 Item Values Explanation STOP AT OUT: The product stops printing when the print cartridge is depleted. You must replace the print cartridge before printing can continue. OVERRIDE AT OUT: Select this option to override the message and continue printing after the print cartridge is depleted. HP does not guarantee print quality after you select this option. The default value is OVERRIDE AT OUT. ORDER AT 1 TO 100 Set the threshold at which the ORDER BLACK CARTRIDGE message appears. The value is the percent of overall cartridge life that remains. The default is 23%. JAM RECOVERY AUTO Determines how the product behaves if a jam occurs. OFF AUTO: The product automatically selects the best mode for jam recovery. This is the default setting. ON OFF: The product does not reprint pages following a jam. Printing performance might be increased with this setting. ON: The product automatically reprints pages after a jam is cleared. RAM DISK AUTO Determines how the RAM disk is configured. OFF AUTO: Allows the product to determine the optimal RAM-disk size based on the amount of available memory. OFF: The RAM is disabled. NOTE: If you change the setting from OFF to AUTO, the product automatically reinitializes when it becomes idle. The default setting is AUTO. LANGUAGE (DEFAULT) Selects the language for the messages that appear on the control-panel display. Several The default setting is determined by the country/region in which the product is purchased. 36 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Stapler Stacker submenu This menu appears only when an optional stapler/stacker is attached. Item Values Explanation STAPLES NONE Select whether all jobs should be stapled. If you select ONELEFT-ANGLED, all jobs are stapled. The default is NONE. ONE-LEFT-ANGLED STAPLES OUT STOP Select the option to stop or continue printing when the stapler is out of staples. The default is STOP. CONTINUE MBM-5 (multi-bin mailbox) submenu This menu appears only when an optional 5-bin mailbox is attached. Item Values Explanation OPERATION MODE MAILBOX Select how the 5-bin mailbox sorts jobs. STACKER MAILBOX: Each bin is assigned to a user or group of users. This is the default setting. JOB SEPARATOR COLLATOR STACKER: The product uses all bins to stack copies of a job. Jobs are sent to the bottom bin first, and then to the next highest bin, and so forth. When all bins are full, the product stops. JOB SEPARATOR: Each job is placed in a separate bin. Jobs are placed into an empty bin, starting with the top bin. COLLATOR: The product sorts copies of jobs into separate bins. ENWW Configure Device menu 37 I/O submenu Items on the I/O (input/output) menu affect the communication between the product and the computer. If the product contains an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure basic networking parameters by using this submenu. You can also configure these and other parameters through HP Web Jetadmin or the embedded Web server. Item Values Explanation I/O TIMEOUT 5 to 300 Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. Use this setting to adjust timeout for the best performance. If data from other ports appears in the middle of your print job, increase the timeout value. The default setting is 15. EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU See the next table for a list of options. EIOJETDIRECT MENU NOTE: In the following table, items that are marked with an asterisk (*) are the default setting. Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO Jetdirect menus Menu item Sub-menu item TCP/IP ENABLE Sub-menu item Values and Description OFF: Disable the TCP/IP protocol. ON*: Enable the TCP/IP protocol. HOST NAME IPV4 SETTINGS An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the product. This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address. CONFIG METHOD Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server. BOOTP: Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DHCP*: Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server. AUTO IP: Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically. MANUAL: Use the MANUAL SETTINGS menu to configure TCP/IPv4 parameters. MANUAL SETTINGS (Available only if CONFIG METHOD is set to MANUAL) Configure parameters directly from the printer control panel: IP ADDRESS: The unique IP address of the printer, where n is a value from 0 to 255. 38 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description SUBNET MASK: The subnet mask for the printer, where m is a value from 0 to 255. DEFAULT GATEWAY: The IP address of the gateway or router used for communications with other networks. DEFAULT IP Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP). AUTO IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. LEGACY: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect products. IPV6 SETTINGS PRIMARY DNS Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS Server. SECONDARY DNS Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. ENABLE Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server. OFF*: IPv6 is disabled. ON: IPv6 is enabled. ADDRESS Use this item to manually configure an IPv6 address. MANUAL SETTINGS: Use the MANUAL SETTINGS menu to enable and manually configure a TCP/ IPv6 address. ENABLE: Select this item and choose ON to enable manual configuration, or OFF to disable manual configuration. ADDRESS: Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal syntax. DHCPV6 POLICY ROUTE SPECIFIED: The stateful auto-configuration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server. ROUTER UNAVAILABLE: If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. ALWAYS: Whether or not a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. ENWW PRIMARY DNS Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary DNS server that the print server should use. SECONDARY DNS Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a secondary DNS server that the print server should use. Configure Device menu 39 Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item PROXY SERVER Sub-menu item Values and Description Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security, for those clients. To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets. For some networks, you might need to contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address. IPX/SPX PROXY PORT Type the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535. IDLE TIMEOUT IDLE TIMEOUT: The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout). ENABLE OFF: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol. ON*: Enable the IPX/SPX protocol. FRAME TYPE Selects the frame-type setting for your network. AUTO: Automatically sets and limits the frame type to the first one detected. EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP: Frametype selections for Ethernet networks APPLETALK ENABLE OFF: Disable the AppleTalk protocol. ON*: Enable the AppleTalk protocol. DLC//LLC ENABLE OFF: Disable the DLC/LLC protocol. ON*: Enable the DLC/LLC protocol. 40 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item SECURITY PRINT SEC PAGE Sub-menu item Values and Description YES: Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server. NO*: A security settings page is not printed. SECURE WEB For configuration management, specify whether the embedded Web server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS. HTTPS Required: For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The print server will appear as a secure site. HTTP/HTTPS optional: Access using either HTTP or HTTPS is permitted. IPSEC Specify the IPsec or Firewall status on the print server. KEEP: IPsec/Firewall status remains the same as currently configured. DISABLE: IPsec/Firewall operation on the print server is disabled. RESET SECURITY Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults. NO*: The current security settings are maintained. YES: Security settings are reset to factory defaults. DIAGNOSTICS EMBEDDED TESTS This menu provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems. Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server. After you select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select EXECUTE to initiate the test. Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off, or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed. LAN HW TEST CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration. This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network. Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it. HTTP TEST This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product, and tests the embedded Web server. Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it. SNMP TEST ENWW This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the product. Configure Device menu 41 Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it. DATA PATH TEST This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product, However, the test is paperless, so the file does not print. Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it. SELECT ALL TESTS Select this item to run all the embedded tests. Select YES to run all tests, or select NO to not run all tests. EXECUTION TIME [H] Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. You can select a value from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off. Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed. EXECUTE NO*: Do not initiate the selected tests. YES: Initiate the selected tests. PING TEST This test is used to check network communications. This test sends link-level packets to a remote network host, then waits for an appropriate response. DEST TYPE Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6 node. DEST IPV4 Type the IPv4 address. DEST IPV6 Type the IPv6 address. PACKET SIZE Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the maximum is 2048. TIMEOUT Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The default is 1 and the maximum is 100. COUNT Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test to run continuously, select 0. PRINT RESULTS If the ping test was not set for continuous operation, you can choose to print the test results. Select YES to print results. If you select NO (default), results are not printed. EXECUTE Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select YES to initiate the test, or NO to not run the test. PING RESULTS Use this item to view the ping test status and results using the control panel display. PACKETS SENT 42 Chapter 2 Control panel Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. ENWW Table 2-1 Embedded Jetdirect and EIO Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item LINK SPEED Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description PACKETS RECEIVED Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. PERCENT LOST Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. RTT MIN Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT MAX Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT AVERAGE Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. PING IN PROGRESS Shows whether a ping test is in progress. YES indicates a test in progress, and NO indicates that a test completed or was not run. REFRESH When viewing the ping test results, this item updates the ping test data with current results. Select YES to update the data, or NO to maintain the existing data. However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu. The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. Select one of the following link configuration settings: CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network device might be lost. AUTO*: The print server uses auto-negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.) 10T HALF: 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 10T FULL: 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation. 100TX HALF: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 100TX FULL: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation. 100TX AUTO: Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps. 1000TX FULL: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation. PRINT PROTOCOLS ENWW Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration of the following protocols: IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC. Configure Device menu 43 Resets submenu Use this submenu to return settings to the defaults and change settings such as Sleep mode. Item Values Explanation RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS There is no value to select. Performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory (default) and network settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active I/O. CAUTION: Restoring factory settings during a print job cancels the print job. SLEEP MODE ON Turns Sleep mode on or off. Using Sleep mode offers the following advantages: OFF ● Minimizes the amount of power that the product consumes when it is idle. ● Reduces wear on electronic components in the product (turns off the display backlight, but the display is still readable). The product automatically comes out of Sleep mode when you send a print job, press a control-panel button, open a tray, or open the top cover. You can set how long the product remains idle before it enters Sleep mode. The default setting is ON. 44 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Diagnostics menu Administrators can use this submenu to isolate parts and to troubleshoot jam and print-quality issues. Item Values Explanation PRINT EVENT LOG There is no value to select. Press OK to generate a list of the 50 most recent entries in the event log. The printed event log shows error number, page count, error code, and description or personality. SHOW EVENT LOG There is no value to select. Press OK to scroll through the contents of the event log at the control panel, which lists up to the 50 most recent events. Press the up arrow or the down arrow to scroll through the event log contents. PAPER PATH SENSORS There is no value to select. Use this item to test each of the sensors in the paper path. Press OK to initiate the test, and then use the menus to print an internal page, such as a configuration page. PAPER PATH TEST PRINT TEST PAGE Generates a test page that is useful for testing the paperhandling features of the product. NOTE: Set the other items before selecting PRINT TEST PAGE. Press OK to start the paper-path test using the source (tray), destination (output bin), duplex, and number of copies settings that you set in the other items on the Paper Path Test menu. SOURCE Select the tray that uses the paper path that you want to test. You can select any tray that is installed. Select ALL TRAYS to test all paper paths. (Paper must be loaded in the selected trays.) DESTINATION Select which output bin to include in the test. You can select all bins. DUPLEX Determine whether the paper goes through the duplexer during the paper-path test. The menu item appears only if the device includes a built-in duplexer. COPIES Set how many sheets of paper are used from each tray during the paper-path test. MANUAL SENSOR TEST 1 There is no value to select. HP service personnel can use this item to manually test a sensor. Locate the sensor inside the product and manually activate it. If the value changes from 0 to another number, the sensor is working. MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 There is no value to select. This item lists additional sensors to test. COMPONENT TEST A list of available components appears. HP service personnel can use this item to test various internal components to isolate the source of a problem, such as noise. Before beginning a test, set the value for the REPEAT frequency: ONCE or CONTINUOUS. Then, select the component that you want to test. To identify noise problems, listen carefully as you perform each test. PRINT/STOP TEST ENWW STOP TIME Specify a length of time, in milliseconds, at which the product should stop while performing a test. Diagnostics menu 45 Service menu The SERVICE menu contains items that allow you to test, configure, and reset the product. The menu is locked and requires one of the following PINs for access: ● HP LaserJet P4014: 05401408 ● HP LaserJet P4015: 05401508 ● HP LaserJet P4515: 05451508 Item Values Explanation CLEAR EVENT LOG Erases all event log entries. CLEAR BOOTLOADER PASSWORD Clears the bootloader password in order to prevent unauthorized product resets. TOTAL PAGE COUNT Allows a service representative to restore the page count after a new DC controller PCA has been installed. REFURBISH CYCLE COUNT Allows a service representative to set the page count when the product is refurbished. MAINTENANCE COUNT Allows a service representative to reset the count to a given number if maintenance items were replaced at a different page count than the normal maintenance interval. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Allows a service representative to set the maintenance interval to a different count. This is generally used if the product is in a difficult environment that would require maintenance items to be replaced more frequently to maintain proper product operation and print quality. SERIAL NUMBER Allows a service representative to restore the serial number after a new formatter PCA has been installed. SERVICE ID Allows the date of the product's first activity to be shown from the control panel. COLD RESET PAPER LETTER Allows a service representative to set the default paper size after a cold reset A4 46 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW 3 ENWW Paper and print media ● Supported paper and print media sizes ● Supported paper and print media types ● Tray and bin capacity ● Special paper or print media guidelines ● Load trays ● Configure trays ● Use paper output options 47 Supported paper and print media sizes This product supports a number of paper sizes, and it adapts to various media. NOTE: To obtain best results, select the correct paper size and type in the printer driver before printing. Table 3-1 Supported paper and print media sizes Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 and the optional 500-sheet trays Optional 1,500-sheet tray Optional envelope feeder Optional duplexer Stacker and Stapler/ Stacker Optional 5bin mailbox Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches) Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) 8.5 x 13 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches) B5 (JIS) 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) Executive (JIS) 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches) Double Postcard (JIS) 148 x 200 mm (5.8 x 7.9 inches) Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches) 16K 197 x 273 mm (7.8 x 10.8 inches) Custom 1 76 x 127 mm to 216 x 356 mm 48 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Table 3-1 Supported paper and print media sizes (continued) Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 and the optional 500-sheet trays Optional 1,500-sheet tray Optional envelope feeder Optional duplexer Stacker and Stapler/ Stacker Optional 5bin mailbox (3.0 x 5.0 inches to 8.5 x 14 inches) Custom 148 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches to 8.5 x 14 inches) Envelope Commercial #10 105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 inches) Envelope DL ISO 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) Envelope C5 ISO 162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Envelope B5 ISO 176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 inches) Envelope Monarch #7-3/4 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches) 1 ENWW Custom sizes cannot be stapled, but they can be stacked in the output bins. Supported paper and print media sizes 49 Supported paper and print media types For a complete list of specific HP-brand paper that this product supports, go to www.hp.com/support/ hpljp4010series or www.hp.com/support/hpljp4510series. Supported paper types for input options Paper type (control panel) Paper type (printer driver) ANY TYPE Unspecified PLAIN Plain LIGHT 60-75 G/M2 Light 60-75g CARDSTOCK >163 G/M2 Cardstock 176-220g TRANSPARENCY Monochrome Laser Transparency LABELS Labels LETTERHEAD Letterhead PREPRINTED Preprinted PREPUNCHED Prepunched COLOR Colored ROUGH Rough BOND Bond RECYCLED Recycled ENVELOPE Envelope 50 Chapter 3 Paper and print media Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional 500-sheet trays Optional 1,500-sheet tray Optional envelope feeder ENWW Supported paper types for output options Paper type (control panel) Paper type (printer driver) ANY TYPE Unspecified PLAIN Plain LIGHT 60-75 G/M2 Light 60-75g CARDSTOCK >163 G/M2 Cardstock 176-220g TRANSPARENCY Monochrome Laser Transparency LABELS Labels LETTERHEAD Letterhead PREPRINTED Preprinted PREPUNCHED Prepunched COLOR Colored ROUGH Rough BOND Bond RECYCLED Recycled ENVELOPE Envelope ENWW Standard top bin (face-down) Rear bin (face-up) Optional duplexer Optional stacker or stapler/ stacker Optional 5bin mailbox Supported paper and print media types 51 Tray and bin capacity Tray or bin Paper type Specifications Quantity Tray 1 Paper and cardstock Range: Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 200 g/m2 (54 lb) bond Envelopes Less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/m2 (24 lb) bond Up to 10 envelopes Labels Maximum 0.23 mm (0.009 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) Transparencies Minimum 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) Range: Equivalent to 500 sheets of 75 g/ m2 (20 lb) bond Tray 2 and the optional 500-sheet Paper and cardstock trays 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 135 g/m2 (36 lb) bond Optional 1,500-sheet tray Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g/ m2 (20 lb) bond Labels Maximum 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 54 mm (2.1 inch) Transparencies Minimum 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 54 mm (2.1 inch) Paper Range: Equivalent to 1,500 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 135 g/m2 (36 lb) bond Optional envelope feeder Envelopes Standard top bin Paper Up to 500 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Rear bin Paper Up to 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Optional duplexer Paper Less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/m2 (24 lb) bond Up to 75 envelopes Range: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond Optional stacker Paper Up to 500 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Optional stapler/stacker Paper Stapling: Up to 20 print jobs of up to 15 pages each Stacking: Up to 500 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Optional 5-bin mailbox 52 Paper Chapter 3 Paper and print media Up to 500 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond ENWW Special paper or print media guidelines This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to obtain the best print results. CAUTION: HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper not designed for this technology could damage your printer. Media type Do Envelopes ● Store envelopes flat. ● Use envelopes where the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. ● ● ● Use peel-off adhesive strips that are approved for use in laser printers. Do not use envelopes that are wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or otherwise damaged. Do not use envelopes that have clasps, snaps, windows, or coated linings. ● Do not use self-stick adhesives or other synthetic materials. ● Use only labels that have no exposed backing between them. ● Do not use labels that have wrinkles or bubbles, or are damaged. ● Use Labels that lie flat. ● Do not print partial sheets of labels. ● Use only full sheets of labels. ● Use only transparencies that are approved for use in laser printers. ● Do not use transparent print media not approved for laser printers. ● Place transparencies on a flat surface after removing them from the product. Letterhead or preprinted forms ● Use only letterhead or forms approved for use in laser printers. ● Do not use raised or metallic letterhead. Heavy paper ● Use only heavy paper that is approved for use in laser printers and meets the weight specifications for this product. ● Do not use paper that is heavier than the recommended media specification for this product unless it is HP paper that has been approved for use in this product. Glossy or coated paper ● Use only glossy or coated paper that is approved for use in laser printers. ● Do not use glossy or coated paper designed for use in inkjet products. Labels Transparencies ENWW Do not Special paper or print media guidelines 53 Load trays Paper orientation for loading trays Load letterhead, preprinted, or prepunched paper If a duplexer is installed, or if a stapler/stacker is installed, the product alters the way the images for each page are arranged. If you are using paper that requires a specific orientation, load it according to the information in the following table. Tray Single-sided printing, no stapler/stacker Duplex printing, no stapler/stacker Single-sided printing with the stapler/stacker Duplex printing with the stapler/stacker Tray 1 Face-up Face-down Face-up Face-down Top edge leading into the product Bottom edge leading into the product Bottom edge leading into the product Top edge leading into the product Face-down Face-up Face-down Face-up Top edge at the front of the tray Bottom edge at the front of Bottom edge at the front the tray of the tray All other trays 54 Chapter 3 Paper and print media Top edge at the front of the tray ENWW Load envelopes Load envelopes into Tray 1 or the optional envelope feeder with the front of the envelope facing up, and the short, postage-edge leading into the product. 1 ENWW 2 Load trays 55 Load Tray 1 NOTE: The product might print at a slower speed when using Tray 1. CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load trays while the product is printing. Do not fan the paper. Fanning can cause misfeeds. 1. Open Tray 1. 2. Pull out the tray extension. 3. Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the paper fits under the tabs and below the maximumheight indicators. NOTE: For information about loading paper that requires a specific orientation, see Paper orientation for loading trays on page 54. 2 56 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW 4. Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend the paper. 2 Load Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load trays while the product is printing. CAUTION: Do not fan the paper. Fanning can cause misfeeds. 1. Pull the tray out and lift up slightly to remove it from the product. 2. Pinch the release that is located on the left guide and slide the side guides to the correct paper size. A5 JIS B5 EXEC A4 LTR/LGL ENWW Load trays 57 A5 J IS B 5 Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the stack is flat at all four corners and that the top of the stack is below the maximum-height indicators. LTR 4. E XEC Pinch the release that is located on the rear paper guide and slide it to the correct paper size. A4 3. NOTE: For information about loading paper that requires a specific orientation, see Paper orientation for loading trays on page 54. 5. 58 Slide the tray completely into the product. Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Load an optional 1,500-sheet tray The optional 1,500 sheet tray adjusts for Letter, A4, and Legal sizes. The product automatically senses which size is loaded if the tray guides are correctly adjusted. CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load trays while the product is printing. CAUTION: Do not fan the paper. Fanning can cause misfeeds. ENWW 1. Press the release and open the door of the 1,500-sheet tray. 2. If paper is in the tray, remove it. When paper is in the tray, the guides cannot be adjusted. 3. Pinch the guides at the front of the tray and slide them to the correct paper size. Load trays 59 4. Load the paper into the tray. Load complete reams at one time. Do not divide reams into smaller sections. NOTE: For information about loading paper that requires a specific orientation, see Paper orientation for loading trays on page 54. 60 5. Make sure that the height of the stack does not exceed the maximum-height indicators on the guides and that the front edge of the stack is aligned with the arrows. 6. Close the door on the tray. Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Configure trays The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations: ● When you load paper into the tray ● When you specify a particular tray or paper type for a print job through the printer driver or a software program and the tray is not configured to match the print-job’s settings NOTE: The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and Tray 1 is configured for ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE. NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet product models, you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On this product, setting Tray 1 size to ANY SIZE is equivalent to First mode. Setting Tray 1 size to a setting other than ANY SIZE is equivalent to Cassette mode. Configure a tray when loading paper 1. Load paper in the tray. Close the tray if you are using a tray other than Tray 1. 2. The tray configuration message appears. 3. Press OK to accept the detected size. -orPress the back arrow 4. to choose a different configuration, and continue with the following steps. To modify the tray configuration, press the down arrow press OK. to highlight the correct size, and then NOTE: The product automatically detects most paper sizes in trays other than Tray 1. 5. Press the down arrow to highlight the correct type, and then press OK. Configure a tray to match print job settings 1. In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type. 2. Send the job to the product. If the tray needs to be configured, a prompt appears on the control-panel display. 3. If the displayed size is not correct, press the back arrow the correct size, or highlight CUSTOM. . Press the down arrow to highlight To specify a custom size, first press the down arrow to highlight the correct unit of measure. Then set the X and Y dimensions by using the numeric keypad or by pressing the up arrow or the down arrow . 4. ENWW If the displayed paper type is not correct, press the back arrow to highlight the paper type. , and then press the down arrow Configure trays 61 Configure a tray by using the Paper Handling menu You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the product. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight PAPER HANDLING, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow OK. to highlight the size or type setting for the desired tray, and then press 4. Press the down arrow to highlight the size or type. To specify a custom size, first press the down arrow to highlight the correct unit of measure. Then set the X and Y dimensions by using the numeric keypad or by pressing the up arrow or the down arrow . 5. Press OK to save the settings. 6. Press Menu . . Select the paper by source, type, or size In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull paper when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the product automatically selects a tray using the default settings. Source To print by source select a specific tray for the product to pull from. If you select a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not match your print job, the product prompts you to load the tray with the type or size of paper for your job before printing it. When you load the tray, the product begins printing. Type and size Printing by type or size means that you want the product to pull from the tray that is loaded with the correct type and size of paper. Selecting paper by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays and helps protect special paper from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for letterhead and you select plain paper, the product will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull from a tray that is loaded with plain paper and is configured for plain paper on the product control panel. Selecting paper by type and size results in significantly better print quality for most paper types. Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by type for special print media, such as labels or transparencies. Print by size for envelopes, if possible. 62 ● To print by type or size, select the type or size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program. ● If you often print on a certain type or size of paper, configure a tray for that type or size. Then, when you select that type or size as you print a job, the product automatically pulls paper from the tray that is configured for that type or size. Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Use paper output options The product has four output locations: the top (standard) output bin, the rear output bin, the optional stacker or stapler/stacker, and the optional 5-bin mailbox. Print to the top (standard) output bin The top output bin collects paper face-down, in the correct order. The top output bin should be used for most print jobs, including transparencies. To use the top output bin, be sure that the rear output bin is closed. To avoid jams, do not open or close the rear output bin while the product is printing. Print to the rear output bin The product always prints to the rear output bin if it is open. Paper that is printed to this bin will exit faceup, with the last page on top (reverse order). Printing from Tray 1 to the rear output bin provides the straightest path. Opening the rear output bin might improve performance with the following items: ● Envelopes ● Labels ● Small custom-size paper ● Postcards ● Paper heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb) To open the rear output bin, grasp the handle at the top of the bin. Pull the bin down, and slide out the extension. 1 ENWW 2 Use paper output options 63 Opening the rear output bin makes the duplexer (if installed) and the top output bin unavailable. To avoid jams, do not open or close the rear output bin while the product is printing. Print to the optional stacker or stapler/stacker The optional stacker or optional stapler/stacker can hold up to 500 sheets of paper (20-lb paper). The stacker accepts standard and custom paper sizes. The stapler/stacker accepts standard and custom paper sizes, but only Letter, Legal, and A4 sizes can be stapled. Do not try to send other types of print media, such as labels or envelopes. When a stapler/stacker is installed, the product automatically rotates the printed images 180° on all paper sizes, regardless of whether the job is stapled. Paper types that must be printed in the correct orientation, such as letterhead or prepunched paper, need to be loaded in a different direction. See Paper orientation for loading trays on page 54. To print to the optional stacker or optional stapler/stacker, select the option in the program, in the printer driver, or at the printer control panel. Before you use the optional stacker or optional stapler/stacker, ensure that the printer driver is set to recognize it. You need to set this setting only once. See the printer driver online Help for details. Print to the 5-bin mailbox The optional 5-bin mailbox provides five output bins that can be configured from the control panel to sort print jobs in a variety of ways. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight MBM-5 CONFIGURATION, and then press OK. 4. Press OK to select OPERATION MODE. 5. Press the down arrow 6. 64 . to highlight how the 5-bin mailbox sorts jobs: MAILBOX Each bin is assigned to a user or group of users. This is the default setting. STACKER The product uses all of the bins to stack copies of a job. Jobs are sent to the bottom bin first, and then to the next highest bin, and so forth. When all bins are full, the product stops. JOB SEPARATOR Each print job is sent to a different bin. Jobs are sent to an empty bin, starting with the top bin and continuing to the bottom bin. COLLATOR The product sorts copies of a single print job into separate bins. Press OK to select the option. Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW 4 ENWW Manage and maintain the product ● Print the information and show-me-how pages ● Use the HP Easy Printer Care software ● Use the embedded Web server ● Use HP Web Jetadmin software ● Use security features ● Manage supplies 65 Print the information and show-me-how pages From the product control panel, you can print information pages that give details about the product and its current configuration. You can also print several show-me-how pages that illustrate common procedures related to using the product. Type of page Name of page Description Information pages PRINT MENU MAP Prints the control-panel menu map that shows the layout and current settings for the control-panel menu items. PRINT CONFIGURATION Prints the current product configuration. If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, an HP Jetdirect configuration page also prints. PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE Prints a supplies status page that shows the supplies levels for the product, an approximate number of pages remaining, cartridge-usage information, the serial number, a page count, and ordering information. This page is available only if you are using genuine HP supplies. PRINT USAGE PAGE Prints a page that shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product, lists whether they were onesided or two-sided, and shows a page count. PRINT FILE DIRECTORY Prints a file directory that shows information for all installed mass-storage devices. This item appears only if a mass-storage device that contains a recognized file system is installed in the product. PRINT PCL FONT LIST Prints a PCL font list that shows all the PCL fonts that are currently available to the product. PRINT PS FONT LIST Prints a PS font list that shows all the PS fonts that are currently available to the product. CLEAR JAMS Prints a page that shows how to clear paper jams. LOAD TRAYS Prints a page that shows how to load the input trays. LOAD SPECIAL MEDIA Prints a page that shows how to load special paper, such as envelopes and letterhead. PRINT ON BOTH SIDES Prints a page that shows how to use the two-sided (duplex) printing function. SUPPORTED PAPER Prints a page that shows supported paper types and sizes for the product. PRINT HELP GUIDE Prints a page that shows links to additional help on the Web. Show-me-how pages 66 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Print the information pages 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight the required page, and then press OK to print. . Print the show-me-how pages ENWW 1. Press Menu 2. Make sure SHOW ME HOW is highlighted and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow . to highlight the required page, and then press OK to print. Print the information and show-me-how pages 67 Use the HP Easy Printer Care software Open the HP Easy Printer Care software Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software: ● On the Start menu, select Programs, select Hewlett-Packard, select HP Easy Printer Care, and then click Start HP Easy Printer Care. ● In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy Printer Care icon. ● Double-click the desktop icon. HP Easy Printer Care software sections HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer. Some of the items that are in the following table might not be available for every product. The Help button (?) in the upper-right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the options on that page. Section Options Device List tab ● When you open the software, this is the first page that appears. NOTE: The product information appears either in list form or as icons, depending on the setting for the View as option. NOTE: To return to this page from any tab, click My HP Printers in the left side of the window. ● The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product. ● If you click a product in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care opens the Overview tab for that product. Compatible Printers Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software. Find Other Printers window Add more products to the My HP Printers list Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other Printers window. The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then monitor those products from your computer. Overview tab ● Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh button in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status. ● Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper that is loaded in each tray. ● Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about product supplies, ordering information, and recycling information. Contains basic status information for the device 68 Devices list: Shows the products that you can select. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Section Options Support tab ● Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status. button ● Device Management section: Provides links to information about HP Easy Printer Care, to advanced product settings, and to product usage reports. ● Troubleshooting and Help: Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve problems, to online product support information, and to online HP experts. Settings tab ● About: Provides general information about this tab. Configure product settings, adjust printquality settings, and find information about specific product features ● General: Provides information about the product, such as the model number, serial number, and the settings for date and time, if they are available. ● Information Pages: Provides links to print the information pages that are available for the product. ● Capabilities: Provides information about product features, such as duplexing, the available memory, and the available printing personalities. Click Change to adjust the settings. ● Print Quality: Provides information about print-quality settings. Click Change to adjust the settings. ● Trays / Paper: Provides information about the trays and how they are configured. Click Change to adjust the settings. ● Restore Defaults: Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory defaults. Click Restore to restore the settings to the defaults. Provides links to support information NOTE: This tab is not available for some products. HP Proactive Support NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. When enabled, HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify potential problems. Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans occur. This page also provides information about available updates for product software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can accept or decline each recommended update. Supplies Ordering button ● Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each product. To order a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list. You can sort the list by product, or by the supplies that need to be ordered the soonest. The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the My HP Printers list. ● Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a new browser window. If you have checked the Order check box for any items, the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies. ● Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check box selected. Click the Supplies Ordering button on any tab to open the Supplies Ordering window, which provides access to online supplies ordering. NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. Alert Settings link NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. Color Access Control ENWW Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window, in which you can configure alerts for each product. ● Alerting is on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature. ● Printer Alerts: Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only, or for any error. ● Job Alerts: For products that support it, you can receive alerts for specific print jobs. Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing. Use the HP Easy Printer Care software 69 Section Options NOTE: This item is available only for HP color products that support Color Access Control. NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. 70 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Use the embedded Web server Use the embedded Web server to view product and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the product control panel. The following are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server: NOTE: When the product is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care software to view the product status. ● View product control-panel status information ● Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones ● View and change tray configurations ● View and change the product control-panel menu configuration ● View and print internal pages ● Receive notification of product and supplies events ● View and change network configuration ● View support content that is specific to the current state of the product To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape 6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, or Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for HPUX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the product is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based product connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server. When the product is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available. Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the product IP address or host name in the address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66. NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future. ENWW Use the embedded Web server 71 Embedded Web server sections Tab or section Options Information tab ● Device Status: Shows the product status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change Settings. ● Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page. ● Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Shop for Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window. ● Event log: Shows a list of all product events and errors. ● Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the product has printed, grouped by size and type. ● Diagnostics page: Shows information about the product that can be useful when resolving problems. An HP-authorized support person might ask for this information. ● Device Information: Shows the product network name, address, and model information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab. ● Control Panel: Shows messages from the control panel, such as Ready or Sleep mode on. ● Print: Allows you to send print jobs to the product. Settings tab ● Configure Device: Allows you to configure product settings. This page contains the traditional menus found on the control-panel display. Provides the ability to configure the product from your computer ● E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up email alerts. Provides product, status, and configuration information NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this product ● is on a network, always consult with the system administrator before ● changing settings on this tab. Networking tab 72 Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various product and supplies events. AutoSend: Allows you to configure the product to send automated e-mails regarding product configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses. ● Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server. ● Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages. ● Device Information: Allows you to name the product and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the product. ● Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information. ● Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server. ● Wake Time: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the product. Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the product when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the product is directly connected to a computer, or if the product is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Tab or section Options Provides the ability to change network settings from your computer NOTE: Other links ● HP Instant Support™: Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service analyzes the product error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your product. ● Shop for Supplies: Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper. ● Product Support: Connects to the support site for the product, from which you can search for help regarding general topics. ● Show Me How: Connects to information that demonstrates specific tasks for the product. Contains links that connect you to the Internet The Networking tab can be password-protected. NOTE: You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it. ENWW Use the embedded Web server 73 Use HP Web Jetadmin software HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive, allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software. To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically connect to the HP Web site. If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux. Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host. NOTE: Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported. 74 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Use security features The product supports security standards and recommended protocols that help you keep the product secure, protect critical information on your network, and simplify the way you monitor and maintain the product. For in-depth information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit www.hp.com/go/ secureprinting. The site provides links to white papers and FAQ documents about security features. IP Security IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network traffic to and from the product. IPsec provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications. For products that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure IPsec by using the Networking tab in the embedded Web server. Secure the embedded Web server You can configure the embedded Web server so that access to the Settings and Networking tabs requires a password. 1. Open the embedded Web server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser. 2. Select the Settings tab, and then select Security from the menu on the left side of the screen. 3. In the Device Password area, type the new password in the boxes labeled New Password and Verify Password. If you have already set up a password, type the old password in the Old Password box. 4. Click Apply. Secure stored jobs You can protect jobs that are stored on the product by assigning a PIN to them. Anyone who tries to print these protected jobs must first enter the PIN at the product control panel. For more information, see the user guide. ENWW Use security features 75 Lock the control panel menus You can lock various menus on the control panel by using the embedded Web server. 1. Open the embedded Web server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser. 2. Click Settings, and then click Security. 3. Click Configure Security Settings. 4. In the area for Control Panel Access Lock, select the level of security that you want. Security level Locked menus Minimum ● The RETRIEVE JOB menu requires a PIN for access. ● The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, SYSTEM SETUP submenu is locked. ● The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, I/O submenu is locked. ● The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, RESETS submenu is locked. ● The RETRIEVE JOB menu requires a PIN for access. ● The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu is locked (all submenus). ● The DIAGNOSTICS menu is locked. ● The RETRIEVE JOB menu requires a PIN for access. ● The PAPER HANDLING menu is locked. ● The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu is locked (all submenus). ● The DIAGNOSTICS menu is locked. ● The RETRIEVE JOB menu requires a PIN for access. ● The INFORMATION menu is locked. ● The PAPER HANDLING menu is locked. ● The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu is locked (all submenus). ● The DIAGNOSTICS menu is locked. Moderate Intermediate Maximum 5. 76 Click Apply. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Lock the formatter cage The formatter cage, on the back of the product, has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable. Locking the formatter cage prevents someone from removing DIMMs and internal USB devices from the formatter. ENWW Use security features 77 Manage supplies Using, storing, and monitoring the print cartridge can help ensure high-quality output. Supplies life The average cartridge yield is 10,000 pages (for the CC364A cartridge) or 24,000 pages (for the CC364X cartridge), in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. Actual cartridge yield depends on specific use. CAUTION: EconoMode is a feature that allows the product to use less toner per page. Selecting this option can extend the life of the toner supply and can reduce cost per page. However, it also reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs. HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you will need to install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge. Approximate print-cartridge replacement intervals Print cartridge Page count Approximate time period1 Black (CC364A) 10,000 pages 5 months Black (CC364X) 24,000 pages 12 months 1 Approximate life is based on 2,000 pages per month. To order supplies, see Order replacement parts on page 342. Manage the print cartridge Print-cartridge storage Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Use genuine HP print cartridges When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following supplies information: ● Percentage of supplies remaining ● Estimated number of pages remaining ● Number of pages printed HP policy on non-HP print cartridges Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. NOTE: Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and service agreements. 78 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW To install a new HP print cartridge, see Change the print cartridge on page 80. To recycle the used cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new cartridge. Print-cartridge authentication The device automatically authenticates the print cartridge when it is inserted into the device. During authentication, the device notifies you whether a cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge. If the device control-panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe you purchased an HP print cartridge, see HP fraud hotline and Web site on page 79. HP fraud hotline and Web site Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem. Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following: ● You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge. ● The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the orange pull tab is missing, or the packaging differs from HP packaging). Replace supplies and parts Supply replacement guidelines Keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the product. ● Sufficient space is required above and in the front of the product for removing supplies. ● The product should be located on a flat, sturdy surface. NOTE: Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of HP supplies in this product. Use of non-HP supplies can cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements. ENWW Manage supplies 79 Change the print cartridge When a print cartridge approaches the end of useful life, a message appears on the control panel recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current print cartridge until a message appears instructing you to replace the cartridge. 80 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove the used print cartridge from the product. 3. Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 4. Grasp both sides of the print cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the print cartridge. CAUTION: Do not touch the shutter or the surface of the roller. 5. Remove the shipping lock and the shipping tape from the new print cartridge. Discard the lock and tape according to local regulations. 6. Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the product, insert the print cartridge until it is firmly seated, and then close the top cover. After a short time, the control panel should display Ready. ENWW 7. Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions. 8. If you are using a non-HP print cartridge, check the product control panel for further instructions. Manage supplies 81 For additional help, go to www.hp.com/support/hpljp4010series or www.hp.com/support/ hpljp4510series. Load staples Load staples if the product control-panel display prompts you with a message. If the stapler runs out of staples, jobs continue to print to the stapler/stacker, but they are not stapled. 82 1. On the right side of the stapler/stacker, turn the stapler unit toward the front of the product until the unit clicks into the open position. Grasp the blue staple-cartridge handle and pull the cartridge out of the stapler unit. 2. Insert the new staple cartridge into the stapler unit and rotate the stapler unit toward the rear of the product until the unit snaps into place. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Perform preventive maintenance To ensure optimum performance from the product, replace certain parts when the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears on the control-panel display. The maintenance message appears after printing 225,000 pages. The message can be temporarily cleared for approximately 10,000 pages by using the CLEAR MAINTENANCE MESSAGE item on the RESETS submenu. To check the number of pages printed since new maintenance-kit components were installed, print either a configuration page or a supplies status page. To order the complete preventative maintenance kit or an individual maintenance kit, see Maintenance kits on page 344. The complete preventative maintenance kit includes the following items: ● Fuser ● Transfer roller ● Plastic tool for removing the old transfer roller ● Pair of gloves for handling the new transfer roller ● Eight feed rollers for the other trays ● Installation instructions NOTE: A maintenance kit is a consumable item and is not covered under the original product warranty or under most extended warranties. Installing a maintenance kit is the customer's responsibility. The following individual maintenance kits are also available. ● Multipurpose tray kit ● Printer roller kit ● Transfer roller kit ● Fuser kit (110 V or 220 V) After a maintenance kit is installed, the maintenance-kit counter must be reset. Reset the maintenance-kit counter 1. Turn the product power off and then on. 2. When XXX MB appears on the control-panel display, press and hold down the OK button until all three control-panel lights flash once, and then stay on. This might take up to 10 seconds. 3. Release the OK button and press the up arrow 4. Press OK to reset the maintenance-kit counter. to scroll to NEW MAINTENANCE KIT. NOTE: Perform this procedure only after a maintenance kit has been installed. Do not use this procedure to temporarily clear the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message. ENWW Manage supplies 83 Install memory, internal USB devices, and external print server cards Overview The formatter has the following open slots and ports for expanding the product's capabilities: ● One dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot for upgrading the product with more memory ● Two internal USB ports for adding fonts, languages, and other third-party solutions ● One external I/O (EIO) slot for adding an external print server, an external hard disk, or a parallel port If the product already has an embedded HP Jetdirect print server installed, you can add an additional networking device in the EIO slot. For information about specific components that are available and information about ordering them, see Order replacement parts on page 342. To find out how much memory is installed in the product or to find out what is installed in the USB ports or the EIO slot, print a configuration page. Install memory You might want to add more memory to the product if you often print complex graphics, print PostScript (PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features, such as quick copying. This product supports printing PDF files when 128 MB of memory is installed. However, for the best performance, upgrade the memory to at least 192 MB. NOTE: Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) used in previous HP LaserJet products are not compatible with the product. Install product memory This product has one DIMM slot. CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package, then touch bare metal on the product. 84 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW If you have not already done so, print a configuration page to find out how much memory is installed in the product before adding more memory. See Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66. 1. After the configuration page has printed, turn the product off and disconnect the power cord. 1 2 ENWW 2. Disconnect all interface cables. 3. Remove the right-side panel by sliding it towards the rear of the product to unlatch it. Manage supplies 85 4. Open the access door by pulling on the metal tab. 5. Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity, always wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap or touch the surface of the antistatic package before handling DIMMs. 6. 86 Hold the DIMM by the edges, and align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open.) Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 7. Press the DIMM straight into the slot, and press firmly. Make sure the locks on each side of the DIMM snap into place. 1 2 2 NOTE: To remove a DIMM, first release the locks. 1 8. ENWW 2 1 Close the access door, and press firmly until it snaps into place. Manage supplies 87 9. Reinstall the right-side panel. Align the tabs on the panel with the slots in the product, and push the panel toward the front of the product until it latches into place. 10. Reconnect the interface cables and the power cord. 11. Turn the product on. Check DIMM installation After installing the DIMM, make sure that the installation was successful. 1. Turn the product on. Check that the Ready light is illuminated after the product has gone through the startup sequence. If an error message appears, a DIMM might have been incorrectly installed. See Control-panel messages on page 282. 2. Print a configuration page (see Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66). 3. Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration page that was printed before the memory installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, the DIMM might not be installed correctly, or the DIMM might be defective. Repeat the installation procedure. If necessary, install a different DIMM. NOTE: If you installed a product language (personality), check the "Installed Personalities and Options" section on the configuration page. This area should list the new product language. Save resources (permanent resources) Utilities or jobs that you download to the product sometimes include resources (for example, fonts, macros, or patterns). Resources that are internally marked as permanent remain in the product memory until you turn the product off. 88 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Use the following guidelines if you use the page description language (PDL) ability to mark resources as permanent. For technical details, see an appropriate PDL reference for PCL or PS. ● Mark resources as permanent only when it is absolutely necessary that they remain in memory while the product is turned on. ● Send permanent resources to the product only at the beginning of a print job and not while the product is printing. NOTE: Overusing permanent resources or downloading them while the product is printing might affect product performance or the ability to print complex pages. Enable memory for Windows 1. Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 (using the default Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. -orWindows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 (using the Classic Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. -orWindows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and Sound click Printer. ENWW 2. Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. 4. Expand the area for Installable Options. 5. Next to Printer Memory, select the total amount of memory that is installed. 6. Click OK. Manage supplies 89 Install internal USB devices The product has two internal USB ports. 1. Turn the product off and disconnect the power cord. 1 2 90 2. Disconnect all interface cables. 3. Remove the right-side panel by sliding it towards the rear of the product to unlatch it. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW ENWW 4. Open the access door by pulling on the metal tab. 5. Locate the USB ports near the bottom of the formatter board. Insert the USB device into one of the ports. 6. Close the access door, and press firmly until it snaps into place. Manage supplies 91 92 7. Reinstall the right-side panel. Align the tabs on the panel with the slots in the product, and push the panel toward the front of the product until it latches into place. 8. Reconnect the interface cables and the power cord. 9. Turn the product on. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Install HP Jetdirect print server cards Follow these procedures to install or remove an EIO card. Install an HP Jetdirect print server card 1. Turn off the product. 2. Remove the two screws and cover plate from the EIO slot on the back of the product. NOTE: Do not discard the screws or the cover plate. Save them for future use if you remove the EIO card. 3. ENWW Install the EIO card in the EIO slot and tighten the screws. Manage supplies 93 4. Connect the network cable to the EIO card. 5. Turn on the product, and then print a configuration page to verify that the new EIO device is recognized. See Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66. NOTE: When you print a configuration page, an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information also prints. Remove an HP Jetdirect print server card 94 1. Turn off the product. 2. Disconnect the network cable from the EIO card. 3. Loosen the two screws from the EIO card, and then remove the EIO card from the EIO slot. 4. Place the cover plate from the EIO slot onto the back of the product. Insert and tighten the two screws. 5. Turn on the product. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Clean the product During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Clean the exterior Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off of the exterior of the device. Clean the paper path 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press OK. . NOTE: If your product has an automatic duplexer, go to step 7. 4. Press the down arrow to highlight CREATE CLEANING PAGE, and then press OK. 5. Remove all paper from Tray 1. 6. Remove the cleaning page from the output bin, and load it face-down in Tray 1. NOTE: If you are not in the menus, navigate to PRINT QUALITY by using the previous instructions. 7. At the product control panel, press the down arrow and then press OK. to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE, Clean the paper path automatically You can set the product to clean the paper path automatically after the product has printed a certain number of pages. Products in dirtier environments can be cleaned more frequently by choosing one of the lower page count settings. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press OK. 4. Press the down arrow to highlight AUTO CLEANING, and then press OK. 5. Press the down arrow to highlight ON, and then press OK. 6. Press the down arrow to highlight CLEANING INTERVAL, and then press OK. . NOTE: If you are not in the menus, navigate to PRINT QUALITY by using the previous instructions. 7. ENWW Press the down arrow to highlight the correct page count interval, and then press OK. Manage supplies 95 Upgrade the firmware This product has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use this information to upgrade the product firmware. Determine the current firmware version 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press OK to print. . The firmware datecode is listed on the Configuration page in the section called Device Information. The firmware datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the date, where YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For example, a firmware datecode of that begins with 20061125 represents November 25, 2006. Download new firmware from the HP Web site To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ ljp4010series_software or www.hp.com/go/ljp4510series_software. This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version. Transfer the new firmware to the product NOTE: The product can receive an .RFU file update when it is in a "ready" state. The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the product to re-initialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update. If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while Receiving upgrade appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while the Performing upgrade message appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message Resend upgrade appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send the upgrade by using the parallel port. Finally, any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are completed before the update is processed. Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults. 1. 2. 96 Make sure the Internet browser you are using is configured for viewing folders from FTP sites. These instructions are for Microsoft Internet Explorer. a. Open the browser and click Tools, and then click Internet Options. b. Click the Advanced tab. c. Select the box labeled Enable folder view for FTP sites. d. Click OK. Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address shown on the EIO Jetdirect page. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 3. Open a browser window. 4. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://, where is the address of the product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp:// 192.168.0.90. 5. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product. 6. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window. NOTE: The product turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update process is complete, a Ready message displays on the product control panel. Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults. 1. Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page that prints when you print the configuration page. NOTE: Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the product is not in Sleep mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display. 2. Open an MS-DOS command prompt on your computer. 3. Type: ftp TCP/IP ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90. 4. Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored. 5. Press Enter on the keyboard. 6. When prompted for the user name, press Enter. 7. When prompted for the password, press Enter. 8. Type bin at the command prompt. 9. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window. 10. Type put and then the file name. For example, if the file name is LJP4015.RFU, type put LJP4015.RFU. 11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take approximately five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer. NOTE: The product automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade. 12. At the command prompt, type: bye to exit the ftp command. 13. At the command prompt, type: exit to return to the Windows interface. ENWW Manage supplies 97 Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your computer. See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 74. Complete the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site. 1. Start HP Web Jetadmin. 2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder. 3. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product in the list of devices, and then click to select it. If you need to upgrade the firmware for products, select all of them by pressing the Ctrl key as you click the name of each product. 4. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update Printer Firmware from the action list. 5. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it. 6. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. After the upload is complete, the browser window refreshes. 7. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu. 8. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. The control panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready message. Use Microsoft Windows commands to upgrade the firmware To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions. 1. Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd to open the command window. 2. Type the following: copy /B FILENAME> \\COMPUTERNAME>\SHARENAME>, where is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and is the product share name. For example: C:\>copy /b C:\LJP4015.RFU \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER. NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\LJP4015.RFU" \ \YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER. 3. Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready message. The message One File Copied appears on the computer screen. Upgrade the HP Jetdirect firmware The HP Jetdirect network interface in the product has firmware that can be upgraded separately from the product firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on 98 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW your computer. See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 74. Complete the following steps to update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin. 1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program. 2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder. 3. Select the product that you want to update. 4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update. 5. Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version are listed. Make a note of these. 6. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware. 7. Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you wrote down. 8. Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you wrote down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page to download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the :\PROGRAM FILES \HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software. 9. In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main product list and select the digital sender again. 10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update again. 11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect Firmware Available on HP Web Jetadmin. Click the Update Firmware Now button to update the Jetdirect firmware. ENWW Manage supplies 99 100 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 5 ENWW Theory of operation ● Basic operation ● Engine-control system ● Laser/scanner system ● Image-formation system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system 101 Basic operation Major print systems Operation can be divided into the following systems: ● Engine-control system (which includes the power supply and DC controller PCA) ● Laser/scanner system (which forms the latent image on a photosensitive drum) ● Image-formation system (which transfers a toner image onto the print media) ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system (which consists of various rollers and transports the media through the product) ● Options Figure 5-1 Major product systems LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM OPTION 102 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Internal components Figure 5-2 Internal components, product base 19 ENWW 1 2 18 17 16 3 4 15 5 6 14 13 12 7 8 11 9 10 1 Face-down delivery roller 11 Feed roller 2 Fuser sleeve unit 12 Tray 2 separation roller 3 Laser/scanner unit 13 Tray 2 feed roller 4 Photosensitive drum 14 Tray 2 pickup roller 5 Transfer roller 15 Print cartridge 6 Registration shutter 16 Pressure roller 7 Pre-transfer roller 17 Fuser 8 Tray 1 pickup roller 18 Fuser delivery roller 9 Tray 1 feed roller 19 Intermediate delivery roller 10 Tray 1 separation roller Basic operation 103 Figure 5-3 Internal components, 500-sheet paper tray 1 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 3 Separation roller 4 Feed roller 2 4 3 Figure 5-4 Internal components, 1,500-sheet paper tray 1 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 104 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 2 3 4 ENWW 3 Separation roller 4 Feed roller Figure 5-5 Internal components, envelope feeder 1 ENWW 2 3 4 1 Feed roller 2 Upper separation roller 3 Lower separation roller 4 Separation guide 5 Weight 6 Pickup roller 5 6 Basic operation 105 Figure 5-6 Internal components, duplexer 1 2 1 Oblique rollers 2 Re-pickup rollers Figure 5-7 Internal components, custom media cassette 1 1 Separation roller Operating sequence A microprocessor on the DC controller PCA controls the product operating sequence. The following table describes the basic operating sequence from when the product power is turned on until the final printed page is delivered to an output bin. 106 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5-1 Product operating sequence Period Duration Operation WAIT From the time the power is turned on, the door is closed or Sleep mode is released until the product gets ready for a print operation. ● Brings the product to standby condition. ● Pressurizes the fuser pressure roller. ● Detects the print cartridge. From the end of WAIT or LSTR period until either the print command is received from the formatter or the power switch is turned off. ● Maintains the product in printable condition. ● Puts the product in Sleep mode when the formatter sends a sleep command. INTR (Initial rotation period) From the time the print command is received from the formatter until the media is picked up. Starts up each high-voltage bias, laser/scanner unit, and fuser for printing. PRINT From the end of INTR period until the last paper completes the fixing operation. ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drum based on the signals from the formatter. ● Transfers and fuses the toner image to the print media. ● Moves the last printed sheet out of the product. ● Stops the laser/scanner unit operation and high-voltage biases. STBY (Standby) LSTR (Last rotation period) From the end of PRINT period until the motors stop rotating. The product enters the INTR period as soon as the LSTR period is completed, if the formatter sends another print command. ENWW Basic operation 107 Engine-control system The engine control system coordinates all product functions and controls all the other systems according to commands from the formatter. The engine control system contains the following components: ● DC controller ● Low-voltage power supply ● High-voltage power supply ● Fuser control Figure 5-8 Engine-control system ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM DC controller LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM Low-voltage power supply Formatte r IMAGE-FORMA TION SYSTEM High-voltage power supply PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM Fuser control DC controller PCA The DC controller PCA controls the operation of the product and its components. The DC controller PCA starts product operation when the power is turned on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the DC controller PCA. After the product enters the standby sequence, the DC controller PCA sends out various 108 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other components based on the print command and image data that the host computer sends. Figure 5-9 DC controller PCA CL Clutch Fan Fuser uni t M Motor Fuser control Solenoid AC input Low-voltage power supply Switch Sensor DC controller Transfer roller High-voltage power supply Sensor Cartridge Option Power supply unit Laser/scanner unit Formatter Motors and fans The product has four motors and four fan motors. The motors are used for the media feeding and image formation. The fan motors are used for preventing a temperature rise inside the product. Table 5-2 Fans ENWW Description Cooling area Type Speed Cooling fan FN101 Cartridge area and power supply area Intake Full/Half1 Cooling fan FN102 Cartridge area Intake Full2 Cooling fan FN103 Cartridge area Intake Full2 Engine-control system 109 Table 5-2 Fans (continued) Description Cooling area Type Speed Cooling fan FN301 Cartridge area and laser/scanner Intake Full2 Cooling fan FN101 rotates at full speed for eight seconds when the product is turned on, and then decreases to half-speed 1 for approximately 10 minutes. After that time period, if there is no print job in the print queue, the fan will stop completely. The fan rotates at full speed during a print job. This fan operates at full speed only during a print job. Otherwise, it does not rotate. 2 Table 5-3 Motors Description Driving parts Type Feed motor (M101) Drives the Tray 1 pickup roller, Tray 2 pickup roller, and DC feed roller Yes Drum motor (M102) Drives the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, DC and transfer roller Yes Fuser motor (M103) Drives the pressure roller and feed roller—when rotated DC counterclockwise it releases the fusing pressure for easier jam removal Yes Lifter motor (M299) Drives the lifting plate of the tray No DC Failure detection Failure detection Motor failure The DC controller determines a motor failure and notifies the formatter when it encounters the following conditions: ● Motor start-up failure: The motor does not reach a specified speed within a specified period from when each motor starts up. ● Motor rotational failure: The rotational speed of the motor is out of a specified range for a specified period from when it once reaches a specified speed. Fan motor failure The DC controller determines a fan motor failure and notifies the formatter when the fan locks for a specified period from when each fan starts up. Engine power supply The power supply consists of the fuser-control circuit, the high-voltage circuit, and the low-voltage circuit. The fuser-control and high-voltage circuits control the temperature of the fuser and generate highvoltage according to signals from the DC controller PCA. The low-voltage circuit generates the DC voltages that other components in the product use (for example the DC controller PCA, the motors, and fans). Fuser-control circuit The fuser-control circuit controls the fuser components. The two fuser heaters provide the high temperatures that cause the toner to permanently bond to the media. The fuser thermistor monitors the 110 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW fuser temperatures. The thermal switch detects abnormally high fuser temperatures and interrupts the supply of voltage to the fuser if the temperature is too high. Figure 5-10 Fuser control TH2 TH1 Fuser control TP1 FUSER HEATER DRIVE signal H1 Fuser heater drive circuit Fuser sleeve Relay Pressure roller Fuser heater safety circuit CPU FUSER HEATER TEMPERATURE signal DC controller ENWW Engine-control system 111 Low-voltage power supply The low-voltage power supply converts AC power from the power receptacle into DC power to cover the DC loads. Figure 5-11 Low-voltage power supply Power supply unit DC controller Low-voltage power supply Fuse (FU1) ACH Noise filter ACN +5V Fuser control 5VPRO +5V generation circuit Power switch (SW1) +24VA Rectifying circuit Sleep switch 3 Rectifying circuit +24VA +24U +24R Noise filter ConstantConstantvoltage control voltage photocoupler control circuit (PC2) Abnormal status latch photocoupler (PC1) Rectifying circuit 100V: Open 200V: Close JP1001 High-voltage power supply Sleep switch 2 /DOPEN +24VC Protection circuit Sleep switch 1 +24VB /AC200 +24VC Control IC (IC1) +24VA Transformer (T1) Fuse (FU2) +3.3R +3.3V Door open detection switch (SW101) High-voltage power supply The high-voltage power supply applies the high-voltage biases to the following components: ● Primary charging roller ● Developing roller ● Transfer roller 112 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ● Fuser sleeve ● Pressure roller Figure 5-12 High-voltage power supply Cartridge From antenna From antenna Photosensitive drum Fuser sleeve To developing cylinder To primary charging roller Transfer roller Fuser high-voltage generation circuit TB502 Transfer high-voltage generation circuit Primary charging high-voltage generation circuit High-voltage power supply ANT1 T503 TB501 TB503 Toner level detection circuit Developing highvoltage generation circuit TNRSP1 TB504 ANT2 TB21 TNRSP2 KAATUBIAS TB20 TRAD FILMBIAS Pressure roller Power supply unit DC controller Overcurrent/overvoltage protection If a short-circuit or other problem on the load side causes an excessive current flow or generates abnormal voltage, the overcurrent/overvoltage protection systems automatically cut off the output voltage to protect the power-supply circuit. If the overcurrent or overvoltage protection system are activated and the power-supply circuit does not generate DC voltage, turn the power off, correct the problem, and then turn the product on again. The circuit has two fuses (FU1, FU2), which break and cut off the output voltage if overcurrent flows through the alternating current (AC) line. ENWW Engine-control system 113 Laser/scanner system The laser/scanner system forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals sent from the formatter. The main components, such as the laser driver and scanner motor, are assembled as a laser/scanner unit and controlled by the DC controller. The DC controller allows the laser to emit light according to the VIDEO signals. The laser beam passes through the lenses and enters the scanner mirror that is rotating at constant speed. The laser beam is reflected by the scanner mirror, passes through the lenses, and scans on the photosensitive drum. Figure 5-13 Laser/scanner system Formatter Scanner motor unit BD INPUT signal VIDEO signal LASER CONTROL signal SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal DC controller Laser driver Scanner mirror BD PCA Photosensitive drum 114 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The laser scanner uses two laser diodes to scan two lines simultaneously, producing high-speed laser scanning. After receiving the print command from the host computer, the DC controller PCA activates the scanner motor, which rotates the six-sided scanner mirror. The laser-driver PCA emits light from the two laser diodes according to signals from the DC controller PCA. The two laser beams strike the sixsided scanning mirror and are directed through the focusing lenses and onto the photosensitive drum. The modulated laser beams generate the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to the image data signals that the DC controller PCA sends. 1. As it receives a print command from the formatter, the dc controller outputs the SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal (/ACC) and rotates the scanner motor in order to rotate the six-sided mirror. 2. As the scanner motor starts rotating, the dc controller uses a LASER CONTROL signal (CNT0, CNT1, CNT2) to receive the /BD INPUT signal (/BDI) and force the laser to emit light . The dc controller detects the rotational speed of the scanner motor based on the timing the /BD1 signal is input and controls the speed to keep it constant. 3. While the scanner motor rotates at a constant speed, the dc controller passes the VIDEO signals from the formatter on to the laser driver PCA. The laser driver PCA emits light from the two laser diodes according to these signals: VDO1, /VDO1, VDO2, /VDO2. 4. The two laser beams pass through the collimator lens and cylindrical lens and strike the six-sided mirror that is rotating at a constant speed. 5. The laser beams, that are reflected off of the six-sided mirror pass through the focus lens and reflective mirror and focus on the photosensitive drum. The laser beams scan the drum surface at a constant speed. 6. As the six-sided mirror rotates and the laser beam scans the drum surface at a constant speed, a latent image forms on the drum surface. Laser failure detection The DC controller determines a laser/scanner unit failure and notifies the formatter, if the laser/scanner unit encounters the following conditions: ENWW ● Laser failure: The laser intensity is not detected for a specified value when the laser is turned on for a specified period during the scanner unit start-up period. ● BD failure: The BD interval is out of a specified value during a print operation. ● Scanner motor start-up failure: The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation within a specified period from when the scanner motor starts rotation. Laser/scanner system 115 Image-formation system The image-formation system is the central hub of the product. It forms the toner image on the media. The following are the main components of the image-formation system: ● Cartridge ● Transfer roller ● Fuser The DC controller controls the laser/scanner unit and high-voltage power supply to form an image on the media according to the VIDEO signals. Image-formation process The image formation system is the central hub of the product. It also forms the toner image on the media. Figure 5-14 Image-formation system Cartridge Laser/scanner unit Laser beam Photosensitive drum Fuser sleeve To developing cylinder To primary charging roller Transfer roller Pressure roller TB20 TB21 TB504 T503 TB502 Power supply unit High-voltage power supply circuit DC controller VIDEO signal Formatter 116 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The image-formation process contains eight steps divided among five functional blocks: ● Block 1: Latent image formation Step 1: Primary charging Step 2: Laser-beam exposure ● Block 2: Developing Step 3: Developing ● Block 3: Transfer Step 4: Transfer Step 5: Separation ● Block 4: Fusing Step 6: Fusing ● Block 5: Drum cleaning Step 7: Drum cleaning Step 8: Drum charge elimination Figure 5-15 Image-formation process Latent image formation Media path 2. Laser-beam exposure Direction of the drum rotation Block 1. Primary charging Developing Step 8. Drum charge elimination 3. Developing Drum cleaning 7. Drum cleaning Delivery 6. Fuser Fuser 5. Separation 4. Transfer Pickup Transfer Block 1: Latent image formation During the two steps that comprise this block, an invisible latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum. Step 1: Primary charging To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform negative potential. The product charges the photosensitive drum surface directly from the primary ENWW Image-formation system 117 charging roller. The DC bias and AC bias are applied to the primary charging roller to maintain a constant charge on the drum surface. Figure 5-16 Primary charging Primary charging roller AC bias Photosensitive drum DC bias Step 2: Laser-beam exposure The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on portions of the drum surface. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized. Figure 5-17 Laser-beam exposure Laser beam Unexposed area Exposed area Block 2: Developing Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum. Step 3: Developing Toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing cylinder rotates against the developing blade. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the 118 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW photosensitive drum surface because the drum surface has a higher potential. The AC bias that is superimposed with the developing negative DC bias is applied to the developing cylinder. Figure 5-18 Developing Blade Developing cylinder Exposed area Unexposed area Unexposed area AC bias Exposed area DC bias Photosensitive drum Block 3: Transfer During the steps that comprise this block, a toner image on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the print media. Step 4: Transfer The positive DC bias is applied to the transfer roller to charge the media positive. The positively charged media attracts the negatively charged toner from the photosensitive drum surface. Figure 5-19 Transfer Photosensitive drum Media Transfer roller DC bias ENWW Image-formation system 119 Step 5: Separation The curvature elasticity of the print media causes it to separate from the photosensitive drum surface. The static charge eliminator reduces back side static discharge of the media for stable media feed and image quality. Figure 5-20 Separation Photosensitive drum Media Static charge eliminator Transfer roller Block 4: Fusing The toner image is fixed onto the print media. Step 6: Fusing The product uses the on-demand fixing method to fix the toner image onto the media. The image is permanently affixed to the print media by the heat and pressure. Figure 5-21 Fusing Fuser heater Brush Fuser sleeve Toner Media Pressure roller DC bias DC bias Block 5: Drum cleaning The residual (waste) toner is cleared from the photosensitive drum surface to prepare for the next latent image formation. 120 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Step 7: Drum cleaning The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum and deposits it in the waste toner container. Figure 5-22 Drum cleaning Cleaning blade Waste toner container Photosensitive drum Step 8: Drum charge elimination The residual charge on the photosensitive drum surface is eliminated to avoid uneven image. The residual charge of the previous image is left on the drum surface after the transfer operation and this affects the following image formation. The product eliminates this residual charge by emitting a laser beam to the drum surface. The drum charge elimination is operated only during the last rotation period. Figure 5-23 Drum charge elimination Laser beam ENWW Image-formation system 121 Pickup, feed, and delivery system The pickup, feed, and delivery system consists of various rollers that the product motors drive. The product uses Tray 1 (the manual feeding tray) and a cassette in Tray 2 as media sources. The printed media is delivered to either the rear output bin (straight-through printing) or the top output bin (the default destination). A number of 500-sheet feeders and one 1,500-sheet feeder can be added to certain models. These accessories are discussed later in this chapter. The Tray 1 paper sensor (on the Tray 1 pickup assembly; PS105) detects media in Tray 1. The Tray 2 paper sensor (PS101) detects media in Tray 2. The paper-size switch (SW102) detects the media size that is loaded in Tray 2. Two motors, a clutch, and a solenoid that are controlled by the DC controller PCA drive all of the rollers in the product. The pre-feed, top-of-page, and fuser-assembly delivery sensors (PS102, PS103, PS700) detect media arriving and passing along the paper path. If the media does not reach or pass these sensors within a specific amount of time, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA halts the product functions and a jam error message appears on the control-panel display. Figure 5-24 Pickup, feed, and delivery system PS104 Face-down delivery roller PS699 PS700 Fixing sleeve Pressure roller Registration shutter Photosensitive drum PS103 Pre-transfer roller PS106 Transfer roller PS108 Lifting plate Feed roller PS105 PS102 PS107 PS907 Feed roller PS101 Lifter Separation roller SW102 Pickup arm Pickup roller Lifting plate The pickup-and-feed system is divided into two blocks: The pickup-and-feed block and the fuser/delivery block. 122 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-25 Pickup, feed, and delivery blocks Face-down delivery Fixing/delivery unit Face-up delivery Pickup/feed unit Pickup-and-feed block The following functions take place in the pickup-and-feed block: ● Detection of media ● Detection of media-size ● Detection of media entering the paper path from Tray 1 or Tray 2 ● Lifting of the Tray 2 paper plate ● Prevention of multiple-feeds ● Correction of page skew When it receives a print command from the host computer, the DC controller PCA turns on the feed motor (M101) power. The motor drives the Tray 2 pickup, feed, and separation rollers. The drum motor power also turns on. The laser/ scanner motor power turns on. The DC controller PCA then activates the feed clutch (CL101) to rotate the feed roller. The Tray 2 pickup solenoid is activated (SL101) and the pickup arm descends. The pickup roller touches the media and a sheet is fed into the product. The separation roller prevents multiple sheets of media from being fed at one time. As the pre-feed sensor (PS102) detects the media, the dc controller PCA turns off the clutch, which stops the media. When the DC controller PCA detects that the laser/scanner is ready it activates the feed clutch again. The feed roller moves the media farther into the product. The registration shutter corrects page skew and the media is transported to the fuser/delivery block. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 123 Fuser/delivery block The fuser/delivery block consists of rollers, sensors, the fuser, and the output delivery assembly. The rollers transport the media through the fuser/delivery block paper path. The fuser applies heat and pressure to the media to permanently bond the toner image to the media. The output delivery assembly sends the printed media either to the rear output bin (if the rear output door is open) or to the top output bin (the default output delivery bin). Sensors along the paper path detect media movement, jams, and the top output-bin capacity. Paper trays Printing from Tray 1 The Tray 1 paper sensor (PS105) detects the presence of media in Tray 1. When the DC controller PCA receives the print command, the product starts the initial rotation phase, which consists of feed motor warm-up, scanner motor warm-up, high-voltage control sequence, and fuser warm-up. When the initial rotation phase ends, the Tray 1 pickup solenoid (SL102) is activated. The cam rotates, the paper-tray lifter rises, and the media comes in contact with the Tray 1 pickup roller. At the same time, the Tray 1 pickup roller rotates twice and picks up a sheet of media from Tray 1. The separation pad prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet. The sheet then reaches the registration assembly, where its skew is corrected. The sheet then passes through the transfer, separation, and fusing stages; through the delivery unit; and is to the output bin. NOTE: If media is removed from Tray 1 after the initial rotation phase, but before the pickup roller pulls the media from the tray, the Tray 1 pickup roller might continue to rotate up to six times, after which a jam detected. Printing from Tray 2 When the DC controller PCA receives the print command, the feed motor (M101) and scanner motor start their rotation. When the feed motor reaches its prescribed speed, the feed roller clutch (CL101) and Tray 2 pickup solenoid (SL101) are activated. (The feed motor rotation drives the Tray 2 pickup roller, Tray 2 feed roller, Tray 2 separation roller, and paper-feed rollers.) The Tray 2 pickup roller, which the pickup solenoid activates, rotates once and picks up the media in the tray. The separation roller prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet, and the media is fed to the pre-feed sensor (PS102). The sheet then reaches the registration assembly, where its skew is corrected. The sheet then passes through the transfer, separation, and fusing stages; through the delivery unit; and to the output bin. Formatter system The formatter is involved in the following procedures. ● Controlling the Sleep mode ● Receiving and processing print data from the various product inputs ● Monitoring control-panel functions and relaying product status information (through the control panel and the bidirectional input/output) ● Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA 124 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ● Storing font information ● Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface The formatter receives a print job from the bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process. The dc controller PCA synchronizes the imageformation system with the paper-input and -output systems, and then signals the formatter to send the print-image data. The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for an EIO card, additional memory DIMMs, and the hard-disk accessory. Sleep mode period of time. When the product is in Sleep mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the product retains all product settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is SLEEP MODE=ON, with a 30-minute idle time. Sleep mode also can be turned off from the RESETS menu on the control panel. The product exits Sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs. ● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the serial port or EIO card. ● A control panel key is pressed. ● The top cover is opened. ● A tray is opened. ● The engine-test button is pressed. NOTE: Error messages override the Sleep message. The product enters Sleep mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear. Resolution Enhancement technology The formatter contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the dc controller PCA to produce "smoothed" line edges. The REt can be turned on or off from the control panel or from some software programs. The default setting is medium. NOTE: The REt settings that are sent from software programs or printer drivers override the controlpanel settings. EconoMode The EconoMode setting uses up to 50% less toner than standard mode printing by reducing the dot density. However, EconoMode does not extend the life of print-cartridge components. EconoMode, which can be thought of as "draft mode," can be selected from the control panel (PRINT QUALITY menu) and through some software programs and printer drivers. The default setting is OFF. CAUTION: HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. NOTE: EconoMode does not affect print speed or memory usage, or extend the life of the print cartridge. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 125 Input/output The following sections discuss the input and output features of the product. USB The product includes a universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection. Embedded print server For all models except the HP LaserJet 4014 base model, the product includes an HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network. Expanded I/O An optional expanded I/O (EIO) card can be installed in the designated slot on the formatter. It provides automatic I/O switching between multiple computers or networks that are connected to the product. Hard-disk accessory The optional hard-disk accessory can be mounted in one of the EIO slots on the rear of the formatter. The optional EIO-based hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints (mopies) and storing forms, fonts, and signatures. CPU The product formatter incorporates a 400 MHz RISC processor. Product memory If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning message appears on the control panel. Some product messages are affected by the auto-continue and clearable warning settings on the control-panel SYSTEM SETUP menu. If CLEARABLE WARNING=JOB is set on the control panel, warning messages appear on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. If CLEARABLE WARNING=ON is set, warning messages appear on the control panel until OK is pressed. If an error occurs that prevents printing and AUTO CONTINUE=ON is set, the product goes offline for 10 seconds before it returns online. If AUTO CONTINUE=OFF is set, the message appears until OK is pressed. Read-only memory Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the read-only memory (ROM) stores dot patterns of internal character sets (fonts). Random-access memory The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter. Note that adding memory (DIMMs) might also increase the print speed for complex graphics. DIMM slot The DIMM slot can be used to add product memory. 126 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Nonvolatile memory The product uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or disconnected. Memory Enhancement technology The HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of font- and data-compression methods. NOTE: The MEt is available only in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in PS mode. PJL overview Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, use PJL to perform a variety of functions. ● Two-way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection. The product can send the host computer information about such things as the control panel settings, and the control panel settings can be changed from the host through two-way communication. ● Dynamic I/O switching. The product can be configured with a host on each I/O by using dynamic I/O switching. Even when the product is offline, it can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. ● Context-sensitive switching. The product can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself in that personality. ● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the product in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs are printed in landscape mode only if they are formatted for it. PML The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status monitoring through the I/O ports. Control panel The formatter sends and receives product status and command data to and from a control-panel PCA. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 127 128 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 6 ENWW Removal and replacement ● Removal and replacement strategy ● Service approach ● User-replaceable parts ● Service replaceable parts ● 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 129 Removal and replacement strategy This chapter documents the removal and replacement of field replaceable units (FRUs) only. Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, notes and tips are included to provide directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures. HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or problem-solving at the component level. Note the length, diameter, color, type, and location of each screw. Be sure to return each screw to its original location during reassembly. Incorrectly routed or loose wire harnesses can interfere with other internal components and can become damaged or broken. Frayed or pinched harness wires can be difficult to locate. When replacing wire harnesses, always use the provided wire loops, lance points, or wire-harness guides. Warnings, cautions, notes, and tips WARNING! Turn the product off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the product. If this warning is not followed, severe injury can result, as well as damage to the product. The power must be on for certain functional checks during problem solving. However, the power supply should be disconnected during parts removal. Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts. CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must make sure that all FFCs are fully seated in their connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA. NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw hole becomes stripped, repair the screw hole or replace the affected assembly. Electrostatic discharge CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when removing product parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product. 130 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Required tools ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-inch) shaft length ● Small flatblade screwdriver ● Needle-nose pliers ● ESD mat (if one is available) ● Penlight ● Tape (optional) ● Transfer-roller removal hook CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (1). Do not use a pozidrive screwdriver (2) or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads. CAUTION: Do not pull directly on the wires to disconnect them. Always pull on the plastic body of a connector to avoid damaging the connector wires. Figure 6-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison ENWW Removal and replacement strategy 131 Service approach Before performing service ● Remove all media from the product. ● Turn off the power using the power switch. ● Unplug the power cable and interface cable(s). ● Place the product on an ESD mat (if one is available). If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. ● Remove the print cartridge. See Print cartridge on page 139. ● Remove the trays and output bins. After performing service ● Return media to the input tray. ● Plug in the power cable. ● Reinstall the print cartridge. ● Reinstall the trays and output bins. ● Perform printer tests. 132 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Post-service tests After service has been completed, the following tests can be used to verify that the repair or replacement was successful. Test 1 (print-quality test) ENWW 1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps. 2. Ensure that the input tray contains clean, unmarked paper. 3. Attach the power cord, and then turn on the product. 4. Verify that the expected start-up sounds occur. 5. Print a configuration page (see Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66), and then verify that the expected printing sounds occur. 6. If necessary, restore any customer-specified settings. 7. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth. Service approach 133 Types of screws This table describes the screws that are used in the product and provides guidelines to help determine where each type of screw is used. The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material that is being fastened. Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one in its original location. WARNING! Make sure that components are replaced with the correct screw type. Using the incorrect screw (for example, substituting a long screw for the correct shorter screw) can cause damage to the product or interfere with product operation. Do not intermix screws that are removed with one component with the screws that are removed from another component. TIP: When you are disassembling the product, place the screws into the chassis holes from which they were removed. This prevents their loss, and ensures that the proper type and length of screw for each location is used when the product is reassembled. Table 6-1 Common fasteners used in this product Screw type Purpose This screw is used to fasten metal to metal when good electrical contact is needed. This screw also provides high resistance to loosening. Phillips-head machine screw with captive star washer This screw is used to fasten sheet metal or plastic to plastic frames (the deep, coarsely spaced threads provide an increased holding capability while decreasing the possibility of stripping the target hole). Phillips-head screw with self-tapping threads Reinstallation note: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten it. You will feel resistance and hear the screw click when it engages the existing threads in the hole. Do not overtighten the screw. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly. This screw is used to fasten sheet metal parts to the sheetmetal chassis. It spans large clearance holes and distributes the load by increasing the bearing surface. Phillips washer-head machine screw with a broad, flat washer attached to the screw head 12 mm Screw measurement guide 134 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Parts removal order Use the following diagrams to determine the order in which parts must be removed. Figure 6-2 Parts-removal tree Pick 103 3 ENWW Service approach 135 Product input trays and cabinet wheel locks When the product and input trays are placed on the cabinet stand, the product and trays must be locked together to prevent them from tipping over. This is not necessary (but it is recommended) if the product and trays are placed on a level work surface. When servicing the product and accessories, unlatch the locking mechanism and separate the product and its accessory components. The cabinet stand includes locks for the wheels at its base. Make sure that the wheels are locked when the product is in place. The wheels should be unlocked only when the product is being moved. Figure 6-3 Product input trays and cabinet wheel locks 1 136 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW DC controller diagram You must disconnect wires harnesses or cables from the DC controller PCA before you can remove or replace many of the product components. Use the following diagram to assist with disconnecting the cables and wire harnesses from the DC controller PCA. Figure 6-4 DC controller diagram J90 J72 J71 J80 J86 J79 J94 J76 J74 J70 J93 SW700 J81 J98 J97 J95 J87 J96 J83 J78 J75 J84 J91 J88 J77 J73 J85 J89 J82 J99 J92 Table 6-2 DC controller connectors ENWW Connector Functionality Pin Configuration J70 Control Panel connector 8-pin J71 SL102 Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid 2-pin J72 SL101 Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid 2-pin J73 M103 Tray 2 Lift Motor 2-pin J74 TG101 Memory Tag I/O 2-pin J75 FN102 Cooling Fan 3-wire J76 PS104 Face Down Output Full Sensor 3-pin J77 CL101 Feed Clutch 3-pin (2-wire) J78 SW101 Door Open Switch 3-pin J79 FN103 Cooling Fan 4-pin (3-wire) J80 Not used 6-pin J81 PS105 Tray 1 Media Present Sensor 3-pin Service approach 137 Table 6-2 DC controller connectors (continued) Connector Functionality Pin Configuration J82 Fusing Assembly 7-wire J83 Envelope Feeder Accessory 5-pin J84 Duplex Accessory 6-pin J85 Power Supply PCA (+24Vdc/3.3Vdc) 6-wire J86 Scanner Motor/Beam Detect 7-pin J87 M102 Drum Motor 8-pin (7-wire) J88 Paper Deck Accessory 5-pin J89 M299 Fusing Motor 10-pin J90 Stacker/Stacker-Stapler/Mailbox 8-pin J91 M101 Feed Motor 7-pin J92 PS101 Tray 2 Media present 8-pin PS107 Tray 2 Media Stack Sensor #1 PS907 Tray 2 Media Stack Sensor #2 J93 Laser/Driver PCA 11-pin J94 PS102 Pre-feed Sensor 12-pin PS108 Media Width Sensor #2 PS103 Top of Page Sensor PS106 Media Width Sensor #1 J95 Power Supply PCA 18-pin J96 Power Supply PCA 20-pin J97 Intermediate PCA to Formatter PCA 32-pin Ribbon J98 Not used J99 SW102 Tray 2 Media Size Switches TB700 3.3 volts dc TB701 GRN 138 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 4-pin ENWW User-replaceable parts NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although details such as the color of the external panels and covers might be different than your product, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. Print cartridge 1. Open the print-cartridge door. Figure 6-5 Remove the print cartridge (1 of 2) ENWW User-replaceable parts 139 2. Firmly grasp the print cartridge and pull it up and out of the product. CAUTION: Do not expose the print cartridge to bright light or direct sunlight for long periods of time. This can damage the cartridge, which will result in print-quality defects. If the cartridge must be removed from the product for an extended amount of time, cover it and keep it out of bright light or direct sunlight. Figure 6-6 Remove the print cartridge (2 of 2) 140 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Memory DIMM CAUTION: The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the product chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the product chassis before servicing the product. 1. Remove the formatter cover. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. 2. Open the formatter cage door. 3. Push the DIMM-locking arms away from the DIMM to release it, and then pull the DIMM out of the DIMM slot. Figure 6-7 Remove the memory DIMM ENWW User-replaceable parts 141 Tray 2 Pull the tray out of the product to remove it. Figure 6-8 Remove Tray 2 142 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers CAUTION: When handling the rollers, avoid touching the roller surfaces. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems. 1. Remove Tray 2 and place it on a level work surface. Locate and open the spring-loaded cover that is next to the roller in Tray 2. CAUTION: When you install this roller, make sure that it locks into place. Verify that the roller is correctly oriented, and that the torque limiter next to the roller is correctly positioned against the locking pin on the shaft. Figure 6-9 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (1 of 4) 2. Pinch the blue latch that is on the left side of the roller. Slide the roller off of the shaft. Figure 6-10 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (2 of 4) ENWW User-replaceable parts 143 3. Move the front of the product to the edge of the work surface for better access to the remaining pickup and feed rollers. To find the rollers, look up into the inside of the opening that was created when you removed Tray 2. WARNING! Do not allow the front of the product to extend beyond the edge of the work surface. The product can become unbalanced and fall, which can cause damage to the product or personal injury to the service technician. Figure 6-11 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (3 of 4) 4. Pinch the locking lever on the left side of the feed roller (the front top roller below). Slide the roller off of the shaft. Repeat this step for the pickup roller (the bottom roller below). Reinstallation tip You might have to rotate the roller to gain access to the locking lever. NOTE: When you install these rollers, make sure that the rollers lock into place on the tabs that are on the drive gears. Figure 6-12 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (4 of 4) 144 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Transfer roller CAUTION: Do not touch the black rubber on the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause print-quality problems. The use of disposable gloves is recommended when you remove the transfer roller. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Use a transfer-roller removal hook (callout 1) to lift the left end of the metal shaft out of place near the blue gear (callout 2). If a removal hook is not available use a flatblade screwdriver. Slide the transfer roller to the left to remove it. CAUTION: Be careful to release and lift the left side of the roller first, and then slide the roller out. NOTE: The transfer-roller removal hook is included with a transfer-roller replacement kit. Figure 6-13 Remove the transfer roller Reinstallation tip When you install the transfer roller, make sure that the black collar on the left side is oriented correctly, with the open end face-down (the solid end is face-up). ENWW User-replaceable parts 145 Top-accessory cover Lift the top-accessory cover up and off the product. Figure 6-14 Remove the top-accessory cover 146 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Envelope feed accessory covers 1. Open the front cover. Grasp the inner front accessory cover, and then pull it straight out of the product. Figure 6-15 Remove the front accessory covers (1 of 2) 2. Rotate the top of the front accessory receptacle cover away from the product, and then pull it straight away from the product to remove it. Figure 6-16 Remove the front accessory covers (2 of 2) ENWW User-replaceable parts 147 Duplex accessory or cover Pull the duplex accessory or cover out of the product to remove it. Figure 6-17 Remove the duplex accessory cover Figure 6-18 Remove the duplex accessory 148 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Tray 2 extension door 1. Remove the duplex accessory, or the duplex accessory cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 148. 2. Carefully flex the Tray 2 extension door to release the hinge pin near the power cord side of the product. Figure 6-19 Remove the Tray 2 extension door (1 of 2) 3. Rotate the Tray 2 extension door to the horizontal position, and then pull up on the keyed hinge pin to release the door. Remove the Tray 2 extension door Figure 6-20 Remove the Tray 2 extension door (2 of 2) ENWW User-replaceable parts 149 Rear output bin NOTE: If the duplexer is installed, lift it up slightly and pull it away from the product to remove it. 1. Open the rear output bin. 2. Squeeze the hinge pin out of its mounting hole. Figure 6-21 Remove the rear output bin (1 of 2) 3. Rotate the output bin away from the product until the right hinge pin is released, and then remove the output bin. Figure 6-22 Remove the rear output bin (2 of 2) 1 150 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW Fuser WARNING! The fuser might be very hot. After turning off the product power, allow the fuser to cool for at least 5 minutes before removing it. 1. Remove the rear output bin. See Rear output bin on page 150. 2. Squeeze the blue fuser-release tabs (callout 1). Figure 6-23 Remove the fuser (1 of 2) 1 3. Pull the fuser straight back and out of the product. CAUTION: Do not drop or jar the fuser. It can easily be damaged if it is mishandled. TIP: When you replace the fuser, make sure that it is fully seated into the product. You should hear both sides snap into place. Figure 6-24 Remove the fuser (2 of 2) ENWW User-replaceable parts 151 Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA 1. Grasp the formatter cover. 2. Pull the cover straight back and away from the product, and then remove two thumb screws (callout 1). Figure 6-25 Remove the formatter cover and formatter cage (1 of 2) 1 3. Grasp the formatter cage by the finger holes, and then slide it away from the product to remove it. NOTE: When you reinstall the formatter cage, open the formatter-cage door before you fully seat the formatter cage, and verify that the formatter PCA connector is aligned with the connector on the product chassis. Figure 6-26 Remove the formatter cover and formatter cage (2 of 2) 152 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstallation notes, formatter If you install a replacement formatter, complete the following steps: 1. Use the control-panel display to open the service menu and specify the total page count, the maintenance count, the service ID, the cold reset paper size, and the serial number. 2. Reset the product display language to the customer's choice (see the Operation chapter). After installing a new formatter, complete the following steps: 1. Remove the memory DIMM from the discarded formatter , and then install the DIMM on the replacement formatter. 2. Turn the product on and then wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. NOTE: Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written. 3. Turn the product off. 4. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 5. Print a configuration page to verify against original settings. Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller CAUTION: If you are installing a new formatter and a new DC controller, follow the instructions in this section. 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the formatter and cage, and then replace it with the replacement formatter and cage. 3. Turn the product on and then wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. NOTE: Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written. The same five-minute wait is required several times during this procedure. 4. Turn the product off. 5. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 6. Turn the product off. 7. Remove the DC controller (see DC controller PCA on page 188) and replace it with the new DC controller. 8. Turn the product on and wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 9. Turn the product off. 10. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 11. Print a configuration page to verify against original settings. ENWW User-replaceable parts 153 Service replaceable parts NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although details such as the color of the external panels and covers might be different than your product, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers CAUTION: When handling the rollers, avoid touching the roller surfaces. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems. The Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers are also user-replaceable components. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove one screw (callout 1) with a short screwdriver. Figure 6-27 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (1 of 4) 1 154 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Push down on the roller-shaft bushing (callout 2) to release two alignment pins, and then slide the bushing to the left and off of the shaft to remove it. Figure 6-28 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (2 of 4) 2 4. Slide the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers cover slightly to the left to release it, and then lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 6-29 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (3 of 4) ENWW Service replaceable parts 155 5. Slide the Tray 1 pickup roller (callout 3) and the feed roller (callout 4) to the left and off of the shafts to remove them. Figure 6-30 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (4 of 4) 3 4 TIP: The pickup roller must fit over the drive tabs (callout 5) on the roller-drive gear (callout 6). 5 156 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 6 ENWW Tray 1 separation roller CAUTION: When handling the roller, avoid touching the roller surface. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Rotate the spring-loaded cover downward to gain access to the roller. Figure 6-31 Remove the Tray 1 separation roller (1 of 3) 3. Slide the separation roller (callout 1) to the left to remove it. Figure 6-32 Remove the Tray 1 separation roller (2 of 3) 1 ENWW Service replaceable parts 157 4. Remove the roller. Figure 6-33 Remove the Tray 1 separation roller (3 of 3) 158 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Registration assembly 1. Open the print-cartridge door, and then remove the print cartridge. 2. Use the green handle (located at the right edge of the registration plate) to raise the registrationroller plate, and then remove five screws (callout 1). Figure 6-34 Remove the registration assembly (1 of 4) 1 3. Locate the grounding plate at the right side of the registration assembly. The plate is not captive when you remove the assembly. Do not lose the grounding plate. Figure 6-35 Remove the registration assembly (2 of 4) ENWW Service replaceable parts 159 4. Lift the registration assembly out of the product. Figure 6-36 Remove the registration assembly (3 of 4) TIP: To reinstall the registration assembly, you must open the registration-roller plate to gain access to the mounting holes. Figure 6-37 Remove the registration assembly (4 of 4) 160 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Top cover NOTE: If the optional stapler/stacker or stacker accessory is installed, lift it straight up and off of the product to remove it. Then proceed to step 2. 1. Remove the top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. 2. Open the rear-output bin, the print-cartridge door, and the front cover. 3. Use needle-nose pliers to release the print-cartridge drive-arm tab (callout 1). TIP: Push the print-cartridge drive-arm (callout 2) back into the product to avoid damaging it when you remove the top cover. Figure 6-38 Remove the top cover (1 of 4) 1 2 4. Remove four screws (callout 3). Figure 6-39 Remove the top cover (2 of 4) 3 ENWW Service replaceable parts 161 5. Partially close the print-cartridge door, and then use a small flat blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 4). NOTE: Make sure that these tabs are fully seated when the top cover is reinstalled. Figure 6-40 Remove the top cover (3 of 4) 4 6. Lift the top cover up and off of the product to remove it. CAUTION: The accessory pin (located in the left-rear cornor of the cover) is not captive. Do not lose the pin. Figure 6-41 Remove the top cover (4 of 4) 162 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Right-side cover 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. Release three tabs (callout 1). Figure 6-42 Remove the right-side cover (1 of 3) 1 3. Carefully separate the cover from the product near the control panel. Figure 6-43 Remove the right-side cover (2 of 3) ENWW Service replaceable parts 163 4. Rotate the top of the cover away from the product, and then and lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 6-44 Remove the right-side cover (3 of 3) Reinstall the right cover 1. If you are installing a replacement cover, remove the engine-test button (callout 1) from the discarded cover and then install it on the replacement cover. Figure 6-45 Install the right cover (1 of 2) 1 164 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. When the cover is installed, make sure that the switch-connecting rod (callout 2) snaps into the power-switch arm (callout 3). Figure 6-46 Install the right cover (2 of 2) 2 3 ENWW Service replaceable parts 165 Left-side cover 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Duplex accessory cover and Tray 2 extension door. See Envelope feed accessory covers on page 147. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. Gently pry the front-cover retainers off of the Tray 1 arms. Figure 6-47 Remove the left-side cover (1 of 3) 166 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Release two tabs (callout 3), and then rotate the top of the cover away from the product and lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 6-48 Remove the left-side cover (2 of 3) 3 4. Rotate the top of the cover away from the product and lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 6-49 Remove the left-side cover (3 of 3) ENWW Service replaceable parts 167 Right-front cover 1. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 6-50 Remove the right-front cover (1 of 4) 1 168 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Gently pull the envelope-feeder connector cover (callout 2) off of the product to remove it. Figure 6-51 Remove the right-front cover (2 of 4) 2 5. Remove two screws (callout 3). Figure 6-52 Remove the right-front cover (3 of 4) 3 ENWW Service replaceable parts 169 6. Remove the right front cover. Figure 6-53 Remove the right-front cover (4 of 4) 170 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Rear-upper cover 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Release one tab (callout 1). Figure 6-54 Remove the rear-upper cover (1 of 2) 1 3. Remove the rear-upper cover Figure 6-55 Remove the rear-upper cover (2 of 2) ENWW Service replaceable parts 171 Control-panel assembly CAUTION: The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the product chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the product chassis before servicing the product. 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 2). Figure 6-56 Remove the control-panel assembly (1 of 2) 2 1 172 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Slightly move the control-panel assembly toward the right side of the product to release it, and then remove the assembly. Figure 6-57 Remove the control-panel assembly (2 of 2) ENWW Service replaceable parts 173 Front cover 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Right-front cover. See Right-front cover on page 168. Gently pry the front-cover retainers off of the Tray 1 arms. Figure 6-58 Remove the front cover (1 of 2) 174 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Slide the front cover toward the right side of the product to remove it. Figure 6-59 Remove the front cover (2 of 2) ENWW Service replaceable parts 175 Fan FN102 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J79), and then release the wire harness from the retainer on the fan duct. TIP: It might be easier to release this wire harness if you partially release the fan duct from the chassis (release one tab near the motor). Figure 6-60 Remove fan FN102 (1 of 2) 1 176 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the fan. TIP: When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Connect the wire-harness connector to the DC controller before reinstalling the fan into the duct. Figure 6-61 Remove fan FN102 (2 of 2) 2 ENWW Service replaceable parts 177 Fan FN103 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J75), and then release the wire harness from the retainer on the fan duct. Figure 6-62 Remove fan FN103 (1 of 2) 1 178 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the fan. TIP: When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Figure 6-63 Remove fan FN103 (2 of 2) 2 ENWW Service replaceable parts 179 Pickup-motor assembly (M101) 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then separate the pickup motor from the chassis. CAUTION: The pickup-motor assembly is still attached to the product by the wire harness. Do not drop the motor assembly. Figure 6-64 Remove the pickup-motor assembly (1 of 2) 1 180 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Support the pickup-motor assembly, and disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 2). Remove the pickup-motor assembly. Figure 6-65 Remove the pickup-motor assembly (2 of 2) 2 ENWW Service replaceable parts 181 Drum-motor assembly (M102) 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 1). Figure 6-66 Remove the drum motor (1 of 4) 1 182 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Before proceeding, take note of the mounting tab on the back side of the motor assembly and the slot in the chassis. Figure 6-67 Remove the drum motor (2 of 4) 4. Remove three screws (callout 2). Figure 6-68 Remove the drum motor (3 of 4) 2 ENWW Service replaceable parts 183 5. Rotate the motor assembly to release the mounting tab on the back side of the assembly, and then pull the assembly straight away from the product to remove it. Figure 6-69 Remove the drum motor (4 of 4) 1 2 184 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Lifter-motor assembly (M103) 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Release the wire harness from the retainer (callout 1). Figure 6-70 Remove the lifter motor (1 of 6) 1 3. Release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the guide. Figure 6-71 Remove the lifter motor (2 of 6) 2 ENWW Service replaceable parts 185 4. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 3; J73). Figure 6-72 Remove the lifter motor (3 of 6) 3 5. Release one spring (callout 4). NOTE: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring. Figure 6-73 Remove the lifter motor (4 of 6) 4 186 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Remove one screw (callout 5), and then remove the lifter-motor retainer. Figure 6-74 Remove the lifter motor (5 of 6) 6 5 7. Remove the lifter-motor assembly. Figure 6-75 Remove the lifter motor (6 of 6) ENWW Service replaceable parts 187 DC controller PCA 1. Remove the following components ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. CAUTION: The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the product chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the product chassis before servicing the product. CAUTION: The yellow and blue heavy-gauge wires that are connected to DC controller PCA locations TB700 and TB701 are not terminal lug connectors. These terminals are soldered to the DC controller PCA. Do not attempt to unplug these connectors. 2. Unplug all of the wire and cable connectors from the DC controller PCA. Refer to DC controller diagram on page 137 for details on the DC controller PCA. Figure 6-76 Remove the DC controller PCA (1 of 4) 188 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Release both ends (callout 1) of the formatted-connector ground clip, and then remove the clip (callout 2). Figure 6-77 Remove the DC controller PCA (2 of 4) 2 1 4. Remove two screws (callout 3) and release the FFC from the retainer (callout 4). Figure 6-78 Remove the DC controller PCA (3 of 4) 4 3 ENWW Service replaceable parts 189 5. Remove two screws (callout 5) and release one tab (callout 6). Carefully remove the DC controller PCA. CAUTION: Correct reinstallation of the DC controller is critical to correct operation of the product. If you are installing a new DC controller, follow the instructions in the reinstallation tips. If you are installing a new formatter and a new DC controller, see the special section that follows this DC controller section—Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller on page 191. Figure 6-79 Remove the DC controller PCA (4 of 4) 5 6 190 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstallation tip TIP: DC controller PCA connector locations J80 and J98 are not used. There will not be connectors for these locations when the DC controller PCA is reinstalled. 1. After installing a new DC controller, turn the product on and wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. NOTE: Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written. 2. Turn the product off. 3. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 4. Print a configuration page to verify against original settings. Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the formatter (see Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152) and replace it with the new formatter. 3. Turn the product on and then wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. NOTE: Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written. The same five-minute wait is required several times during this procedure. 4. Turn the product off. 5. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 6. Turn the product off. 7. Remove the DC controller (see DC controller PCA on page 188) and replace it with the new DC controller. 8. Turn the product on and wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 9. Turn the product off. 10. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 11. Print a configuration page to verify against original settings. ENWW Service replaceable parts 191 Pickup-drive assembly 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Pickup-motor assembly. See Pickup-motor assembly (M101) on page 180. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA on page 188. Lift up on the power-switch rod, and move it out and away from the pickup-drive assembly. Figure 6-80 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (1 of 7) 1 2 192 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Release one tab (callout 1) and remove the guide (callout 2). Figure 6-81 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (2 of 7) 1 2 4. Remove the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 3 and callout 4). NOTE: In this step, the wire harness for the pickup motor has been disconnected at the motor assembly and the DC controller. Connect the wire harness to the removed motor assembly so you do not loose it. Figure 6-82 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (3 of 7) 4 3 ENWW Service replaceable parts 193 5. Remove six screws (callout 5) and the wire guide (callout 6). Figure 6-83 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (4 of 7) 6 5 6. Remove one e-clip, the spring arm clip, and the shaft collar (callout 7; behind the spring arm clip), and then push the tray drive-gear/shaft into the Tray 2 cavity. Figure 6-84 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (5 of 7) 7 194 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7. Push the tray drive-gear/shaft into the Tray 2 cavity. NOTE: The large gear inside of the paper-delivery drive assembly is not captive and will slide off of the shaft and be loose inside the paper-delivery drive assembly (see Reinstall the pickup-drive assembly on page 196). Figure 6-85 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (6 of 7) 8. Reach inside the product and push the rear Tray 2 feed roller up into its raised position (This disengages the roller-lifting arm from the clutch gear), and then remove the pickup-drive assembly. Figure 6-86 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (7 of 7) ENWW Service replaceable parts 195 Reinstall the pickup-drive assembly When you reinstall the paper-delivery drive assembly gears and shaft, verify that the gears are seated on the shaft-locking bars and that the shaft collars are correctly positioned in the paper-pickup drivegear assembly mounting bracket and product chassis. Table 6-3 Pickup-drive assembly 196 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 1 Pickup drive unit 2 E-ring 3 Bushing 4 23T gear 5 Retard roller drive shaft ENWW Fuser-motor assembly (M299) 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● DC controller. See DC controller PCA on page 188. Release one spring (callout 1). CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring. Figure 6-87 Remove the fuser-motor assembly (1 of 3) 1 ENWW Service replaceable parts 197 3. Remove two screws (callout 2) and then remove the guide (callout 3). Figure 6-88 Remove the fuser-motor assembly (2 of 3) 3 2 4. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 4), and then remove three screws (callout 5). Remove the fuser-motor assembly. NOTE: You must install the fuser-motor wire harness on the replacement fuser-motor assembly. Figure 6-89 Remove the fuser-motor assembly (3 of 3) 4 5 198 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Drum-drive assembly 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Fan FN102. See Fan FN102 on page 176. ● Fan FN103. See Fan FN103 on page 178. ● Drum-motor assembly. See Drum-motor assembly (M102) on page 182. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA on page 188. Remove one screw (callout 1) and the fan FN103 duct. Figure 6-90 Remove the drum-drive assembly (1 of 4) 1 ENWW Service replaceable parts 199 3. Release the wire-harnesses from the retainer on the fan FN102 duct (callout 2) . Figure 6-91 Remove the drum-drive assembly (2 of 4) 2 4. Remove three screws (callout 3). Figure 6-92 Remove the drum-drive assembly (3 of 4) 3 200 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Carefully remove the drum-drive assembly. Figure 6-93 Remove the drum-drive assembly (4 of 4) Reinstall the drum-drive assembly When the drum-drive assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly positioned in the assembly. Figure 6-94 Reinstall the drum-drive assembly ENWW Service replaceable parts 201 Fan FN101 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 166. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Figure 6-95 Remove fan FN101 (1 of 3) 2 1 202 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 3), and then remove one screw (callout 4). Slide the thermistor sensor bar (callout 5) to the right to release it, and then lift the thermistor sensor bar away from the product. Figure 6-96 Remove fan FN101 (2 of 3) 4 5 3 4. Release the two fan-locking tabs (callout 6), and then remove the fan. CAUTION: When you reinstall the fan, do not apply too much pressure to the wire-harness connectors when they are connected to the power supply. Applying too much pressure might snap off the soldered connectors on the power supply. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Figure 6-97 Remove fan FN101 (3 of 3) 6 ENWW Service replaceable parts 203 Fan FN301 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 166. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fan-cover plate (callout 2). Figure 6-98 Remove fan FN301 (1 of 3) 2 1 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and then release the wire harness from the retainer(callout 4). Unhook and remove the fan clip (callout 5). Figure 6-99 Remove fan FN301 (2 of 3) 4 5 3 204 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Release two tabs (callout 6), and then remove the fan. TIP: When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Figure 6-100 Remove fan FN301 (3 of 3) 6 ENWW Service replaceable parts 205 Environmental sensor (TH3) 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 148. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 149. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 166. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fan-cover plate (callout 2). Figure 6-101 Remove the environmental sensor (TH3) (1 of 2) 2 1 206 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and then remove one screw (callout 4). Slide the thermistor sensor bar (callout 5) to the right to release it, and then lift the thermistor sensor bar away from the product. Figure 6-102 Remove the environmental sensor (TH3) (2 of 2) 4 5 3 ENWW Service replaceable parts 207 High voltage power supply CAUTION: The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the product chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the product chassis before servicing the product. 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 148. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 149. ● Rear output bin. See Rear output bin on page 150. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 151. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161 . ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 166. Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2) and slide the power-supply PCA guide towards the rear of the product to remove it. Figure 6-103 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (1 of 8) 2 208 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW 3. Remove four screws (callout 3) and one grounding screw (callout 4). WARNING! When reinstalling the power supply, you must use a grounding screw to secure the AC outlet to the product chassis. Figure 6-104 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (2 of 8) 3 4 4. Unhook the power-switch arm (callout 5) from the chassis (the switch arm will still be attached to the power supply). Figure 6-105 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (3 of 8) 5 ENWW Service replaceable parts 209 5. Disconnect five wire-harness connectors (callout 6; J82, J84, J85, J95, and J96). Figure 6-106 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (4 of 8) 6 6. Remove two screws (callout 7) and then remove the fan-cover plate (callout 8). Figure 6-107 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (5 of 8) 8 7 210 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7. Disconnect three wire-harness connectors (callout 9) and then remove four screws (callout 10). Figure 6-108 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (6 of 8) 10 9 8. Feed the cables that were disconnected earlier through the hole in the right side of the chassis under the power-supply assembly. Pull down on the power-switch connector bar (callout 11) to slide it out of its mounting bracket, and remove it. CAUTION: Make sure that the four rubber belts and plastic rollers on the feed-guide assembly (mounted to the top of the power supply) remain in place. These belts and rollers can easily become dislodged and you might lose them. Figure 6-109 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (7 of 8) 11 ENWW Service replaceable parts 211 9. Grasp the power-supply assembly and lift it up slightly. Pull it straight out of the chassis. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the power supply, thread the heavy-gauge wire-harness through the hole in the chassis first, and then thread the two ribbon cables through the hole. This prevents the harness and cables from crossing over each other when they are placed in the wire guide. Make sure that you install the power-switch connector bar when you install the power supply. Figure 6-110 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (8 of 8) 212 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Feed-guide assembly 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 148. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 149. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 151. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161 . ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 166. ● High-voltage power supply. See High voltage power supply on page 208. Remove five screws (callout 1). Figure 6-111 Remove the feed-guide assembly (1 of 3) 1 ENWW Service replaceable parts 213 3. Remove one screw (callout 2). Figure 6-112 Remove the feed-guide assembly (2 of 3) 2 4. Remove the feed-guide assembly. Figure 6-113 Remove the feed-guide assembly (3 of 3) Reinstall the feed-guide assembly When you reinstall the feed-guide assembly, make sure that the support foot is correctly positioned on the power supply. CAUTION: Make sure that the four rubber belts and plastic rollers on the feed-guide assembly (mounted to the top of the power supply) remain in place. These belts and rollers can easily become dislodged and you might lose them. 214 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6-114 Reinstall the feed-guide assembly ENWW Service replaceable parts 215 Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly 1. 2. Remove the following assemblies: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 148. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 149. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 166. ● Right front cover. See Right-front cover on page 168. ● Front cover. See Front cover on page 174. Disconnect two wire-harness connectors (callout 1; J71, and J81), and then release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 2). Figure 6-115 Remove the Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly (1 of 3) 2 1 216 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Remove eight screws (callout 3). NOTE: The four outside screws on the assembly are a different type than the others. Make sure that you replace the screws in the same position that they are removed from. Figure 6-116 Remove the Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly (2 of 3) 3 3 4. Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the chassis, and then slide the assembly to the left to remove it. Figure 6-117 Remove the Tray 1 pickup assembly (3 of 3) 1 ENWW 2 Service replaceable parts 217 Feed-roller assembly 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 148. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 149. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 166. ● Right front cover. See Right-front cover on page 168. ● Front cover. See Front cover on page 174. ● Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly. See Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly on page 216. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the feed-roller assembly (callout 2). Figure 6-118 Remove the feed-roller assembly 1 2 218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Laser/scanner assembly 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 148. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152 ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. Unplug the laser/scanner wire-harness connector from the DC controller PCA (callout 1; J86). Figure 6-119 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (1 of 4) 1 ENWW Service replaceable parts 219 3. Remove the laser/scanner wire-harness from the wire guide (callout 2). Figure 6-120 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (2 of 4) 2 4. Remove four screws (callout 3) and the grounding clips. Figure 6-121 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (3 of 4) 3 220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Disconnect the laser/scanner wire-harness (callout 4) from the laser/scanner PCA. Figure 6-122 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (4 of 4) 4 6. Carefully lift the laser/scanner up and out of the product. Make sure that the laser/scanner assembly does not catch or snag the wires along the bottom of the assembly when you remove the assembly. CAUTION: When you reinstall the laser/scanner assembly, make sure that the wire-harnesses are correctly routed through the cable guides. If the wire-harnesses are not correctly routed, they can be damaged when the top cover is installed. NOTE: Make sure that the air duct is correctly positioned and that the laser/scanner shutter properly fuctions. Paper-delivery assembly 1. ENWW Remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 146. ● Rear output bin. See Rear output bin on page 150. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 161. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 163. ● Rear upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 171. Service replaceable parts 221 2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then slightly rotate the top of the guide away from the product. Figure 6-123 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (1 of 4) 1 3. Push up on the guide to release it, and then remove the guide. TIP: To reinstall the guide, first install the top of the guide, and then push down to seat the bottom of the guide onto the product. Figure 6-124 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (2 of 4) 222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the locking pin on the shaft lock, and then rotate the lock counter clockwise until the inner retaining tab (gear side) aligns with the hole in the paperdelivery assembly frame. Slide the shaft lock to the right and remove it to release the gear shaft from the paper-delivery assembly. CAUTION: Do not break the shaft lock. A replacement is not provided with a new paper-delivery assembly. TIP: Snap the shaft lock back into place on the assembly so that you will not lose it. Remove the shaft lock when you reinstall the output-delivery assembly. When the paper-delivery assembly is installed, verify that the locking pin on the shaft lock is fully seated in the hole on the paper-delivery assembly. Figure 6-125 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (3 of 4) ENWW Service replaceable parts 223 5. Lift up the gear end of the output-delivery assembly slightly and slide the assembly toward the formatter assembly to remove it. CAUTION: The rear face-down output-bin-sensor cable is routed through a notch on the paperdelivery assembly at the gear end of the assembly. When you remove the assembly, carefully remove the cable from the notch to avoid damage to the cable. See Figure 6-127 Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly on page 224. Figure 6-126 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (4 of 4) Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly Make sure that the output-bin sensor is not dislodged when the paper-deliver assembly is reinstalled. Figure 6-127 Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly 224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder assembly NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although details such as the color of the external panels and covers might be different than your product, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. 1,500-sheet feeder feed rollers NOTE: The removal procedure for the pickup and feed rollers in the 1,500-sheet feeder is the same as the procedure for the Tray 2 rollers. See Figure 6-11 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (3 of 4) on page 144 and Figure 6-12 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (4 of 4) on page 144 in Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers on page 143. ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 225 1,500-sheet feeder separation roller 1. Open the 1,500-sheet feeder door. Open the separation-roller cover. Figure 6-128 Remove the 1,500-sheet separation roller (1 of 2) 2. Pinch the blue latch that is on the side of the feed roller and slide the roller off of the shaft. Reinstallation tip When this roller is reinstalled, it must lock into place. Verify that the roller is seated on the locking bars that are located on the round black spacer and that the spacer is seated on the shaft-locking pin (callout 1 and callout 2). Figure 6-129 Remove the 1,500-sheet separation roller (2 of 2) 1 2 226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Figure 6-130 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover (1 of 2) 1 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the feeder, and then lift up on the cover to release it. Remove the cover. Figure 6-131 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover (2 of 2) ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 227 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover 1. Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover on page 227. 2. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 6-132 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover (1 of 2) 1 3. Rotate the top of the cover away from the chassis and then lift it up and remove it. Figure 6-133 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover (2 of 2) 1 2 228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder left-side cover 1. Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover on page 227. 2. Before removing the lock-mechanism cover, take note of the location of the retainer tabs (callout 1). The retaining tabs on this cover can be easily broken. Figure 6-134 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder left-side cover (1 of 5) 1 3. Slightly pry up on the lock-mechanism cover, and then slide it toward the front of the feeder to release it. Remove the cover. CAUTION: Do not pry this cover up more than is necessary for clearance when sliding it forward. The retaining tabs on this cover can be easily broken. Figure 6-135 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder left-side cover (2 of 5) ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 229 4. Open the 1,500-sheet feeder door, and then remove two screws (callout 2). Figure 6-136 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder left-side cover (3 of 5) 2 5. Remove one screw (callout 3). Figure 6-137 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder left-side cover (4 of 5) 3 230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Rotate the top of the cover away from the chassis and then lift it up and remove it. Figure 6-138 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder left-side cover (5 of 5) 1 2 ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 231 1,500-sheet feeder door 1. Open the 1,500-sheet feeder door. 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the door-stop plate (callout 2). Figure 6-139 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder door (1 of 3) 2 1 3. With the door open about halfway, gently pry open the door slide-bar slot and disengage the door slide-bar from the feeder. Figure 6-140 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder door (2 of 3) 232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Lift the door straight up and off of the door hinge pins to remove it. CAUTION: The door hinge pins are not captive. If the feeder must be turned on its side or placed upside down, remove the hinge pins and the door spring (on the lower hinge pin). Place the pins and the spring where you will not lose them. Figure 6-141 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder door (3 of 3) ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 233 1,500-sheet feeder motor 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover on page 227. ● 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover on page 228. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 1; J1703), and then release the wire harness from two retainers (callout 2). Figure 6-142 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder motor (1 of 2) 2 1 3. Remove two screws (callout 3). Slightly separate the motor from the feeder chassis, and then slide the motor toward the back of the feeder to remove the motor. Figure 6-143 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder motor (2 of 2) 3 234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover on page 227. ● 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover on page 228. Disconnect eight wire-harness connectors (callout 1). Figure 6-144 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA (1 of 2) 1 3. Remove two screws (callout 2). Use needle-nose pliers to squeeze the top of one of the nylon PCA standoff (callout 3). Gently pop the PCA off of the tab. Repeat the procedure on the remaining standoff. Remove the PCA. Figure 6-145 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA (2 of 2) 3 ENWW 2 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 235 1,500-sheet feeder lift-drive assembly 1. 2. Remove the following components: ● 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover on page 227. ● 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover. See 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover on page 228. ● 1,500-sheet feeder motor. See 1,500-sheet feeder motor on page 234. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from two retainers (callout 2). Figure 6-146 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder lift-drive assembly (1 of 3) 2 1 3. Remove two screws (callout 3) and the remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 4). Figure 6-147 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder lift-drive assembly (2 of 3) 3 4 236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove three screws (callout 5), and then carefully remove the lift-drive assembly. Figure 6-148 Remove the 1,500-sheet feeder lift-drive assembly (3 of 3) 5 ENWW 1,500-sheet feeder assembly 237 238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7 ENWW Solve problems ● Troubleshooting checklist ● Menu map ● Troubleshooting process ● Troubleshooting tools ● Control-panel messages ● Event log messages ● Paper-handling problems ● Solve image quality problems ● Solve performance problems ● Solve connectivity problems ● Service mode functions 239 Troubleshooting checklist The following checklist contains basic questions that you can ask the customer in order to help define the problem(s) quickly. For more information about product and media specifications, see Paper and print media on page 47. Table 7-1 Initial troubleshooting checklist ● Is the product installed in a suitable environment? See Operating environment on page 504. ● Is the product installed on a solid, level surface? ● Is the supply voltage (from the wall receptacle) within ± 10% of the product's rated voltage (see Electrical specifications on page 502)? ● Is the power cord fully seated into both the product and the electrical receptacle in the wall? ● Is the product exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office-cleaning materials? ● Is the product exposed to direct sunlight? ● Is suitable media being used in the product? See Supported paper and print media sizes on page 48 and Supported paper and print media types on page 50. ● Does the customer use only supported print media? ● Is the media in good condition (no curl, folds, or other flaws)? ● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits? ● Is the correct side of the page printed on first? ● Is long-grain paper being used? ● Is the correct amount of media loaded in the tray (not stacked above the arrows embossed in the tray)? ● Is the media placed in the tray correctly? ● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack? ● Is the tray cassette installed correctly in the product? Print cartridge ● Is the print cartridge installed correctly? Fuser ● Is the fuser installed correctly? Covers ● Is the top cover closed? Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe off the affected parts or leave the product on for 10 to 20 minutes and then attempt to resume printing. ● Was a print cartridge opened soon after it was moved from a cold room to a warm one? If so, allow the print cartridge and the product to acclimate to room temperature for one to two hours. ● Are any non-HP components installed? Check for any non-HP components (print cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) installed in the product and remove them. Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of HP components in its products. ● Remove the product from the network, and make sure that the failure is associated with the product before beginning troubleshooting. Environment Media Input trays Miscellaneous 240 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Menu map The menu map can be an important troubleshooting tool. It shows each control-panel menu and submenu in order to aid navigation through the menu system. Print the menu map from the control panel by completing the following steps. ENWW 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT MENU MAP, and then press OK to print. . Menu map 241 Troubleshooting process When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, information on the control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains an initial troubleshooting checklist that helps to eliminate many possible causes of the problem. The subsequent troubleshooting flowchart helps you to diagnose the cause of the problem. The remainder of the chapter provides steps for correcting the problems that have been identified. ● Use the initial troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem. ● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the cause of malfunctions. The flowchart lists the section within this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues. ● Are supply items (for example, the print cartridge, fuser, and rollers) within their rated life? ● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration problems? See Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66. NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking and maintaining supplies, and for using supplies that are in good condition. The customer is responsible for media and print-cartridge supplies. The customer is also responsible for replacing the fuser, transfer roller, and all paper pickup, feed, and separation rollers that are at or near the end of their 225,000-page rated life. Power-on checks The basic product functions should start up as soon as the product is plugged into an electrical receptacle and the power switch is pushed to the on position. Overview Turn on the product power. If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns appear, or asterisks remain on the display, perform power-on checks to locate the cause of the problem. During normal product operation, the left rear cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned on. Place your hand over the holes in the left-side cover. If the fan is operating, you will feel a slight vibration and feel air passing into the product. You can also lean close to the product and hear the fan operating. When this fan is operational, the dc side of the power supply is functioning correctly. After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the top cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper path sensor is blocked). You should be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on. If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to separate print engine, formatter, and control-panel problems. Perform an engine test (see Engine test on page 246). If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print, try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them. If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items. 1. Make sure that the product is plugged into an active electrical outlet receptacle that delivers the correct voltage. 2. Make sure that the on/off switch is in the on position. 242 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational. 4. Make sure that the control-panel display wire-harness is connected to connector J70 of the DC controller PCA. 5. Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. 6. Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the product on again. NOTE: If the control-panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on, try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display, formatter, or other components. See Engine test on page 246. If the main cooling fan is not operating, replace the power-supply assembly. See High voltage power supply on page 208. NOTE: It is important to have the control panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the control-panel display can be used to help locate errors. If problems with the power-on check persist, refer to table Table 7-2 Power-on defect or blank display on page 243. Table 7-2 Power-on defect or blank display Problem Action The power cord is not plugged into the wall receptacle and connected to the product. Make sure that the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall receptacle and connected to the product. The correct voltage (power) is not available. Measure the voltage at the outlet. If necessary, plug the power cord into another circuit outlet. The power switch is off. Set the switch to the on position. You should hear the switch toggle. If the front rightside cover has been removed recently, make sure that the rod connecting the powersupply switch moves as you toggle the switch. See the reinstall note in Reinstall the right cover on page 164. If the product still does not turn on, the power switch might be defective. Remove the power supply. 2. Measure the resistance between the two terminals of the power switch (SW1) by applying the tester probes to the terminals. The resistance must be low (under 1 K/ohm) when the power is turned on, and high (over 6 K/ohm) when the switch is turned off. 3. Replace the power-supply assembly, if necessary. The overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit is activated. Wait for more than two minutes before turning the product back on. A fuse is blown. 1. Check the fuses (FU1 and FU2) on the power supply. 2. Replace the power-supply assembly if necessary. The main cooling fan (located on the left side near the rear of the product) does not turn on when the product is started. ENWW 1. An operational fan indicates the following conditions: ● The AC power is present in the product. ● The DC power supply is functional (24 V, 5 V, and 3.3 V are being generated). ● The DC controller microprocessor is functional. Troubleshooting process 243 Table 7-2 Power-on defect or blank display (continued) Problem Action If the fan is not working: 1. Turn the product off and remove the formatter. Disconnect the optional accessories. 2. Turn the product on and check the fan again. If the fan is still not working: 1. Verify that the fan is connected to the power supply (connector J64). 2. Replace the fan. See Fan FN101 on page 202. 3. Replace the power-supply assembly. See High voltage power supply on page 208. 4. Replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCA on page 188. Note: The fan only operates during the initial startup and while printing, and when the temperature inside the product is too high. If the temperature is too high, the fan turns on to cool the inside of the product. The fan works, but the control-panel display is blank. 1. Print an engine test. Engine test on page 246. 2. If the engine test is successful, perform the following steps, in order. 3. 244 Chapter 7 Solve problems ◦ Reseat the control panel and formatter connector. See Control-panel assembly on page 172 and Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. ◦ Replace the control-panel cable. See Control-panel assembly on page 172. ◦ Replace the control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 172. ◦ Replace the formatter. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. If the engine test is not successful, remove the formatter and attempt to perform the engine test again. If the engine test is successful with the formatter removed, replace the formatter. See Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA on page 152. If the test is not successful with the formatter removed, replace the DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA on page 188. ENWW Troubleshooting tools Individual component diagnostics LED diagnostics LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can help identify and troubleshoot product problems. Understand lights on the formatter Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly. 1 2 1 HP Jetdirect LEDs 2 Heartbeat LED HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. For non-link errors, print a configuration page. The second page is the HP Jetdirect configuration page. Examine this page for any inconsistencies among the network settings. Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off. ENWW Troubleshooting tools 245 The heartbeat LED will perform the following sequences: 1. The LED blinks every four seconds with the power on. 2. If the light is not blinking, check the following: 3. ◦ Reseat the formatter cage. ◦ Replace the memory. ◦ Replace the formatter. If the control panel display does not illuminate, perform an engine test to check the engine (see Engine test on page 246). You must have paper loaded in Tray 2 for the engine test. Formatter test To check that the formatter is working, print a configuration page. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press OK. . Engine diagnostics Engine test To verify that the product engine (all product components except the formatter, formatter DIMMs, EIO products, and the stacker or stapler/stacker) is functioning, print an engine-test page. Use a small, non-metallic, pointed object to depress the test-page switch, which is accessible through a slot in the right-side cover. Figure 7-1 Engine-test-page switch The test page should have a series of horizontal lines. The test page prints from the last tray that you printed from. However, if the product has been turned off and then on again since the most recent print job, the page will print from Tray 2. The product will not print a test page if it is in PowerSave or Sleep mode. 246 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW NOTE: A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter and performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them. Half self test Perform a half self test to determine which image-formation process might be malfunctioning. NOTE: It might be easier to perform the print/stop test to stop the product during the printing process. See Print/stop test on page 259. 1. Print a configuration page from the control panel. 2. Open the top cover after the paper advances half-way through the product, which is about 3 to 5 seconds after the main motor begins to rotate. The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the print cartridge. 3. Remove the print cartridge. 4. Open the print cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, assume that the cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If no image is present on the drum, perform the drum-rotation test. Drum rotation test The photosensitive drum, which is located in the print cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly. Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove the print cartridge. 3. Mark the cartridge drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark. 4. Install the print cartridge, and then close the top cover. The start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark on the gear. 5. Open the product and inspect the mark on the cartridge drive gear. Verify that the mark moved. If there was no movement, inspect the main gear assembly to make sure that it connects with the print-cartridge gears. If the drive gears function but the drum does not move, replace the print cartridge. NOTE: This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges are in use. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, assume that the cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If no image is present on the drum, perform the drum-rotation test. ENWW Troubleshooting tools 247 Paper path sensors test NOTE: To view the function of each sensor and how to toggle them manually, see Manual sensor test (special mode test) on page 250. This test displays the status of each paper path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PAPER PATH SENSORS, and then press OK. 4. Select the paper path test options for the test you want to run. 5. Press OK to start the test, and then observe the control panel designators (see figure and table below). The sensors should display a 1 status as paper passes by the sensors. . 248 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Figure 7-2 Paper sensors PS106 PS108 PS700 PS103 PS102 PS1603 PS1603 PS1603 PS1704 ENWW Designator Sensor A Top of page sensor (PS103) B Pre-feed sensor (PS102) C Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) D Duplex sensor (PS1502) E Left-side paper width sensor (PS106) F Right-side paper width sensor (PS108) Troubleshooting tools 249 Designator Sensor G Tray 3 media path sensor (PS1603)1 H Tray 4 media path sensor (PS1603)1 I Tray 5 media path sensor (PS1603)1 J Tray 6 media path sensor (PS1704)1 1 This sensor is present only if the accessory is installed. Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, you can specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature: ● PRINT TEST PAGE: Run the paper path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to start the test. ● SOURCE: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, one of the optional trays, or the envelope feeder. ● DESTINATION: Select the standard bin or an optional output destination, such as a stacker. This menu item appears only if optional output bins are attached to the product. ● DUPLEX: Enable or disable 2-sided printing. ● COPIES: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PAPER PATH TEST, and then press OK. 4. Select the paper path test options for the test you want to run. . Sensor test (interactive) Manual sensor test (special mode test) Use this diagnostic test to manually test the product sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control panel display. See Table 7-3 Manual sensor diagnostic tests on page 251 for a definition of the sensor letter codes. A 1 below the letter indicates that paper is present. For the paper size sensor, the range of values is from 0 to 7. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST 1, and then press OK. 4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the sensor letter code that you want to test, and then press OK. . 250 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW To exit this diagnostic, press the stop button , and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS. Menus cannot be opened during this test, so the OK button serves the same function as the stop button . Table 7-3 Manual sensor diagnostic tests ENWW Manual sensor test designator Sensor or switch A Top of page sensor (PS103) (see Figure 7-8 Checking sensors in the print-cartridge area on page 257) B Tray 2 pre-feed sensor (PS102) (see Figure 7-6 Checking the Tray 2 pre-feed sensor on page 255) C Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) (see Figure 7-5 Checking the fuser delivery sensor on page 254) D Duplex sensor (PS1502) E Left-side paper width sensor (PS106) (see Figure 7-8 Checking sensors in the print-cartridge area on page 257) F Right-side paper width sensor (PS108) (see Figure 7-8 Checking sensors in the print-cartridge area on page 257) G Tray 3 media path sensor (PS1603) (see Figure 7-7 Checking media path sensors on page 256) H Tray 4 media path sensor (PS1603) (see Figure 7-7 Checking media path sensors on page 256) I Tray 5 media path sensor (PS1603) (see Figure 7-7 Checking media path sensors on page 256) J Tray 6 media path sensor (PS1704) (see Figure 7-7 Checking media path sensors on page 256) K Output bin full sensor (PS104) (see Figure 7-3 Checking the output bin full sensor on page 252) L Top cover open switch (SW101) (open and close the top cover) M Tray 1 paper present sensor (PS105) (see Figure 7-4 Checking the Tray 1 paper present sensor on page 253) N Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) (see Figure 7-9 Checking sensors in the Tray 2 area on page 258) O Tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) (see Figure 7-9 Checking sensors in the Tray 2 area on page 258) P Tray 2 paper size switches (SW102) (see Figure 7-9 Checking sensors in the Tray 2 area on page 258) Troubleshooting tools 251 The following illustrations show the location of several of the product sensors and switches. ● Check the output bin full sensor (PS104) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator K while moving the arm. Figure 7-3 Checking the output bin full sensor 252 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ● Check the Tray 1 paper present sensor (PS105) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator M. Figure 7-4 Checking the Tray 1 paper present sensor ENWW Troubleshooting tools 253 ● Check the fuser delivery sensor (PS700) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator C while toggling the sensor. Figure 7-5 Checking the fuser delivery sensor 254 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ● Check the Tray 2 pre-feed sensor (PS102) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator C while using a piece of stiff paper to toggle the sensor. Figure 7-6 Checking the Tray 2 pre-feed sensor ● ENWW Check the media path sensors in trays 3, 4, 5, or 6 by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of the following designators while using a piece of stiff paper to toggle the sensor. ◦ Tray 3 media path sensor (PS 1603): Check designator G. ◦ Tray 4 media path sensor (PS 1603): Check designator H. Troubleshooting tools 255 ◦ Tray 5 media path sensor (PS 1603): Check designator I. ◦ Tray 6 media path sensor (PS 1704): Check designator J. Figure 7-7 Checking media path sensors 256 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ● Check the following sensors in the print-cartridge area. ◦ (1): Check the left-side paper width sensor (PS106) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator E. ◦ (2): Check the top of page sensor (PS103) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator A. ◦ (3): Check the right-side paper width sensor (PS108) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator F. Figure 7-8 Checking sensors in the print-cartridge area 3 2 1 ENWW Troubleshooting tools 257 ● Check the following sensors in the Tray 2 area with the tray, loaded with paper, in the product. ◦ (1): Check the Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator N. ◦ (2): Check the Tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator O. ◦ (3): Check the Tray 2 paper size switches (SW102) by running manual sensor test 1 and checking the status of designator P. Figure 7-9 Checking sensors in the Tray 2 area 1 2 3 NOTE: The sensors for trays 3, 4, 5, and 6 can be checked in the same manner with manual sensor test 2. Manual sensor test 2 (special mode test) Use this test to test paper path sensors and the paper-size switches manually. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2, and then press OK. 4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the sensor letter code that you want to test, and then press OK. . 258 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-4 Manual sensor test 2 diagnostic tests Manual sensor test 2 designator Sensor or switch Q Tray 3 paper present sensor (PS1600) R Tray 3 top of stack sensor (PS1601) S Tray 3 paper size switches (SW1600) T Tray 4 paper present sensor (PS1600) U Tray 4 top of stack sensor (PS1601) V Tray 4 paper size switches (SW1600) W Tray 5 paper present sensor (PS1600) X Tray 5 top of stack sensor (PS1601) Y Tray 5 paper size switches (SW1600) Z Tray 6 paper present sensor (PS1700) a Tray 6 top of stack sensor (PS1701) b Tray 6 paper size switches (SW1700) c Envelope feeder—envelope present sensor (PS1800) NOTE: The locations of these switches and sensors are the same as those in Figure 7-9 Checking sensors in the Tray 2 area on page 258 with respect to the optional paper input accessory. Print/stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine. The test can be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 mS. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT/STOP TEST, and then press OK. 4. Use the arrow buttons to set a stop time, when the print job should be interrupted, and then press OK. . Table 7-5 Print/Stop settings ENWW Duration Description 0 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 28 mm beyond the “black” paper guide of the registration assembly. 100 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 63 mm beyond the “black” paper guide of the registration assembly. 500 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops just prior to the paper entering the “nip” of the fuser assembly; the nip is the gap between the pressure roller and the hot fusing roller. 600 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 5 mm prior to the paper encountering the fuser assembly delivery photo sensor flag. Troubleshooting tools 259 Table 7-5 Print/Stop settings (continued) Duration Description 1,200 msecs (Simplex print operation) The leading edge of the paper stops 35 mm past the face-down delivery stacker rollers. The trailing edge of the paper is approximately 30 mm from the “nip” of the fusing rollers. 2,250 msecs (Duplex print operation) The leading edge of the paper has passed through the fuser assembly and into the output stacker rollers. The paper has now reversed direction and entered the duplex accessory. The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 15 mm before encountering the duplex assembly re-pick photosensor (PS1502). If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the product in one of two ways. ● After the print job is completed press the stop button the timer times out. ● After the timer times out, press the stop button and return it to a normal state. to return to the DIAGNOSTICS menu before . Activate the door switch to restart the engine When the timer trips, the control panel display shows the message PRINTING STOPPED To continue press OK. Pressing OK will print the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press the stop button first, and then press OK . 260 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Component tests These tests activate the selected component. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight COMPONENT TEST, and then press OK. 4. Press the down arrow then press OK. to highlight the particular component test that you want to perform, and . The following table describes the component tests. Component test Description DRUM MOTOR This test activates the drum motor. LASER SCANNER MOTOR This test activates the laser scanner motor. FUSER MOTOR This test activates the fuser motor and drive gears. TRAY PICKUP MOTOR This test activates the tray pickup motor. FEED ROLLER CLUTCH This test activates the paper feed roller clutch. MP TRAY SOLENOID These tests activate the pickup solenoid for the selected input tray. TRAY 2 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 3 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 4 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 5 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 6 PICKUP SOLENOID ENWW DUPLEXER REVERSE MOTOR This test activates the duplexing reverse motor. DUPLEX FEED MOTOR This test activates the duplexing feed motor. Troubleshooting tools 261 Diagrams Block diagrams Main assemblies Figure 7-10 Main assemblies 2 1 3 6 5 7 4 1 Laser/scanner unit 2 Lifter drive unit 3 Tray 2 pickup drive unit 4 Feed roller unit 5 Delivery unit 6 Fuser 7 Multipurpose tray pickup unit 262 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Main parts Figure 7-11 Main parts 1 2 3 7 4 6 5 ENWW 1 Transfer roller 2 Multipurpose tray pickup roller 3 Multipurpose tray feed roller 4 Multipurpose tray separation roller 5 Input tray separation roller (resides in input tray) 6 Input tray feed roller 7 Input tray pickup roller Troubleshooting tools 263 Motors and fans Figure 7-12 Motors and fans 1 2 3 4 5 8 6 7 1 Fuser motor (M299) 2 Fan (FN102) 3 Drum motor (M102) 4 Fan (FN103) 5 Feed motor (M101) 6 Lifter motor (M103) 7 Fan (FN301) 8 Fan (FN101) 264 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW PCAs Figure 7-13 PCAs 2 1 1 Power supply PCA 2 DC controller PCA 500-sheet feeder Figure 7-14 500-sheet feeder main parts 1 2 3 5 ENWW 4 1 Paper feeder pickup roller 2 Paper feeder lifter driver unit 3 Paper feeder pickup drive unit 4 Paper feeder separation roller 5 Paper feed roller Troubleshooting tools 265 Figure 7-15 500-sheet feeder solenoid and PCA 1 2 1 Driver PCA 2 Pickup solenoid 1,500-sheet feeder Figure 7-16 1,500-sheet feeder main units 1 2 3 1 Front door unit 2 Pickup drive unit 3 Lifter drive unit 266 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Figure 7-17 1,500-sheet feeder main parts 1 2 3 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 3 Separation roller Figure 7-18 1,500-sheet feeder motor and PCA 1 2 ENWW 1 Driver PCA 2 Lifter motor Troubleshooting tools 267 Connectors DC controller PCA connectors Figure 7-19 DC controller PCA connectors J90 J72 J80 J71 J86 J79 J94 J76 J74 J70 J93 SW700 J81 J98 J97 J95 J87 J96 J83 J78 J75 J84 J91 J88 J77 J73 J85 J89 J82 J99 J92 Table 7-6 DC controller connectors Connector Functionality Pin configuration J70 Control panel connector 8-pin J71 SL102 Tray 1 pickup solenoid 2-pin J72 SL101 Tray 2 pickup solenoid 2-pin J73 M103 Tray 2 lift motor 2-pin J74 TG101 memory tag I/O 2-pin J75 FN102 cooling fan 3-wire J76 PS104 face-down output full sensor 3-pin J77 CL101 feed clutch 3-pin (2-wire) J78 SW101 door open switch 3-pin J79 FN103 cooling fan 4-pin (3-wire) J80 Not used 6-pin J81 PS105 Tray 1 media present sensor 3-pin J82 Fusing assembly 7-wire 268 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-6 DC controller connectors (continued) Connector Functionality Pin configuration J83 Envelope feeder accessory 5-pin J84 Duplex accessory 6-pin J85 Power supply PCA (+24Vdc/3.3Vdc) 6-wire J86 Scanner motor/beam detect 7-pin J87 M102 drum motor 8-pin (7-wire) J88 Paper deck accessory 5-pin J89 M299 fusing motor 10-pin J90 Stacker/stacker-stapler/mailbox 8-pin J91 M101 feed motor 7-pin J92 PS101 Tray 2 media present sensor 8-pin PS107 Tray 2 media stack sensor 1 PS907 Tray 2 media stack sensor 2 J93 Laser/driver PCA 11-pin J94 PS102 pre-feed sensor 12-pin PS108 media width sensor 2 PS103 top of page sensor PS106 media width sensor 1 ENWW J95 Power supply PCA 18-pin J96 Power supply PCA 20-pin J97 Intermediate PCA to formatter PCA 32-pin ribbon J98 Not used J99 SW102 Tray 2 media size switches TB700 3.3 volts DC TB701 GRN 4-pin Troubleshooting tools 269 Product base connectors Figure 7-20 Product base connectors 270 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 500-sheet paper tray connectors Figure 7-21 500-sheet paper tray connectors 1,500-sheet paper tray connectors Figure 7-22 1,500-sheet paper tray connectors ENWW Troubleshooting tools 271 Duplexer connectors Figure 7-23 Duplexer connectors Envelope feeder connectors Figure 7-24 Envelope feeder connectors 272 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW General timing chart Figure 7-25 General timing chart ENWW Troubleshooting tools 273 Circuit diagrams Figure 7-26 General circuit diagram (1 of 2) 6 5 4 3 Fixing unit Main thermistor TB17 TH2 TH1 1 2 Fixing delivery sensor 1 2 2 1 J131L J131DH J778D TB18 2 TP 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J929 H2 J135 J137 1 2 1 2 1 PS700 3 2 1 3 2 1 J129 2 PS699 J778L TP1 1 Fixing pressure release sensor J778DH 1 1 2 2 Thermoswitch Sub thermistor 100V 200V H1 J131D TB19 HEATER J134F 1 1 J134M H N H N 2 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB15 1 1 TB28 J128MB_BUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 J136M J136F J128MA_BUS 2 A6 J128DWH J128DA J128DB 6 5 1 B6 A6 2 4 3 5 Environment sensor B6 1 2 4 3 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 J85 J01 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 J95 J80 4 3 2 2 3 J66 TB23 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J64 1 2 3 1 2 3 Pre-feed sensor MFLK GND 1 1 2 3 1 MFDRV 3 ENVTMP ENVTMPG ENVTMPG 2 PS102 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 J96 5 4 3 J51 7 6 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J52 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 2 J53 1 J99 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J72 1 2 1 2 J73 1 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 2 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J97 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J103 GND TB701 3.3V TB700 PWRON CAN-L CAN-H 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V /PDLV /PFED /TOP /CCRT VSCLK VSC GND /BD GND VDO2 /VDO2 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND /VDO1 VDO1 GND FPO FPCK /FPCS FPI 24R /LMON 24R /CSTSL PLVL2SNSDR /PLVL2SNS CSTSNSDR GND /CSTSNS J92 PLVLSNSDR GND /PLVLSNS /CSTSIZE2 /CSTSIZE1 GND /CSTSIZE0 +3.3V IOTRXD IOTTXD MD0 MD2 GND 5 1 1 TB35 TB31 TB36 TB32 1 24VA 24VA GND J82 6 TB11 Power supply PCB 5 TB34 4 TB33 3 FSRTHG1 FSRTH1 GND /FSRARI DELSNS GND DELDR COILB COILA 1 H DF3LK DF2DR MFLK CURRMS CURDIS FPRSNS FSRSAFE /AC200 MFFL /MFHF ENVTMPG ENVTMP FSRTH2GND FSRTH2 GND FSRD1 FSRD2 /RLD PRO5V /ZEROX 5 6 FN101 24VB 24VB GND GND PRACCK PRACPWM HVTCK TRNCK PRDCCK TRAD TRPWM TRPCK TNRSP2 TNRSP1 DVACCK PRDCPWM DVACPWM DVDCPWM 6 7 2 GND GND 3.3V 7 2 1 5 4 GND FPRSNS 2 3 FSRTH2 FSRTHG2 J62 TG101 2 FPRSNSDR 1 TB10 TB20 TB21 J63 3 2 Cooling fan 1 FN301 D2FDRV 3RDFLK GND N.C. HEATERC HEATER1 TB14 4 5 6 3 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 FILMBIAS KAATUBIAS 1 2 J128FB_BUS 2 1 3 N J1 J128FA_BUS 1 J74 Cooling fan 3 TH3 6 5 J128DDW 3 1 1 H 6 TB13 4 1 2 N J128LDW J128LWH J128LA J128LB M103 GND TB102 3.3V TB101 M VDO2 /VDO2 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 2 PWRON CAN-L CAN-H 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V /PDLV /PFED /TOP /CCRT VSCLK VSC GND /BD GND 1 /VDO1 VDO1 GND FPO FPCK /FPCS FPI FFC Lifter motor 3 2 1 2 Intermediate PCB 1 SL PS101 C14 C15 C16 B15 B16 A16 A16 3 2 1 3 2 1 B16 C16 3 2 C15 B14 C14 B13 C13 C10 C9 C6 C3 B4 A5 A5 B6 B7 C7 C4 B5 A6 A6 A7 A7 B8 C8 C5 B6 B7 A8 A8 B9 B10 C6 C7 B8 A9 A9 A10 A10 B11 C11 C8 B9 B10 A11 A11 B12 C12 C9 C10 B11 A12 A12 C4 C1 B2 A3 A3 B4 B5 C5 C2 B3 A4 A4 B3 C3 1 PS907 Media stack surface Media stack surface sensor 1 sensor 2 SW102 Cassette media size switches 274 Chapter 7 Solve problems 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C1 J187 PS107 1 1 J103M B1 1 2 J87 A1 A1 B2 C2 J103F B1 A2 A2 GND 3 C11 B12 A13 A13 SDL SCL GND VD01 /VD01 GND GND GND GND VD02 /VD02 GND /BD GND GND SC SCLK GND /CCRT /TOP GND /PFED /PDLV 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V GND CAN-H CAN-L GND PWRON GND GND GND GND 4 4 C12 B13 A14 A14 B15 FPCK /FPCS FPI GND FP0 GND J120 C13 B14 A15 A15 24R 24R /DMFG /DMDEC /DMACC GND GND GND Cassette pickup solenoid Cassette media presence sensor FPCK /FPCS FPI GND FP0 GND SDL SCL GND VD01 /VD01 GND GND GND GND VD02 /VD02 GND /BD GND GND SC SCLK GND /CCRT /TOP GND /PFED /PDLV 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V GND CAN-H CAN-L GND PWRON GND GND GND GND GND SL101 7 7 6 6 5 4 5 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 M Formatter M102 Drum motor ENWW Figure 7-27 General circuit diagram (2 of 2) 2 1 Laser/ Scanner unit J170 Operation panel TB25 1 1 8 8 2 2 7 7 3 3 6 6 4 4 5 5 5 5 4 4 6 6 3 3 7 7 2 2 8 8 1 1 9 9 Scanner motor GND 3.3V FPO FPI FPCK 4 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J143 Laser driver PCB /FPCS GND BD PCB 5V 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J70 J144 FN103 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 3 3 2 2 D2FDRV 4THFLK GND N.C. 1 2 3 FN102 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J93 24R /SMACC /SMDEC GND 3.3V /BDI GND J86 Cooling fan 2 GND 2NDFLK DF2DR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J75 J78 1 1 J76 J77 1 Feed clutch CL101 2 CL 1 1 2 2 3 Multi-purpose tray pickup solenoid 3 FULDR GND FULSNS 24R N.C. /TRCL 1 2 SL 1 1 2 2 MPSNSDR 24R /MPSL GND MPSNS 2 3 2 3 J176 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 J81 J71 SL102 1 PS104 1 Face-down tray media full sensor 2 J123 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 PS105 Multi-purpose tray media presence sensor 1 SW101 Door open detection switch C Top of page Media width sensor sensor 1 Media width sensor 2 PS108 PS103 PS106 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 24R GND OPSOUT 5 5 3 2 4 4 4 1 3 3 1 3 OPSIN OPSCLK 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 Envelope feeder J905M J905 J118D J118DA 3 3 1 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 3 2 2 1 GND 24R OPSCLK OPSIN OPSOUT J906 J94 /PRESNS GND PREDR /WIDTH2SNS GND WIDTH2DR /TOPSNS GND TOPDR /WIDTHSNS GND WIDTHDR 8 8 5 4 3 J901 J118DB 9 9 5 1 1 J83 12 11 10 12 11 10 D VDO1 /VDO1 CNT0 CNT1 CNT2 VDO2 /VDO2 LPHI PDOUT GND 24VA 5V N.C. 24VC 3 2 1 Cooling fan 3 2 J145 J79 24R GND OPSOUT OPSIN OPSCLK DC controller PCB 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 J807F (paper feeder) J1001(paper deck) 1 1 3 2 2 3 1 OPSOUT OPSIN OPSCLK 24R J105LB J105DB J105D J88 Paper feeder or Paper deck J105LA J105DA J105L B GND Stacker or Staple stacker or Muili-bin mail box Test print switch SW800 1 J106DB J90 2 GND CAN-H CAN-L GND GND PWRON 24R 24R 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 J106LB 4 8 8 3 7 7 2 6 6 1 5 5 1 3 4 5 1 5 5 6 6 4 2 7 7 3 3 8 8 2 4 J106L J106D 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 J89 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J84 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 M M101 J221 1 2 1 3 2 4 3 6 5 4 5 7 6 8 7 10 9 8 M 9 10 ENWW J124LA 4 2 3 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 2 5 5 1 6 6 2 4 1 1 3 M299 2 J124DB J703 1 3 Fixing motor Duplexing unit J124L 1 3 Feed motor J1101 A J124DA J191 3 3 4 4 J106LA OPSCLK OPSIN OPSOUT GND DUPARI 24R GND GND GND FMREV /DMACC /DMDEC /DMFG 24R 24R 24R 24R 24R /MMFG /MMDEC /MMACC GND GND 1 1 1 1 2 2 5 J106DA J91 GND CAN-H CAN-L GND GND PWRON 24R 24R 2 24R DUPARI GND OPSOUT OPSIN OPSCLK J124LB Troubleshooting tools 275 3 A3 2 2 1 1 2 4 B4 3 3 4 2 B4 J1615DB J1615DA J1615D 1 J105LB J105LA J105L To paper feeder or paper deck 1 3 A3 J1601 1 GND 2 +24V 3 CMD 4 CLK 5 STS 1 CMD J1602 2 STS 3 CLK 4 NC 5 +24V 6 GND J1609 2 GND 1 DOOR_SNS J1603 5 6 4 3 2 1 1 2 +3.3 DR +3.3V 3 GND IOT_RXD To printer or paper feeder PPATH_SNS IOT_TXD J1621 MOD0 3 2 MOD2 GND 1 J1610 J1604 1 J1605 2 2 1 1 M M1600 J1606 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 SW1600 3 3 4 3 4 4 1 J1623 J1607 PS1600 PF media presence sensor PF media size switch Paper feeder driver PCA 2 2 1 SL SL1600 +24V PS1603 PICK_SL PF lifter motor +24V PF pickup solenoid LIFTMTR PF media path sensor SIZE_SNS_1 BLUE GND SIZE_SNS_2 J1608 5 3 2 RED 1 4 WHITE +3.3 DR BROWN +3.3 DR YELLOW +3.3 DR GND PURPLE P_SNS SIZE_SNS_3 YELLOW PLVL_INIT GND 276 Chapter 7 Solve problems PLVL_PICK BLUE PF media stack surface sensor 1 PF media stack surface sensor 2 PS1601 PS1602 Media stack surface sensor PCA Figure 7-28 500-sheet paper tray circuit diagram ENWW 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 PD media stack surface sensor 2 PD media stack surface sensor 1 1 2 3 4 J1707 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 GND Media stack surface sensor PCA PS1702 PS1701 J1701 1 CMD 2 STS 3 CLK 4 +24V 5 GND J1710 PLVL_PICK J105LA 3 1 PS1700 2 2 3 1 4 J1708 PD media presence sensor J1721 4 3 3 4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 SW1700 2 1 1 PD pickup solenoid SL1700 SL 2 2 2 GND 3 1 PS1704 1 3 +3.3 DR J1705 PD media path sensor J1723 4 4 3 3 M 2 2 1 1 M1700 PD lifter motor J1703 J1706 Paper deck driver PCA J1702 +3.3 DR J105LB GND PLVL_INIT BLUE SIZE_SNS_3 J105L MOD2 +3.3 DR YELLOW GND SIZE_SNS_2 B4 MOD0 +3.3 DR WHITE SIZE_SNS_1 J1720 GND P_SNS LIFT_A A3 IOT_TXD RED PICK_SL LIFT_B LIFT_AN To printer or paper feeder +3.3V IOT_RXD BROWN +24V LIFT_BN ENWW PPATH_SNS PD media size switch GND 2 2 3 1 +3.3 DR PS1703 1 3 DOOR_SNS J1704 PD door open sensor J1722 4 Figure 7-29 1,500-sheet paper tray circuit diagram Troubleshooting tools 277 3 3 J1856 CMD 2 1 J1855 2 STS 1 4 3 CLK To printer 2 1 J1854 5 4 24V J1804 GND FT1800 MT1800 2 3 1 1 PS1802 2 3 3 2 1 J1850 Envelope multiple feed sensor J1800 Not used J1801 Envelope feeder driver PCA 3.3V 3 GND 1 CPU PS1800 3 4 2 2 M1800 M 3 4 1 1 4 3 2 1 J1852 Envelope feeder pickup motor J1802 *A Envelope presence sensor A 4 *B 278 Chapter 7 Solve problems B 2 Figure 7-30 Envelope feeder circuit diagram ENWW 2 2 3 3 IMOUTB IMOUT/B J1503 J66 J124DB J124D J124LB Duplex driver PCA 1 1 IMOUTA IMOUT/A 4 4 2 2 2 3 3 B3 1 4 4 4 1 3 3 5 5 3 6 6 A4 2 3 1 1 +24V A4 2 2 2 To printer 1 1 3 3 2 1 B3 4 4 5 5 6 6 J1506 GND 1 4 J124DA J124LA J124L J1501 J1500 1 1 4 4 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 4 4 1 1 PMOUT/B J1521 DUPARI 4 4 /OPSIN PMOUTB 3 3 OPSOUT /OPSCLK PMOUTA PMOUT/A 2 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND 1 1 MOD2 J1520 MOD0 M IOT TXD M +3.3V IOT RXD M1502 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 FM1501 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 J1504 Duplex cooling fan J1505 1 3 J1522 3 PS1503 4 5 6 5 PICKSNS 6 GND 2 3 2 PICKDR 4 GND FUPSNS 3 1 1 J1502 FU_DR Side registration guide home position sensor REJI_DR Duplex feed motor GND GND M1501 REJISNS FLOCK0 ENWW FDRIVE Duplex Reverse motor J1524 1 1 2 2 3 3 J1523 1 1 2 2 3 3 Duplex media re-pickup sensor PS1502 Face-up sensor PS1501 Figure 7-31 Duplexer circuit diagram Troubleshooting tools 279 Print quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive image defect ruler Defects on product rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page, corresponding to the circumference of the roller that is causing the defect. Measure the distance between defects that recur on a page. Use the following table or the repetitive-defect ruler to determine which roller is causing the defect. To resolve the problem, try cleaning the roller first. If the roller remains dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged, replace the part that is indicated in Table 7-7 Repetitive defects on page 280. CAUTION: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with lint-free paper. If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with lint-free paper that has been dampened with water. NOTE: The following table replaces the graphical repetitive defect ruler. You can make your own ruler by using these measurements. For the most accurate results, use a metric ruler. Table 7-7 Repetitive defects Component Distance between defects Primary charging roller 37.7 mm (1.5 inches) Transfer roller 47 mm (1.85 inches) Developer roller 63 mm (2.5 inches) Tray 1 pickup roller 63 mm (2.5 inches) Tray 1 feed roller 79 mm (3.1 inches) Tray 1 separation roller Tray 2 feed roller 79 mm (3.1 inches) Tray 2 pickup roller Tray 2 separation roller Fuser sleeve unit or pressure roller 94 mm (3.75 inches) Photosensitive drum 94 mm (3.75 inches) NOTE: Defects on the tray pickup rollers or the Tray 1 pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect. Defects on these rollers cause a defect to appear only on the leading edge of the image. Cleaning page Use the cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes accumulate. Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the front or back side of print jobs. HP recommends that you use the cleaning page when there is a print quality issue. A CLEANING message appears on the product control panel display while the cleaning is taking place. In order for the cleaning page to work correctly, print the page on copier-grade paper (not bond, heavy, or rough paper). A blank page will be printed when the task is complete. Discard the page. 280 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Create and process a cleaning page 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press OK. . NOTE: If your product has an automatic duplexer, go to step 7. 4. Press the down arrow to highlight CREATE CLEANING PAGE, and then press OK. 5. Remove all paper from Tray 1. 6. Remove the cleaning page from the output bin, and load it face-down in Tray 1. NOTE: If you are not in the menus, navigate to PRINT QUALITY by using the previous instructions. 7. At the product control panel, press the down arrow and then press OK. to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE, You can set the product to clean the paper path automatically after the product has printed a certain number of pages. Products in dirtier environments can be cleaned more frequently by choosing one of the lower page count settings. Clean the paper path automatically 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press OK. 4. Press the down arrow to highlight AUTO CLEANING, and then press OK. 5. Press the down arrow to highlight ON, and then press OK. 6. Press the down arrow to highlight CLEANING INTERVAL, and then press OK. . NOTE: If you are not in the menus, navigate to PRINT QUALITY by using the previous instructions. 7. ENWW Press the down arrow to highlight the correct page count interval, and then press OK. Troubleshooting tools 281 Control-panel messages Table 7-8 Control-panel messages Control panel message Description Recommended action 10.10.00 SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR The product has experienced a print cartridge error. 1. Ensure that the cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge. 2. Verify the connector at J74 on the DC controller PCA is securely connected. 3. Replace the print cartridge. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Pull the tape and then remove the print cartridge. 3. Remove the orange tabs from the print cartridge. 4. Remove the plastic insert and foam from the print cartridge area. 5. Reinsert the print cartridge and then close the top cover. ● Turn the product off and then on to clear the message. ● Replace the print cartridge. 1. Power cycle the product to see if the message clears. 2. If possible, print a configuration page to record product information, and then perform an NVRAM initialization routine. If the initialization routine is successful, you will need to re-enter several configuration parameters (such as the page count and the serial number). 3. If the error persists, replace the formatter PCA. 1. Load paper in Tray 1, and then use the paper path test to pull paper. Verify that the roller rotates. 2. If someone has performed maintenance on the product recently, verify that the Tray 1 pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller have been installed correctly. 3. From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the multipurpose tray (Tray 1) solenoid component test to verify that the solenoid moves when energized. Listen 10.94.YY REMOVE SHIPPING LOCKS FROM CARTRIDGE At least one shipping lock is installed. For help press 10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR For help press An error has occurred in one or more of the product's supplies. Values of XX and YY are listed below: XX00 = memory is defective XX01 = memory is missing YY00 = cartridge 11.XX INTERNAL CLOCK ERROR The real time clock has experienced an error. To continue press OK 13.01.00 Jam in Tray 1 282 Chapter 7 Solve problems The Tray 1 pickup roller or solenoid might not be working correctly. ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action for an audible “click” when the test is initiated. If the solenoid is not being energized, verify that the solenoid connector is attached to connector J71 on the DC controller PCA. 13.03.00 Jam in Tray 2 13.03.00 JAM IN TRAY X ENWW The paper path might have an obstruction, or the Tray 2 solenoid might not be working correctly. A jam has occurred in the specified location. This jam occurs when the product cannot move paper from the specified tray into the paper path. 4. If the error persists, replace the Tray 1 solenoid (SL102). 1. Inspect the paper path and ensure no obstacles are blocking the paper path. 2. If maintenance has recently be performed, verify that the pickup, feed, and separation rollers have been reinstalled correctly. 3. From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the Tray 2 pickup solenoid component test to verify that the solenoid moves when energized. Listen for an audible “click” when the test is initiated. If the solenoid is not being energized, verify that the solenoid connector is attached to connector J72 on the DC controller PCA. 4. If the error persists, replace the Tray 2 pickup solenoid (SL101). 1. Inspect the paper path and remove any obstructions. 2. Verify that the tray is not loaded incorrectly or overfilled. 3. For Trays 3, 4, 5, or 6, verify that the trays are stacked correctly. 4. Verify that the media meets HP media specifications. 5. If maintenance has recently be performed, verify that the pickup, feed, and separation rollers have been reinstalled correctly. 6. Verify that connector J77 on the DC controller PCA is firmly seated. 7. From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the feed roller clutch (CL101) component test. 8. If the tray pickup motor rotates, yet the drive gears directly below the motor (on the Tray 2 pickup assembly) do not rotate, the clutch is not functioning properly. Replace the feed roller assembly. Control-panel messages 283 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 13.20.00 JAM INSIDE Paper has not moved past a certain paper sensor. can be one of the following locations. ● ● TRAY 2 ● TOP COVER ● REAR DOOR ● DUPLEXER TRAY 2 Remove the tray, and then check the paper path for obstructions. Perform a manual sensor test and observe the prefeed sensor (PS102) status (B). Toggle the sensor flag to determine if the status changes. ● TOP COVER Remove the print cartridge, and then check the paper path for obstructions. Verify that the top-of-page sensor (PS103) and the media width sensors (PS106 and PS108) are unblocked. Perform a manual sensor test and observe the status of these sensors. Toggle the sensor flags to determine if their status changes. ● REAR DOOR Open or remove the rear face-up bin, and then check the paper path on each side of the fusing assembly for obstructions. Remove the fuser, if necessary. Perform a manual sensor test and observe the fuser delivery sensor (PS700) status (C). Toggle the sensor flag to determine if the status changes. ● DUPLEXER Remove the duplexer, and then check the paper path for obstructions. If the message persists, replace the duplexer. 13.JJ.NT DEVICE WARNING The external device sent a warning. No action is necessary. 13.JJ.NT JAM IN A jam has occurred in the specified location. Remove jammed paper from the specified location. If the message persists after all jams have been cleared, a sensor might be stuck or broken. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. 13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE A jam has occurred in the specified location. Remove jammed paper from the specified location. If the message persists after all jams have been cleared, a sensor might be stuck or broken. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. 13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT TRAYS alternates with A jam has occurred in an input tray. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove the print cartridge and any paper. Open all trays 284 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX For help press Description The data (dense text, rules, raster or vector graphics) sent to the product was too complex. alternates with Recommended action 3. Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover. 4. Close all trays. ● Press OK to print the transferred data (some data might be lost). ● If this message appears often, simplify the print job or install additional memory. ● Press OK to clear the message. (The job will not be printed.) ● Check the host configuration. If the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider. 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX To continue press OK 22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press OK Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot [X]. An improper communications protocol might be in use. Note: EIO 0 is reserved for the HP Jetdirect embedded print server. 22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW Too much data was sent to the product's internal HP Jetdirect. Press OK to continue printing. Some data may be lost. Too much data was sent to the USB port. Press OK to clear the error message. (The job will not be printed.) To continue press OK 22 USB I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press OK 40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION To continue press OK The connection has been broken between Press OK to clear the error message and the product and the EIO card in the specified continue printing. slot [X]. Note: EIO 0 is reserved for the HP Jetdirect embedded print server. 40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD TRANSMISSION The connection has been broken between the product and HP Jetdirect print server. 1. Print the configuration and Embedded JetDirect pages to verify that the card status is “Ready,” and that the protocol reads “Ready.” 2. Verify that all the configuration parameters (IP address, configuration method, and domain) are correct. 3. Verify that you are using a working network cable. 4. Verify you can “ping” a network address from the product. 5. Verify that the HP JetDirect print server has the latest firmware. HP JetDirect firmware is part of the product firmware. Find the latest product firmware at www.hp.com. To continue press OK ENWW Control-panel messages 285 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 41.X ERROR A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Press OK to see if the page will print. If necessary, turn the product off and then on. 2. Verify that the loaded paper meets HP specifications. If pages stick together, the paper detect sensors will detect a sheet of paper longer than what is expected in the product. 3. Verify that all paper size settings on the control panel, in the print driver settings, and in the software program match. 4. Verify that the correct size paper is loaded in the input tray. 1. Turn off the product, and then turn it on. 2. Press Stop to clear the print job from the product memory. 3. Turn off the product, and then turn it on. 4. Print a document from a different software program. If the job prints, return to the first program and try to print a different file. If the message appears only with a certain software program or print job, contact the software program vendor for assistance. 5. If the message persists with different software programs and print jobs, disconnect all of the cables to the product that connect it to the network or computer. 6. Turn off the product. 7. Remove all EIO devices from the product. 8. Turn on the product. 9. If the error no longer exists, replace each EIO device one at a time, making sure to turn the product off and on again as you install each device. For help press alternates with 41.X ERROR To continue press OK 49.XXXX ERROR To continue turn off then on A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to cease operation. This error can be caused by invalid print commands, corrupt data, or invalid operations. In some cases, electrical “noise” in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the product. Other causes can be poor-quality cables, poor connections, or home-grown programs. On rare occasions, the formatter is at fault. 10. Replace an EIO device if you determine that it causes the error. 50.X FUSER ERROR A fuser error has occurred. The values for X are listed below. 1. Power cycle the product to determine if the error is persistent. ● 50.1: Low fuser temperature 2. ● Verify that the correct fuser model is installed in the product. 50.2: Fuser warm-up service ● 3. 50.3: High fuser temperature Verify that the correct voltage fuser is installed in the product. ● 50.4: Faulty fuser 4. Verify that the fusing assembly is firmly seated in the product chassis. Reseat For help press 286 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message 51.XY ERROR Description ● 50.5: Inconsistent fuser (verify voltage model) ● 50.6: Open fuser ● 50.7: Pressure release mechanism failure ● 50.8: Lower fuser temperature ● 50.9: High fuser temperature A laser/scanner error has occurred. Recommended action the fusing the assembly, and listen for a “click” at the end of the assembly when you insert it into the product. 5. Verify that the connection to connector J82 on the DC controller PCA is firmly seated. 6. Inspect the fusing assembly connectors, at the front of the assembly, and the connectors on the high-voltage power supply PCA. Look for bent pins or debris. Clean or straighten the pins if necessary. 7. If the error persists, replace the fusing assembly. 8. If the error still persists, replace the highvoltage power supply. 1. From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the laser/scanner motor component test. Verify that you can hear motor rotate. 2. If you cannot hear the motor rotate, verify that the connections to connector J86 and connector J93 on the DC controller PCA are firmly seated. 3. Verify that the wiring harness at the laser/scanner assembly is securely attached. 4. If the error persists, replace the laser/ scanner assembly. To continue turn off then on 53.XY.ZZ CHECK RAM DIMM SLOT There is a problem with the product memory. Press OK to continue if you are prompted. The DIMM that caused the error will not be If the message continues, you might need to used. replace the specified DIMM. Turn the product Values of X and Y are as follows: off, and then replace the DIMM that caused the error. X = DIMM type, 0 = ROM, 1 = RAM ● ● 54.XX ERROR Y = DIMM location, 0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM), 1 = DIMM slot 1 This message is typically related to a sensor issue. To continue turn off then on Turn the product off and then on. Follow the instructions displayed on the product control panel. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Remove any third-party memory or USB device, and then turn the product off and then on. 55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR 3. Remove and then reinstall the formatter. To continue turn off then on 4. If the error persists, remove the formatter and perform an engine test. If the engine test page fails to print, 55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR For help press A temporary printing error occurred. alternates with ENWW Control-panel messages 287 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action replace the DC controller. If the engine test page prints, replace the formatter. 56.XX ERROR A temporary printing error occurred as a result of an incorrect input or output request. For help press ● Turn the product off and then on. ● If the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider. 1. Inspect fan FN103 to determine if its rotational movement is being obstructed. 2. Verify that the fan connection at connector J79 on the DC controller PCA is securely seated. 3. If the error persists, replace the fan. 1. Inspect fan FN102 to determine if its rotational movement is being obstructed. 2. Verify that the fan connection at connector J75 on the DC controller PCA is securely seated. 3. If the error persists, replace the fan. 1. Inspect fan FN101 to determine if its rotational movement is being obstructed. 2. Verify that the fan connection at connector J64 on the power supply PCA is securely seated. 3. If the error persists, replace the fan. 1. Inspect the fan to determine if its rotational movement is being obstructed. 2. If the error persists, replace the duplexer. 1. Inspect fan FN301 to determine if its rotational movement is being obstructed. 2. Verify that the fan connection at connector J65 on the power supply PCA is securely seated. 3. If the error persists, replace the fan. alternates with 56.XX ERROR To continue turn off then on 57.01 ERROR Fan FN103 has experienced an error. To continue turn off then on 57.03 ERROR Fan FN102 has experienced an error. To continue turn off then on 57.04 ERROR Fan FN101 has experienced an error. To continue turn off then on 57.05 ERROR The duplexer fan has experienced an error. To continue turn off then on 57.07 ERROR Fan FN301 has experienced an error. To continue turn off then on 288 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 58.XX ERROR The environmental sensor (TH3) has experienced an error. 1. Verify that the environmental sensor connection at connector J63 on the high-voltage power supply PCA is securely seated. 2. If the error persists, replace the environmental sensor (TH3). 1. For help press Inspect the DC controller PCA and verify that the following connectors are firmly seated: alternates with ◦ Drum motor (M102) to connector J87 ◦ Feed motor (M101) to connector J91 ◦ Fusing motor (M299) to connector J89 To continue turn off then on 59.XY ERROR A temporary printing error occurred. 59.XY ERROR To continue turn off then on NOTE: There is a cable between the drum motor and the DC controller. Both ends of the cable need to be firmly seated. 60.XX ERROR 62 NO SYSTEM To continue turn off then on ENWW An error has occurred while the product was attempting to lift the tray designated by XX. This message indicates that no system was found. The product software system is corrupt. 2. If the error persists, from the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the component tests for each motor to verify that they are operating. If any of the motors is not operating, replace the motor. 1. Open the tray, and then remove the paper. 2. Open the guides and look for any torn pieces of paper or foreign objects inside the tray. 3. Replace the paper, and then close the tray. 4. Turn the product off and then on. 5. Remove most of the paper from the tray except for a few sheets, and insert the tray into the product. Listen for the sound of the lift motor lifting the paper stack. Also, observe if the paper level indicator moves at the front of the tray. 6. Tray 2 only: If the paper stack in the tray is not being lifted, verify that the lift motor connector is firmly seated in connector J73 on the DC controller PCA. 7. If the error persists, replace the lift motor. ● Turn the product off and then on. ● If the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider. Control-panel messages 289 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 65.XY.ZZ OUTPUT DEVICE DISCONNECTED An output device was removed while the product was turned on. To continue printing, you must do one of the following: For help press ● Reconnect the output device. ● Turn the product off and then on. If the message persists, replace the output device. 66.XY.ZZ INPUT DEVICE ERROR 66.XY.ZZ INPUT DEVICE FAILURE The product has detected a problem with an input or output device, depending on the specific error message. 66.XY.ZZ OUTPUT DEVICE ERROR 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Reconnect the device. 3. If possible, print the configuration page to determine if the product is recognizing the device. 4. Verify that the following DC controller connections are seated firmly in the connectors. 66.XY.ZZ OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE 5. 66.XY.ZZ SERVICE ERROR The external paper-handling controller has detected a problem. ◦ J83: envelope feeder ◦ J88: 500-sheet tray feeder or 1,500-sheet tray feeder ◦ J90: stacker, stapler-stacker, or mailbox ◦ J84: duplexer If the message persists, replace the input or output device. Check the cables, and then turn the product off and then on. For help press alternates with 66.XY.ZZ SERVICE ERROR Check cables and turn off then on 68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL The permanent storage is full. Some settings ● might have been reset to the factory defaults. If the error does not clear, turn the product off and then on. For help press ● alternates with 68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL Print a configuration page and check the product settings to determine which values have changed. To continue press OK 68.X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL The storage device is failing to write. Printing can continue, but there might be some To continue press OK unexpected behaviors because an error occurred in permanent storage. Press OK to continue. 68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED Press OK to resume printing. An error occurred in the product permanent storage and one or more product settings has been reset to its factory default. If the error does not clear, turn the product off then on. If the message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. For help press 290 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description alternates with Print a configuration page and check the product settings to determine which values have changed. 68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED If the error does not clear, turn the product off and then on. If the message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. To continue press OK 69.X ERROR Recommended action A printing error occurred. For help press ● Turn the product off and then on. ● If the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider. ● Press the stop button to clear the print job from the product memory. Turn the product off and then on. ● Try printing a job from a different program. If the job prints, go back to the first program and try printing a different file. If the message appears only with a certain program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance. alternates with 69.X ERROR To continue press OK 79.XXXX ERROR The product detected a critical hardware error. To continue turn off then on If the message persists with different programs and print jobs, try these steps. ● Turn the product off. ● Disconnect all cables to the product that connect it to the network or computer. ● Remove all the memory DIMMs or thirdparty DIMMs from the product. Then reinstall the memory DIMM. ● Remove the EIO device from the product. ● Turn the product on. If the error no longer exists, follow these steps. ENWW ● Install the DIMM and EIO device one at a time, making sure to turn the product off and then on as you install each device. ● Replace the DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error. ● Reconnect all cables that connect the product to the network or computer. Control-panel messages 291 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 8X.YYYY EIO ERROR The EIO accessory card in slot [X] has encountered a critical error. ● Turn the product off and then on. ● Turn the product off, reseat the EIO accessory in slot [X], and then turn the product on. ● Turn the product off, remove the EIO accessory from slot [X], install it in a different EIO slot, and then turn the product on. ● Replace the EIO accessory in slot [X]. ● Turn the product off and then on. ● If the message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider. 8X.YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR Access denied The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has encountered a critical error. See your network administrator. MENUS LOCKED The product control-panel function you are trying to use has been locked to prevent unauthorized access. ACTION NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE FOR TRAY X Duplexing is not available when the tray size is set to ANY SIZE or ANY CUSTOM. Change tray settings. Tray size cannot be ANY SIZE/ANY CUSTOM BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION The optional duplexer is not properly connected to the product. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight PAPER HANDLING, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight the specified tray, and then press OK. 4. Change the selected tray's size and type settings. ● Make sure that you are using the rightangle power cord that came with the product. ● Try removing and reinstalling the optional duplexer. Then turn the product off and then on. For help press . BAD ENVELOPE FEEDER CONNECTION The optional envelope feeder is not connected properly to the product. Try removing and reinstalling the optional envelope feeder. Then, turn the product off and then on. BAD OPTIONAL TRAY CONNECTION An optional tray is not connected correctly. Remove the product from the tray, and reinstall it. Then, turn the product off and then on. Canceling... The product is canceling a job. The message continues while the job is stopped, the paper path is cleared, and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded. No action is necessary. CANNOT DUPLEX CLOSE REAR DOOR The rear door must be closed to duplex. Close the rear door. The product is checking for possible jams or paper that was not cleared from the product. No action is necessary. For help press Checking paper path 292 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Checking printer The product is checking for possible jams or paper that was not cleared from the product. No action is necessary. CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE The product received a request for a personality (product language) that does not exist. The print job is canceled. Print the job using a printer driver for a different product language, or add the requested language to the product (if available). To continue press OK To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. CLEANING DISK % COMPLETE The storage device is being sanitized or cleaned. Do not turn off. Product functions are unavailable. The product automatically turns off then on when finished. No action is necessary. You have attempted to create or process a cleaning page when a duplexer is present and the rear door is closed. Open the rear output bin to begin creating or processing the cleaning page. Cleaning... The product is performing an automatic cleaning. Not action is necessary. Clearing event log The product is clearing the event log. No action is necessary. Clearing paper path The product jammed or was turned on and paper was detected in a wrong location. The product is automatically attempting to eject the pages. Wait for the product to finish trying to clear the pages. If it cannot, a jam message will appear on the control panel display. CLOSE TOP COVER The top cover open switch is signaling that the cover is open. 1. Inspect the top cover open switch (SW101) to determine if the switch is correctly installed. 2. Verify that the connection to connector J78 on the DC controller PCA is firmly seated. 3. From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the manual sensor test and see if the component “L” status changes when the top cover is opened and closed. 4. If the status does not change, replace the switch (SW101). Do not power off alternates with CLEANING DISK % COMPLETE For help press CLEANING PAGE ERROR Open rear bin CODE CRC ERROR SEND FULL RFU ON PORT An error occurred during a firmware upgrade. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. CORRUPT FIRMWARE IN EXTERNAL ACCESSORY The product detected corrupt firmware in an input or output accessory. Printing can continue, but jams might occur. To view instructions for upgrading the firmware and to download the firmware upgrade, see Upgrade the firmware on page 96. For help press DATA RECEIVED To print last page press OK The product is waiting for the command to Press OK to continue. print (such as waiting for a form feed, or when the print job is paused). alternates with ENWW Control-panel messages 293 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action The current date and time. Set the date and time or press the stop button DATE/TIME=YYYY/MMMM/DD HH:MM to skip. Press OK to continue To skip press . Deleting... Product is deleting a stored job. No action is necessary. DUPLEXER ERROR REMOVE DUPLEXER The optional duplexer has an error. Turn off the product and reattach the optional duplexer. (Any print jobs at the product might be lost.) The EIO disk in slot X is not working correctly. ● Turn the product off. ● Make sure the EIO disk is inserted correctly and securely fastened. ● If the control panel message continues to appear, the optional hard disk needs to be replaced. Install duplexer with power off EIO DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL For help press EIO DISK SPINNING UP The disk accessory in EIO slot [X] is initializing. No action is necessary. The specified device has failed. Press OK to continue. A command attempted an illogical operation. Press OK to continue. The specified file system is full and cannot be written to. Press OK to continue. The file system cannot be written to. Press OK to continue. Current size and type of tray. To accept the size and type, press the back arrow . alternates with EIO DEVICE FAILURE To clear press OK EIO FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press OK EIO FILE SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press OK EIO IS WRITE PROTECTED To clear press OK Envelope Feeder [Type] [Size] To change size or type press OK To change settings, press OK. alternates with TRAY [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press ENVELOPE FEEDER EMPTY The envelope feeder is empty. Load envelopes in the envelope feeder. Event log empty You are attempting to view an empty event log by selecting SHOW EVENT LOG from the control panel. No action is necessary. Incorrect The wrong PIN number was entered. Reenter PIN number. alternates with 294 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action INFLATE FAILURE SEND FULL RFU ON PORT An error occurred during a firmware upgrade. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. Initializing Individual tasks are being initialized. No action is necessary. INSERT OR CLOSE TRAY The specified tray is open or missing. Insert or close the tray for printing to continue. The print cartridge is missing and must be reinstalled for printing to continue. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Install the cartridge. 3. Close the top cover. For help press INSTALL BLACK CARTRIDGE For help press INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD FONTS/DATA For help press The product received more data than can fit Press OK to print the transferred data (some in its available memory. You might have tried data might be lost). to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or To solve this problem, simplify the print job or complex graphics. install additional memory. alternates with To continue press OK INTERNAL DISK CANNOT BE WRITTEN TO The device cannot be written to. Press OK to continue. The specified device has failed. Press OK to continue. A command attempted an illogical operation. Press OK to continue. To clear press OK INTERNAL DISK DEVICE FAILURE To clear press OK INTERNAL DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press OK INTERNAL DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL The specified file system is full and cannot be Press OK to continue. written to. To clear press OK INTERNAL DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL The internal disk is not working correctly. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. INTERNAL DISK SPINNING UP The internal disk is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait. No action is necessary. The envelope feeder is empty. Load the envelope feeder. alternates with LOAD ENVELOPE FEEDER [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press If paper is already in the envelope feeder, press OK to print. To use another tray, remove paper from the envelope feeder, and then press OK to continue. LOAD ENVELOPE FEEDER [TYPE] [SIZE] To use another tray press OK ENWW The envelope feeder is empty. Load the envelope feeder. If paper is already in the envelope feeder, press OK to print. Control-panel messages 295 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description alternates with Recommended action To use another tray, remove paper from the envelope feeder, and then press OK to print. LOAD ENVELOPE FEEDER [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE] Tray 1 is empty. To continue press OK Load Tray 1 with the requested paper. If the paper is already in the Tray 1, press the help button , and then press OK to print. alternates with To use another tray, remove paper from Tray 1, and then press OK to continue. LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE] Tray 1 is empty and other trays are available. To use another tray press OK Press OK to use another tray. To use Tray 1, load it with the requested paper. alternates with If the paper is already in the Tray 1, press the help button , and then press OK to print. LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press LOAD TRAY [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press LOAD TRAY [TYPE] [SIZE] To use another tray press OK To use another tray, remove paper from Tray 1, and then press OK to use another tray. The indicated tray is configured for a specific Load the requested paper in the tray that is type and size of paper needed by a print job, indicated. but the tray is empty. All other trays are also empty. A job is sent that requires a specific type and size that is not available in the tray that is indicated. Press OK to use a type and size that are available in another tray. The optional bin is in the up position. Lower the bin. The product is waiting for paper to be loaded in Tray 1 for manual feed. If paper is already in the Tray 1, press the help button , and then press OK to print. alternates with LOAD TRAY [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press LOWER THE For help press MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] To use another tray, remove paper from Tray 1, and then press OK. MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] The product is waiting for paper to be loaded in Tray 1 for manual feed. Load the requested paper into Tray 1 and press OK. The product is waiting for paper to be loaded in Tray 1 for manual feed. Press OK to use a type and size that are available in another tray. To continue press OK alternates with MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] To use another tray press OK 296 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action alternates with MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK Then press OK to print second sides No job to cancel The first side of a manual duplex job has been ● printed and the product is waiting for you to insert the output stack to complete the second side. ● Load the output stack into Tray 1, maintaining the same orientation with printed side down. To continue printing, press OK. The stop button was pressed, but there is No action is necessary. no active job or buffered data to cancel. The message is displayed for approximately 2 seconds before the product returns to the ready state. NON HP SUPPLY INSTALLED The product has detected that the print cartridge is not a genuine HP supply. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, call the HP fraud hotline Economode disabled Any product repair required as a result of using non-HP supplies or unauthorized supplies is not covered under the product warranty. To continue printing, press OK. NON HP SUPPLY INSTALLED The product has detected that the print cartridge is not a genuine HP supply. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, call the HP fraud hotline. alternates with Any product repair required as a result of using non-HP supplies or unauthorized supplies is not covered under the product warranty. For help press To continue printing, press OK. Output bin FULL The output bin is full, and printing cannot continue. Empty the bin so that the current print job can finish. The output bin is full, but it is not needed for the current print job. Empty the bin before sending a job to that bin. A jam has occurred because paper has wrapped around the fuser. CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it. Remove all paper from bin Output bin FULL Remove all paper from bin alternates with PAPER WRAPPED AROUND FUSER For help press ENWW 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the rear output bin. 3. Press the blue tabs to remove the fuser. 4. Remove the jammed paper. Control-panel messages 297 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE Description Recommended action 5. Reinstall the fuser and the rear output bin. 6. Turn the product on. The product is due for regular maintenance. Contact your service representative to schedule maintenance. Continue printing until maintenance is performed. Performing upgrade Firmware is being upgraded. No action is necessary. Please wait The product is going offline. No action is necessary. Printing...ENGINE TEST The product is printing an engine test page. No action is necessary. RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE The specified device has failed. Press OK to continue. The specified file system is full and cannot be written to. Press OK to continue. The device cannot be written to. Press OK to continue. A command attempted an illogical operation. Press OK to continue. REINSERT DUPLEXER The duplexer has been removed. Reinsert the duplexer. REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE The print cartridge has reached the end of life. Replace the cartridge. The cartridge has reached the low threshold. Order a new cartridge. To continue printing press OK. The stapler is out of staples. Press OK to continue without stapling. The stapler is out of staples. Press OK to continue without stapling. Request accepted please wait The request to print an internal page is waiting to print. Wait for the current job to finishing printing. Restoring factory settings Factory settings are being restored. No action is necessary. Restoring... The specific settings are being restored. No action is necessary. For help press alternates with To clear press OK RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press OK RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED To clear press OK RAM DISK OPERATION FAILED To clear press OK For help press REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE For help press alternates with REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE To continue press OK REPLACE STAPLE CARTRIDGE To continue press OK REPLACE STAPLES To continue press OK 298 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action RFU LOAD ERROR SEND FULL RFU ON PORT An error occurred during a firmware upgrade. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. ROM DISK DEVICE FAILURE The specified device has failed. Press OK to continue. A command attempted an illogical operation. Press OK to continue. To clear press OK ROM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press OK ROM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL The specified file system is full and cannot be Press OK to continue. written to. To clear press OK ROM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED The device cannot be written to. Press OK to continue. A hard disk is being sanitized. No action is necessary. To clear press OK SANITIZING DISK % COMPLETE Do not power off alternates with CLEANING DISK % COMPLETE For help press SIZE MISMATCH IN TRAY For help press alternates with Current status message The tray indicated is loaded with a different Load the tray with the size configured for the size of paper than the size configured for the tray. tray. Make sure that the guides are positioned correctly in the specified tray. Printing can continue from other trays. Sleep mode on The product is in Sleep mode. No action is necessary. STANDARD TOP BIN FULL The output bin full sensor is signaling that the 1. bin is full. The sensor flag is connected to the top cover assembly. Verify that the top cover is correctly installed. Verify that the flag is not hindered and moves freely. 2. From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, run the manual sensor test. Toggle the tray full flag and see if reference “K” changes. If the flag moves freely, but the flag status does not change during testing, verify that connector J76 on the DC controller PCA is firmly seated. 3. STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES For help press If the error persists, replace the sensor (PS104). Fewer than 70 staples remain in the optional Replace the staple cartridge. For information stapler/stacker cartridge. Printing continues about replacing the staple cartridge, see Load staples on page 82. until the cartridge runs out of staples. alternates with READY To enter menus, press OK ENWW Control-panel messages 299 Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action SUPPORTED HOST USB DEVICE DETECTED BUT INACCESSIBLE A USB device has been detected. The product does not support plug and play operation. Turn the product off and then on, but do not unplug the USB device. The finishing device received too many pages to perform finishing. Pages will eject without finishing. Reduce the number of pages. The maximum number of sheets the stapler can staple is 15. The print job finishes printing but is not stapled. For print jobs that have more than 15 pages, staple them manually. Too many pages were sent with the job. Binding cannot be completed. Reduce the number of pages. You have installed more optional trays than the product supports. Remove one of the optional trays. For help press TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO FINISH For help press TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE For help press TOO MANY PAGES TO BIND For help press TOO MANY TRAYS INSTALLED The product can accept up to four optional 500-sheet trays, or it can accept one optional 1,500-sheet tray and up to three optional 500sheet trays, for a total of up to four optional trays. TRAY [TYPE] [SIZE] To change size or type press OK This message states the current type and size configuration of the paper tray, and allows you to change the configuration. alternates with TRAY [TYPE] [SIZE] To change the paper size or type press OK while the message is present. To clear the message, press the back arrow while the message is present. ● Set size and type to ANY if the tray is used frequently for different sizes or types. ● Set size and type to a specific setting if printing with only one type of paper. To accept settings press TRAY OPEN For help press The tray cannot feed paper to the product because tray [X] is open and must be closed for printing to continue. Check the trays and close any that are open. alternates with Unable to mopy job alternates with Memory or file system failures would not Correct the error and then try again to store allow a mopy job to occur. Only one copy will the job. be produced. Current status message Unable to store job The print job named cannot be stored due to a memory, disk, or configuration problem. Correct the error and then try again to store the job. UNSUPPORTED HOST USB DEVICE DETECTED An unsupported USB device has been inserted into a USB port. The product cannot use the USB device. Remove the device. USB HUBS NOT FULLY SUPPORTED The product does not meet the power requirement of the USB hub. Some operations may not work properly. alternates with For help press 300 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-8 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action USB STORAGE DEVICE FAILURE The specified device has failed. Press OK to continue. A command attempted an illogical operation. Press OK to continue. To clear press OK USB STORAGE FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press OK USB STORAGE FILE SYSTEM IS FULL The specified file system is full and cannot be Press OK to continue. written to. To clear press OK USB STORAGE IS WRITE PROTECTED The device cannot be written to. Press OK to continue. To clear press OK USE TRAY [TYPE] [SIZE] To change press / . To use press OK Wait for printer to reinitialize WAITING FOR TRAY TO LIFT alternates with The product did not detect the type and size Press OK to accept the values in the of paper requested. The message shows the message, or press the up or down arrow / most likely type and size available and the to scroll through the available choices. tray in which they are available. This message can appear for a variety of reasons: ● The RAM DISK settings changed before the product restarted. ● The product is restarting after changing external device modes. ● You have exited the DIAGNOSTICS menu. ● A new formatter has been installed with an old product, or a new product has been installed with an old formatter. No action is necessary. The specified tray is in the process of lifting the paper to the top of the tray for proper feeding. No action is necessary. The product is coming out of sleep mode. Printing will continue as soon as it is done. No action is necessary. WARMING UP alternates with ENWW Control-panel messages 301 Event log messages Print an event log Use the event log to help diagnose and solve product problems. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG, and then press OK to print the pages. . NOTE: For information about clearing the event log, see Service menu on page 337. Show an event log Use the control panel to view the event log. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight SHOW EVENT LOG, and then press OK to print the pages. . NOTE: For information about clearing the event log, see Service menu on page 337. 302 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Sample event log Figure 7-32 Sample event log HP LaserJet P4515 Printers 1 Event Log Page Page 1 2 3 ENWW 4 5 1 Product information 2 Event number 3 Date and time 4 Engine cycles 5 Event log code 6 Firmware version number 7 Description or personality 6 7 Event log messages 303 Paper-handling problems Jams The product closely monitors the paper path for jams. The product displays a jam error message when one of the following conditions occurs. ● Paper is detected at a paper path sensor when paper is not expected. ● Paper fails to clear a sensor within a specified time period. ● Paper fails to arrive at a sensor within a specified time period. If the product is experiencing frequent jams, use the following steps to assist you in resolving the causes of the jam. ● Review the event log to determine a cause for the jams. ● Inspect each of the paper path sensors to determine if the sensor flags are free from obstructions and functioning correctly. See Sensor test (interactive) on page 250. ● Use the manual sensor diagnostic test to determine if all paper path motors and solenoids are functioning correctly. ● The sensors below monitor the product paper path. ● PS102, pre-feed sensor ● PS103, top-of-page sensor ● PS106, media-width sensor ● PS108, media-width sensor ● PS700, fusing delivery sensor ● PS1603, optional 500-sheet feeder media path sensors ● PS1502, duplex sensor ● PS1704, optional 1,500-sheet feeder media path sensors NOTE: To locate the sensors listed above, see Figure 7-2 Paper sensors on page 249. Common causes of jams Many jams are caused by using paper that does not meet HP specifications. For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet products, see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This guide is available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide. The product is jammed.1 Cause Solution The paper does not meet specifications. Use only paper that meets HP specifications. See Paper and print media on page 47. 304 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW The product is jammed.1 Cause Solution A component is installed incorrectly. Verify that all print cartridges, the transfer unit, and the fuser are correctly installed. You are using paper that has already passed through a product or copier. Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied. A tray is loaded incorrectly. Remove any excess paper from the tray. Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray. See Load trays on page 54. The paper is skewed. The tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it. The paper is binding or sticking together. Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload the paper into the tray. NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can create static electricity, which can cause paper to stick together. 1 ENWW The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin. Reset the product. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed. Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. The paper is in poor condition. Replace the paper. The internal rollers from the tray are not picking up the paper. Remove the top sheet of paper. If the paper is too heavy, it might not be picked from the tray. The paper has rough or jagged edges. Replace the paper. The paper is perforated or embossed. Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed single sheets from Tray 1. Product supply items have reached the end of their useful life. Check the product control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies. See Print the information and show-me-how pages on page 66. Paper was not stored correctly. Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment. If the product continues to jam, contact HP Customer Support or your authorized HP service provider. Paper-handling problems 305 Jam locations If a jam message appears on the control-panel display, look for jammed paper or other print media in the locations that are indicated in the following illustration. Then follow the procedure for clearing the jam. You might need to look for paper in other locations than those that are indicated in the jam message. If the location of the jam is not obvious, look first in the top-cover area underneath the print cartridge. When clearing jams, be very careful not to tear jammed paper. If a small piece of paper is left in the product, it could cause additional jams. 6 1 5 2 4 3 1 Top-cover and print-cartridge areas 2 Optional envelope feeder 3 Tray areas (Tray 1, Tray 2, and optional trays) 4 Optional duplexer 5 Fuser area 6 Output areas (top bin; rear bin; and optional stacker, stapler/stacker, or 5-bin mailbox) NOTE: Loose toner might remain in the product after a jam and cause temporary print-quality problems. These problems should clear up within a few pages. 306 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas 1. Open the top cover and remove the print cartridge. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover the print cartridge with a sheet of paper while it is outside of the product. ENWW 2. Use the green handle to lift the paper-access plate. Slowly pull the jammed paper out of the product. Do not tear the paper. If paper is difficult to remove, try clearing it from the tray area. See Clear jams from the trays on page 311. 3. Open Tray 1 and remove the envelope accessory cover. If paper is present, remove it. Paper-handling problems 307 4. Rotate the paper guide to check for additional jammed paper underneath. If jammed paper is present, remove it. 2 1 5. Replace the envelope accessory cover and close Tray 1. 1 2 6. Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover. 7. If a jam message persists, jammed paper is still in the product. Look for the jam in another location. See Jam locations on page 306. 308 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the optional envelope feeder This procedure applies only to jams that occur when you are using an optional envelope feeder. 1. Remove any envelopes that are loaded in the optional envelope feeder. Lower the envelope weight and lift the tray extension up, to the closed position. 2 3 1 2. Grasp both sides of the optional envelope feeder and carefully pull it out of the product. 3. Slowly remove any jammed envelopes from the optional envelope feeder and the product. 1 2 ENWW Paper-handling problems 309 4. Reinstall the envelope feeder. 5. Press OK to clear the jam message. 6. If a jam message persists, an envelope is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. See Jam locations on page 306. 7. Replace the envelopes, making sure that you push the bottom envelopes in slightly further than the top envelopes. 310 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the trays Use these procedures to clear jams from the trays. Also see Clear jams from the optional envelope feeder on page 309. Clear jams from Tray 1 Slowly pull the jammed paper or other print media out of the product. If part of the paper has already been pulled into the product, see Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas on page 307. Clear jams from Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray ENWW 1. Slide the tray out of the product, lift it slightly, and remove any damaged paper from the tray. 2. If the edge of the jammed paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper down and out of the product. (Do not pull the paper straight out, or it will tear.) If the paper is not visible, look in the next tray or in the top-cover area. See Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas on page 307. Paper-handling problems 311 3. Make sure that the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and below the maximum-height indicators. 4. Slide the tray into the product. 5. Press OK to clear the jam message. 6. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. See Jam locations on page 306. Clear jams from the optional 1,500-sheet tray 1. Open the front door of the tray. 312 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 2. If the edge of the jammed paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper down and out of the product. (Do not pull the paper straight out, or it will tear.) If the paper is not visible, look in the top-cover area. See Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas on page 307. 3. Make sure that the paper does not exceed the fill marks on the paper guides, and that the front edge of the stack is aligned with the arrows. 4. Close the front door of the tray. 5. Press OK to clear the jam message. 6. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. See Jam locations on page 306. Paper-handling problems 313 Clear jams from the optional duplexer 1. Lift the optional duplexer up and then pull it out to remove it. 2. Remove any paper that is on top of Tray 2. (You might need to reach inside the product.) 3. Slowly pull any paper out of the optional duplexer. 314 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 4. Insert the optional duplexer into the product. 5. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for jam in another location. See Jam locations on page 306. Clear jams from the fuser area Use this procedure only in these situations: ● Paper has jammed inside the fuser and cannot be removed from the top-cover area or the rearoutput area. ● A sheet of paper has torn while you were trying to clear a jam from the fuser. 1. Turn the product off and unplug the power cord from the product. 1 2 WARNING! The fuser is very hot. To avoid minor burns, wait 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before removing it from the product. ENWW Paper-handling problems 315 2. Rotate the product so the rear is facing you. If an optional duplexer is installed, lift it and pull it straight out. Set it aside. 3. Open the rear output bin. 4. Remove the rear output bin. Place your finger near the left-side hinge, and push firmly to the right until the hinge-pin clears the hole inside the product. Rotate the output bin outward to remove it. 316 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 5. If paper is visible, remove it. If paper is not visible, push up on the two blue levers on the sides of the fuser, and pull the fuser straight out. 6. Remove the jammed paper. If necessary, lift the black plastic guide that is located on the top of the fuser to gain access to the jammed sheet. CAUTION: Do not use a sharp or metal object to clear paper from the fuser area. You might damage the fuser. 7. ENWW Push the fuser firmly into the product until the blue levers on both sides click into place. Paper-handling problems 317 8. Reinstall the rear output bin. Insert the right hinge-pin into the hole inside the product. Push inward on the left hinge, and slide it into the hole inside the product. Close the rear output bin. 9. Plug the power cord into the product. 10. Replace the optional duplexer, if it was removed. 318 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 11. Turn the product on. 12. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. See Jam locations on page 306. After clearing all jams, you need to send the print job again because the product power has been turned off. ENWW Paper-handling problems 319 Clear jams from the output areas Use these procedures to clear jams that occur in the rear output bin or in the optional stacker, stapler/ stacker, or 5-bin mailbox. Clear jams from the rear output bin 1. Open the rear output bin. NOTE: If most of the paper is still inside the product, it might be easier to remove it through the top-cover area. See Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas on page 307. 2. Grasp both sides of the paper, and slowly pull the paper out of the product. Loose toner might be on the sheet. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or into the product. NOTE: If the jammed paper is difficult to remove, try opening the top cover all the way to release pressure on the paper. If the sheet has torn, or if you still cannot remove it, see Clear jams from the fuser area on page 315. 320 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 3. Close the rear output bin. 4. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. See Jam locations on page 306. Clear jams from the optional stacker or stapler/stacker Paper jams can occur in the optional stacker or the optional stapler/stacker. Staple jams can occur only in the optional stapler/stacker. Clear paper jams from the optional stacker or stapler/stacker ENWW 1. At the back of the product, open the door on the stacker or stapler/stacker, and open the rear output bin. 2. Carefully remove any jammed paper. Paper-handling problems 321 3. Close the door on the stacker or stapler/stacker, and close the rear output bin. 4. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed. Look for it in another location. Check the front of the accessory and carefully remove any jammed paper. See Jam locations on page 306. NOTE: The output bin must be pushed down into the lowest position for printing to continue. Clear staple jams from the optional stapler/stacker NOTE: Clear staple jams when the message JAM IN STAPLER appears on the product control-panel display. 1. On the right side of the stapler/stacker, turn the stapler unit toward the front of the product until the unit clicks into the open position. Pull outward on the blue staple cartridge to remove it. 2. Rotate the green cover on the end of the staple cartridge upward, and remove the jammed staple. 322 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 3. Insert the staple cartridge into the stapler unit, and rotate the stapler unit toward the rear of the product until the unit snaps into place. The stapler needs to reload after clearing a staple jam, so the first few documents might not be stapled. If a print job is sent and the stapler is jammed or is out of staples, the job will still print as long as the path to the stacker bin is not blocked. Clear jams from the optional 5-bin mailbox ENWW 1. Remove any paper that is in the output bins. 2. On the back of the 5-bin mailbox, open the jam-access door. Paper-handling problems 323 3. If the paper is jammed at the top of the 5-bin mailbox, pull it straight down to remove it. 4. If the paper is jammed at the bottom of the 5-bin mailbox, open the rear output bin, and then pull straight up on the paper to remove it. 5. Close the jam-access door and the rear output bin. 324 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Jam recovery This product provides jam recovery, a feature that you can use to reprint jammed pages. The following options are available: ● AUTO — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. ● OFF — The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost. ● ON — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer. Set the jam recovery feature ENWW 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press OK. 4. Press the down arrow to highlight JAM RECOVERY, and then press OK. 5. Press the down arrow OK. or the up arrow . to highlight the appropriate setting, and then press Paper-handling problems 325 Product feeds incorrect page size Product feeds incorrect page size Cause Solution The correct size paper is not loaded in the input tray. Load the correct size paper in the input tray. The correct size paper is not selected in the software program or printer driver. Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer driver are correct, because the software program settings override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver settings override the control panel settings. For more information, see user guide. The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product control panel. From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the tray. The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper. 326 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Output is curled or wrinkled Output is curled or wrinkled ENWW Cause Solution Paper does not meet the specifications for this product. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this product. Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good condition. Product is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity specifications. You are printing large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a different pattern. Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed moisture. Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh, unopened package. Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem persists, replace the paper. The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or selected in the software. Configure the software for the paper (see the software documentation). Configure the tray for the paper, see Load trays on page 54. The paper has previously been used for a print job. Do not re-use paper. Paper-handling problems 327 Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly Cause Solution You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper. Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing. The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing. The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or letterhead. Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page toward the back of the product. For Tray 2, 3, 4 and 5, load the paper printed side up with the top of the page toward the back of the product. The product model does not support automatic 2-sided printing. Print a configuration page to verify that a duplex accessory is installed and enabled. The product configuration is not set for duplexing. In Windows, run the automatic configuration feature: 328 Chapter 7 Solve problems 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for Windows XP). 2. Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. 4. Under Installable Options, click Update Now in the Automatic Configuration list. ENWW Solve image quality problems Image defects These examples identify the most common print-quality problems. If you still have problems after trying the suggested solutions, contact HP Customer Support. Table 7-9 Image defect examples Problem Light print (partial page) Light print (entire page) Specks Dropouts ENWW Image example Solution 1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed. 2. The toner level in the print cartridge might be low. Replace the print cartridge. 3. The paper might not meet HP specifications (for example, the paper is too moist or too rough). See Paper and print media on page 47. 1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed. 2. Make sure that the ECONOMODE setting is turned off at the control panel and in the printer driver. 3. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY submenu and increase the TONER DENSITY setting. See Print Quality submenu on page 30. 4. Try using a different type of paper. 5. The print cartridge might be almost empty. Replace the print cartridge. 6. Clean the product paper path. 7. Replace the transfer roller. Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Clean the paper path on page 95.) 3. Try using a different type of paper. 4. Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it. 5. Clean the product paper path several times. 1. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 2. If the paper is rough, and the toner easily rubs off, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to HIGH1 or HIGH2, which helps the toner fuse more completely onto the paper. (See Print Quality submenu on page 30.) 3. Try using a smoother paper that you know will work in the product. 4. Replace the transfer roller. Solve image quality problems 329 Table 7-9 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Lines Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Gray background Toner smear Loose toner 330 Chapter 7 Solve problems Solution 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Clean the product on page 95.) 3. Replace the print cartridge. 1. Do not use paper that has already been run through the product. 2. Try using a different type of paper. 3. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 4. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 5. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, increase the TONER DENSITY setting. See Print Quality submenu on page 30. 6. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 7. Clean the product paper path. 8. Replace the print cartridge. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Try using a different type of paper. 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 4. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Clean the product on page 95.) 5. Replace the print cartridge. Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page. 1. If paper is heavy or rough, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to HIGH1 or HIGH2, which helps the toner fuse more completely onto the paper. (See Print Quality submenu on page 30.) You must also set the type of paper for the tray you are using. (See Select the paper by source, type, or size on page 62.) 2. If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper, try printing on the smoother side. 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 4. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) ENWW Table 7-9 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Repeat defects Solution 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. (See Clean the product on page 95.) 3. The print cartridge might need to be replaced. If the error persists, see Repetitive image defect ruler on page 280. Repeat image Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk, The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn. Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted, and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh. Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d .at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs. This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow paper. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 3. The print cartridge might need to be replaced. Sincerely, Mr. Scmehnjcj If the error persists, see Repetitive image defect ruler on page 280. Misformed characters AaBbCc AaBbCc 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) AaBbCc AaBbCc 3. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 4. Try using another input tray. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Verify that no torn pieces of paper are inside the product. 3. Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. (See Load trays on page 54.) Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose against the paper. 4. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 5. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 6. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 7. If the error persists, replace the registration assembly. 1. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 4. Try printing to a different output bin. 5. If paper is lightweight and smooth, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to LOW, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process. (See Print Quality AaBbCc AaBbCc Page skew Curl or wave ENWW Solve image quality problems 331 Table 7-9 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Solution submenu on page 30.) You must also set the type of paper for the tray you are using. (See Select the paper by source, type, or size on page 62.) Wrinkles or creases Vertical white lines Tire tracks Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc White spots on black 332 Chapter 7 Solve problems 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 3. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 4. Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made. (See Load trays on page 54.) 5. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 6. Try using another input tray. 7. If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat. 8. If paper is lightweight and smooth, open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, select FUSER MODES, and then select the paper type you are using. Change the setting to LOW, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process. (See Print Quality submenu on page 30.) You must also set the type of paper for the tray you are using. (See Select the paper by source, type, or size on page 62.) 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 3. Replace the print cartridge. This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its rated life. For example, if you are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage. 1. Replace the print cartridge. 2. Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 4. Clean the product paper path. 5. Replace the print cartridge. ENWW Table 7-9 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Scattered lines Blurred print Random image repetition ENWW Image example Solution 1. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 3. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 4. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY submenu and change the TONER DENSITY setting. (See Print Quality submenu on page 30.) 5. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, open OPTIMIZE and set LINE DETAIL=ON. 1. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. (See Paper and print media on page 47.) 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. (See Operating environment on page 504.) 3. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 4. Do not use paper that already has been run through the product. 5. Decrease the toner density. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. Open the PRINT QUALITY submenu and change the TONER DENSITY setting. (See Print Quality submenu on page 30.) 6. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, open OPTIMIZE and set HIGH TRANSFER=ON. (See Print Quality submenu on page 30.) If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down the page (in a gray field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job. (The repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.) ● Print the job several times to determine if the problem persists. ● Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in. ● Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image at the top of the page, and the darker image farther down the page. ● From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first. ● If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the product off for 10 minutes, and then turn it on to restart the print job. Solve image quality problems 333 Solve performance problems Problem Cause Solution Pages print but are totally blank. The sealing tape might still be in the print cartridges. Verify that the sealing tape has been completely removed from the print cartridges. The document might contain blank pages. Check the document that you are printing to see if content appears on all of the pages. The product might be malfunctioning. To check the product, print a configuration page. Heavier media types can slow the print job. Print on a different type of media. Complex pages can print slowly. Proper fusing may require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality. If printed in large batches, narrow paper can slow the print job. Print on a different paper size or in smaller batches. The product might not be pulling media correctly. Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly. Pages print very slowly. Pages did not print. If the problem persists, you might need to replace the pickup rollers and the separation roller. See Removal and replacement on page 129. The media is jamming in the product. Clear the jam. See Jams on page 304. The USB cable or network cable might be defective or incorrectly connected. ● Disconnect the cable at both ends and reconnect it. ● Try printing a job that has printed in the past. ● Try using a different cable. Other devices are running on your computer. 334 Chapter 7 Solve problems The product might not share a USB port. If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product, the other device might be interfering. To connect and use the product, you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer. ENWW Solve connectivity problems Solve direct-connect problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the USB cable. ● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product. ● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 meters (6 feet). Replace the cable if necessary. ● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary. Solve network connectivity problems If the product is having problems communicating with the network, use the information in this section to resolve the problem. Solve network printing problems NOTE: HP recommends that you use the product CD to install and set up the product on a network. ● Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the product's RJ45 connector. ● Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter is lit. See Understand lights on the formatter on page 245. ● Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Print the information and showme-how pages on page 66). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints a second page that shows the network settings and status. NOTE: The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocols and network parameters are set correctly. On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol: ENWW ◦ Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready." ◦ Protocol status is "Ready." ◦ An IP address is listed. ◦ The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you are not sure which method is correct. ◦ The domain name is listed correctly. ● Try printing the job from another computer. ● To verify that a product works with a computer, use a USB cable to connect it directly to a computer. You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist. ● Contact your network administrator for assistance. Solve connectivity problems 335 Ping test If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the product, use this procedure to verify that you can communicate with the product over the network. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight I/O, and then press OK. 4. Press the down arrow to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU, and then press OK. 5. Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press OK. 6. Press the down arrow to highlight PING TEST, and then press OK. 7. Set the appropriate options for each of the menu items: . ● DEST TYPE=IPv4 or IPv6 ● DEST IP=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX ● PACKET SIZE=64 ● TIMEOUT=1 second ● COUNT=4 ● PRINT RESULTS=YES ● EXECUTE=YES After setting EXECUTE=YES, the ping test starts. If you selected to print the results, the product prints a page that lists the ping statistics. If the page prints, the test was successful. 336 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Service mode functions Service menu The SERVICE menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the SERVICE menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, the product prompts you to enter an eight-digit PIN number. ● The PIN for the HP LaserJet P4014 models is 05401408. ● The PIN for the HP LaserJet P4015 models is 05401508. ● The PIN for the HP LaserJet P4515 models is 05451508. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow 3. Enter the PIN using the alphanumeric keypad. 4. Press OK to enter the PIN and open the SERVICE menu. . to highlight SERVICE, and then press OK. The following menu items appear in the SERVICE menu: ENWW ● CLEAR EVENT LOG: Use this item to clear the product event log. ● CLEAR BOOTLOADER PASSWORD: Use this item to clear the password that was set to prevent someone from performing an unauthorized cold reset on the product. ● TOTAL PAGE COUNT: After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the page count so that the figure continues to represent the page count for the product engine. See Reset page counts on page 339. ● REFURBISH CYCLE COUNT: Use this item to record the page count when the product was refurbished. ● MAINTENANCE COUNT: Use this item to set the number of pages that have been printed since the last maintenance kit was installed or the total number of pages that have been printed on the product if a maintenance kit has not yet been installed. ● MAINTENANCE INTERVAL: Use this item to specify the number of pages that can be printed before a maintenance kit message appears on the control panel to indicate that a maintenance kit is required. ● SERIAL NUMBER: After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the product serial number. ● SERVICE ID: See Service ID on page 339. ● COLD RESET PAPER: See Cold reset paper on page 339. Service mode functions 337 Product resets Restore factory-set defaults Restoring the product to the factory-set defaults performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory (default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active I/O. 1. Press Menu 2. Press the down arrow to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press OK. 3. Press the down arrow to highlight RESETS, and then press OK. 4. Press the down arrow to highlight RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS, and then press OK. . Hard disk initialization A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the product's hard disk. Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code displays on the control panel indicating a disk error. Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it. 1. Turn the product on. 2. As the product performs its power-on sequence, press and hold the Menu button lights on the control panel are lit. 3. Press the back arrow 4. Press OK. The product initializes the hard disk and continues the power-on sequence. until all three . The message INITIALIZE DISC displays on the control panel. NVRAM initialization CAUTION: Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration settings, and the EIO card. Use the SERVICE menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this product to recognize the product. Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a cold reset to reset product variables but still retain the needed values in the SERVICE menu. Before initializing NVRAM, print a configuration page and a supplies status page to gather the following information: ● Total page count ● Serial number 1. Turn the product on and watch the control panel display. 2. When the display shows the memory count, press and hold the down arrow on the control panel are lit. 3. Press the up arrow 4. Press Menu 5. Press the up arrow until NVRAM INIT is highlighted, and then press OK. The product initializes NVRAM and then continues its power-on sequence. until all three lights . . The message SKIP DISK LOAD displays on the control panel. 338 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Service ID Use this item to show the date that the product was first used on the control panel. This eliminates the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty. Restore the service ID If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the product was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates: 1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the product was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12. 2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9. Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270. -orAdd 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287. Convert the service ID to an actual date You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows: 1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed. 2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month. 3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date. Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows: 1. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002. 2. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Since there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents October. 3. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. 4. The complete date is 17-October-2002. NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system. Reset page counts The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). If you install a new formatter when repairing a product, use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value. In this way, the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count for the new formatter. Cold reset paper When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4. LETTER and A4 are the only available values. ENWW Service mode functions 339 340 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 8 ENWW Parts ● Order parts, accessories, and supplies ● Order replacement parts ● How to use the parts lists and diagrams ● Customer/field-replaceable units ● Assembly locations ● Covers ● Internal components ● PCAs ● Input devices ● Output devices ● Alphabetical parts list ● Numerical parts list 341 Order parts, accessories, and supplies Several methods are available for ordering parts, supplies, and accessories. Order directly from HP You can obtain the following items directly from HP: ● Replacement parts: To order replacement parts in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/hpparts. Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center. ● Supplies and accessories: To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. To order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories, go to www.hp.com/support/hpljp4010series or www.hp.com/support/hpljp4510series. Order through service or support providers To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software HP Easy Printer Care software is a product management tool designed to make product configuration, monitoring, supplies ordering, troubleshooting, and updating as simple and efficient as possible. For more information about HP Easy Printer Care software, see Use the HP Easy Printer Care software on page 68. Order replacement parts The following list of accessories was current at the time of printing. Ordering information and availability of the accessories might change during the life of the product 342 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Paper-handling accessories Figure 8-1 Paper-handling accessories 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Ref Item Description Product number Part number 1 Optional 500-sheet feeder Optional tray to increase paper capacity. Holds Letter, A4, Legal, A5, B5 (JIS), Executive, and 8.5 x 13 inch paper sizes. CB518A CB518-67901 The product can accommodate up to four optional 500sheet feeders. ENWW Order replacement parts 343 Ref Item Description Product number Part number 2 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder Optional tray to increase paper capacity. Holds Letter, Legal, and A4 paper sizes. CB523A CB523-67901 3 Duplexer (duplex printing accessory) Allows automatic printing on both sides of the paper. CB519A CB519-67901 4 Envelope feeder Holds up to 75 envelopes. CB524A CB524-67901 5 500-sheet stapler/ stacker Allows for high-volume output with automatic job finishing. Staples up to 15 sheets of paper. CB522A CB522-67901 6 500-sheet stacker Provides an additional output bin that holds 500 sheets. CB521A CB521-67901 7 Stapler unit Holds the stapler cartridge and the stapler head. Order the stapler unit if you are experiencing stapler failure and an HP-authorized service or support provider advises you to replace the unit. Q3216-60501 NOTE: The staple cartridge is not included with the stapler unit and must be ordered separately, when it needs to be replaced. 8 1,000-staple cartridge Provides three staple cartridges. Q3216A Q3216-60500 9 HP 5-bin mailbox Provides five output bins that you can use to sort jobs. CB520A CB520-67901 10 Printer stand Provides stability when multiple optional trays are installed. The stand has casters so you can easily move the product. CB525A Print cartridges Item Description Product number Part number HP LaserJet print cartridge 10,000-page cartridge CC364A CC364-67901 24,000-page cartridge CC364X CC364-67902 Item Description Product number Part number Preventive maintenance kit Contains a replacement fuser, a transfer roller, a transfer-roller tool, eight feed rollers, and one pair of disposable gloves. Includes instructions for installing each component. CB388A (110 V) Maintenance kits The preventive maintenance kit is a consumable item, and its cost is not covered under the warranty or most extended warranty options. Multipurpose tray kit (Tray 1) CB389A (220 V) Contains a pickup roller, a feed roller, and a separation roller. CB506-67905 Product roller kit (Trays 2, Contains a pickup roller, a feed roller, and a separation roller. 3, 4, 5, 6) CB506-67904 344 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Item Description Product number Part number Transfer roller kit Contains one transfer roller. CB506-67903 Fusing kit Contains one fuser assembly. CB506-67901 (110 V) CB506-67902 (220 V) Memory Item Description Product number Part number 44 x 32-pin DDR2 memory DIMM (dual inline memory module) 64 MB CC413A CC413-67901 128 MB CC414A CC414-67901 256 MB CC415A CC415-67901 512 MB CE483A CE483-67901 Boosts the ability of the product to handle large or complex print jobs. Cables and interfaces Item Description Product number Part number Enhanced I/O (EIO) cards HP High Performance Serial ATA EIO Hard Disk J6073G CB506-67907 HP Jetdirect print server multiprotocol EIO network cards 1284B parallel adaptor J7972G J7972-61001 HP Jetdirect EIO wireless 690n (IPv6/IPsec ) J8007G HP Jetdirect en3700 J7942G J7942-61031 HP Jetdirect en1700 J7988G J7988-61001 HP Jetdirect ew2400 USB wireless print server J7951G J7951-61021 HP Jetdirect 630n EIO networking card (IPv6/gigabit) J7997G J7997-61001 HP Jetdirect 635n EIO networking card (IPv6/IPsec ) J7961G J7961-69011 2-meter A to B cable C6518A USB cable ENWW Order replacement parts 345 Paper For more information about paper, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. Item Description Product number HP Soft Gloss laser paper Letter (220 x 280 mm), 50 sheets/box C4179A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions For use with HP LaserJet printers. Coated paper, good for business documents with high impact, such as brochures, sales material, and documents with graphics and photographic images. A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets/box C4179B/Asia-Pacific countries/regions and Europe Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 50 sheets to a carton Q1298A/North America A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets to a carton Q1298B/Asia-Pacific countries/regions and Europe Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPU1132/North America Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 250 sheets/ream, 6-ream carton HPU1732 North America A4 (210 x 297 mm), 5-ream carton Q2397A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions A4 (210 x 297 mm), 250 sheet/ream, 5ream carton CHP412/Europe A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheet/ream, 5ream carton CHP410/Europe Specifications: 32 lb (120 g/m2). HP LaserJet tough paper For use with HP LaserJet printers. This satin-finish paper is waterproof and tearproof, yet doesn't compromise on print quality or performance. Use it for signs, maps, menus, and other business applications. HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper HP's brightest LaserJet paper. Expect spectacular color and crisp black from this paper that is extra smooth and brilliantly white. Ideal for presentations, business plans, external correspondence and other high-value documents Specifications: 98 bright, 32 lb. (75 g/ m2). A4 (210 x 297 mm), 160 g/m2, 500 sheet/ CHP413/Europe ream, 5-ream carton HP LaserJet paper For use with HP LaserJet printers. Good for letterhead, high-value memos, legal documents, direct mail, and correspondence. Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPJ1124/North America Legal (8.5 x 14 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPJ1424/North America A Letter (220 x 280 mm), 500 sheets/ Specifications: 96 bright, 24 lb (90 g/m2). ream, 5-ream carton 346 Chapter 8 Parts Q2398A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton Q2400A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream CHP310/Europe ENWW Item Description Product number HP Printing paper Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPP1122/North America and Mexico Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 3-ream carton HPP113R/North America A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton CHP210/Europe A4 (210 x 297 mm), 300 sheets/ream, 5ream carton CHP213/Europe Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPM1120/North America For use with HP LaserJet and inkjet printers. Created especially for small and home offices. Heavier and brighter than copier paper. Specifications: 92 bright, 22 lb. HP Multipurpose paper For use with all office equipment-laser and inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines. Created for businesses that want one paper for all their office needs. Brighter and smoother than other office papers. HPM115R/North America Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 250 sheets/ream, 12-ream carton HP25011/North America HPM113H/North America HPM1420/North America Specifications: 90 bright, 20 lb (75 g/m2). Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 3-hole, 500 sheets/ ream, 10-ream carton Legal (8.5 x 14 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HP Office paper For use with all office equipment-laser and inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines. Good for high-volume printing. Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPC8511/North America and Mexico Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 3-hole, 500 sheets/ ream, 10-ream carton HPC3HP/North America Legal (8.5 x 14 inch), 500 sheets/ream, Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb (75 g/m2). 10-ream carton ENWW HPC8514/North America Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), Quick Pack; 2,500sheet carton HP2500S/North America and Mexico Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), Quick Pack 3-hole; 2,500-sheet carton HP2500P/North America A Letter (220 x 280 mm), 500 sheets/ ream, 5-ream carton Q2408A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton Q2407A/Asia-Pacific countries/regions A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, 5ream carton CHP110/Europe A4 (210 x 297 mm), Quick Pack; 2500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton CHP113/Europe Order replacement parts 347 Item Description Product number HP Office recycled paper Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPE1120/North America Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 3-hole, 500 sheets/ ream, 10-ream carton HPE113H/North America Legal (8.5 x 14 inch), 500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton HPE1420/North America Letter (8.5 x 11 inch), 50 sheets to a carton 92296T/North America, Asia-Pacific countries/regions, and Europe A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets to a carton 922296U/Asia-Pacific countries/regions and Europe For use with all office equipment-laser and inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines. Good for high-volume printing. Satisfies U.S. Executive Order 13101 for environmentally preferable products. Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb, 30% post-consumer content. HP LaserJet transparencies For use only with HP LaserJet monochrome printers. For crisp, sharp text and graphics, rely on the only transparencies specifically designed and tested to work with monochrome HP LaserJet printers. Specifications: 4.3-mil thickness. 348 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW How to use the parts lists and diagrams The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the product and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU). CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed. Doing so will ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model. NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors. ENWW How to use the parts lists and diagrams 349 Customer/field-replaceable units Part Part number Fusing assembly (110 V) CB506-67901 Fusing assembly (220 V) CB506-67902 500-sheet paper cassette RM1-4559-000CN Transfer roller CB506-67903 Formatter cover (P4015/P4515) RC2-2468-000CN Formatter cover (P4014) RC2-5757-000CN Formatter (P4014, base model) CB437-69001 Formatter (network models) CB438-69001 Option cover RC2-2459-000CN Face-up tray assembly (P4015/4515) RMI-4531-000CN Face-up tray assembly (P4014) RMI-5448-000CN Paper pickup roller RM1-0036-000CN Paper feed roller RM1-0037-020CN Feed roller (separation roller) RMI-4571-000CN Cassette torque limiter RC2-5262-000CN Duplexing outer cover (P4015/4515) RC2-2510-000CN Duplexing outer cover (P4014) RC2-5760-000CN Envelope cover RL1-1667-000CN Envelope connector cover (P4015/4515) RC2-2476-000CN Envelope connector cover (P4014) RC2-5759-000CN Optional 500-sheet feeder (plus tray) CB518-67901 Optional envelope feeder CB524-67901 Optional duplex accessory CB519-67901 Optional 500-sheet stacker CB521-67901 Optional 500-sheet stapler/stacker CB522-67901 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder CB523-67901 Optional 5-bin mailbox CB520-67901 Optional printer stand CB525A Tray 1 feed roller RL1-1663-000CN Tray 1 pickup roller RL1-1641-000CN Tray 1 separation roller RL1-1654-000CN Legal tray cover (P4015/4515) RC2-5239-000CN Legal tray cover (P4014) RC2-5761-000CN 350 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Part Part number Control-panel overlay (P4015/4515) CB509-60102 (French/Spanish) CB509-60103 (German/French/Italian) CB509-60104 (Norwegian/Swedish/Finnish/Estonian/Latvian/Lithuanian) CB509-60105 (German/French/Italian/Spanish/Portuguese/Dutch/Catalan) CB509-60106 (Czech/Hungarian/Polish/Slovak/Croatian/Romanian/Serbian) CB509-60107 (Russian/Ukrainian/Bulgarian/Kazakh/Turkish/Greek) Control-panel overlay (P4014) CB508-60102 (French/Spanish) CB508-60103 (German/French/Italian) CB508-60104 (Norwegian/Swedish/Finnish/Estonian/Latvian/Lithuanian) CB508-60105 (German/French/Italian/Spanish/Portuguese/Dutch/Catalan) CB508-60106 (Czech/Hungarian/Polish/Slovak/Croatian/Romanian/Serbian) CB508-60107 (Russian/Ukrainian/Bulgarian/Kazakh/Turkish/Greek) Maintenance kit CB388A (110 V) CB389A (220 V) Memory CC413-67901 (64 MB) CC414-67901 (128 MB) CC415-67901 (256 MB) CC483-67901 (512 MB) EIO hard disk drive (20 GB) CB506-67907 USB cable (2-meter, A to B) C6518A EIO card 1248B parallel adaptor J7972G JetDirect EIO wireless 690n (IPv6/IPsec) J8007G JetDirect EIO en3700 J7942G JetDirect EIO en1700 J7988G JetDirect EIO en2400 USB wireless J7951G JetDirect 630n EIO networking card (IPv6/IPsec) J7997G JetDirect 635n EIO networking card J7961G 1,000-staple cartridge Q3216-60500 Print cartridge CC364-67901 (10,000 pages) CC364-67902 (24,000 pages) ENWW Customer/field-replaceable units 351 Assembly locations Figure 8-2 Assembly locations—base unit 1 2 7 3 6 4 5 Table 8-1 Assembly locations—base unit Ref. Description Details 1 Registration assembly See Figure 8-6 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 358. 352 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-1 Assembly locations—base unit (continued) Ref. Description Details 2 Paper feed roller assembly See Figure 8-6 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 358. 3 Paper delivery assembly See Figure 8-12 Paper delivery assembly on page 380. 4 Power supply assembly See Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly on page 370. 5 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) pickup assembly See Figure 8-11 Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 376. 6 Fuser assembly See Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly on page 382. 7 500-sheet cassette (Tray 2) See Figure 8-10 500-sheet cassette on page 372. Figure 8-3 Assembly location—optional 500-sheet paper feeder 1 Table 8-2 Assembly location—optional 500-sheet paper feeder ENWW Ref. Description Details 1 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder See Input devices on page 392. Assembly locations 353 Figure 8-4 Assembly locations—optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder 1 2 Table 8-3 Assembly locations—optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder Ref. Description Details 1 Paper pickup assembly See Figure 8-23 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 412. 2 Front door assembly See Figure 8-20 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly on page 402. 354 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Assembly locations 355 Covers Figure 8-5 Covers—base unit 1 (P4015/4515) *A02 11 *A03 12 *A01 (P4014) 13 *A02 7 12 2 9 5 6 3 4 10 356 Chapter 8 Parts 8 *A03 ENWW Table 8-4 Covers—base unit Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, option RC2-2459-000CN 1 2 Cover, formatter (P4015/P4515) RC2-2468-000CN 1 2 Cover, formatter (P4014) RC2-5757-000CN 1 3 Cover, right front (P4015/P4515) RC2-2475-000CN 1 3 Cover, right front (P4014) RC2-5758-000CN 1 4 Cover, envelope connector (P4015/P4515) RC2-2476-000CN 1 4 Cover, envelope connector (P4014) RC2-5759-000CN 1 5 Cover, duplexing outer (P4015/P4515) RC2-2510-000CN 1 5 Cover, duplexing outer (P4014) RC2-5760-000CN 1 6 Cover, legal (P4015/P4515) RC2-5239-000CN 1 6 Cover, legal (P4014) RC2-5761-000CN 1 7 Face-up tray assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4531-000CN 1 7 Face-up tray assembly (P4014) RM1-5448-000CN 1 8 Front cover assembly 1 RM1-4534-000CN 1 ENWW 9 Right cover assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4550-000CN 1 9 Right cover assembly (P4014) RM1-5449-000CN 1 10 Left cover assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4551-000CN 1 10 Left cover assembly (P4014) RM1-5450-000CN 1 11 Top cover assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4552-000CN 1 11 Top cover assembly (P4014) RM1-5250-000CN 1 12 Control panel assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-5059-000CN 1 12 Control panel assembly (P4014) RM1-5060-000CN 1 13 Cover, right rear (P4015/P4515) RC2-2478-000CN 1 13 Cover, right rear (P4014) RC2-5768-000CN 1 A01 Pin, option RC1-0306-000CN 1 A02 Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10 3 A03 Screw, D, M3x8 6 Only orderable parts have part numbers. Covers 357 Internal components Figure 8-6 Internal components (1 of 3) 501 9 501 15 7 5 (J87) 2 *A09 *A04 4 3 (J187) *A15 A 14 (J99) (J120) (SW102) *A08 *A16 A *A05 12 8 11 (M102) *A03 10 501 *A18 6 *A07 *A17 *A01 *A06 *A10 *A12 *A02 16 10 501 *A14 13 10 *A13 501 *A14 1 10 *A11 10 17 501 18 358 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-5 Internal components (1 of 3) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, envelope RL1-1667-000CN 1 2 Transfer roller assembly CB506-67903 1 3 Arm, release, A RC2-2480-000CN 1 4 Arm, release, B RC2-2481-000CN 1 5 Motor, DC, 24 V, drum drive RL1-1659-000CN 1 6 Size detect assembly RM1-4525-000CN 1 7 Cable, drum motor RM1-5090-000CN 1 8 Cable, size sensor RM1-5091-000CN 1 9 Grounding plate assembly RM1-5461-000CN 1 10 Screw, D, M3x8 XA9-1671-000CN 18 11 Screw, tap, M3x6 XA9-1503-000CN 3 12 Guide, connecting cable RC1-0386-000CN 1 13 Screw, M4x5 2 14 Power-supply assembly, 110-127 V (see Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly on page 370) 1 14 Power-supply assembly, 220-240 V (see Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly on page 370) 1 15 Registration assembly RM1-5460-000CN 1 16 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-4527-000CN 1 17 Multipurpose tray pickup assembly RM1-4563-000CN 1 18 500-sheet tray cassette RM1-4559-000CN 1 501 Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10 XB4-7401-007CN 24 A01 Gear, 193T 1 A02 Guard, edge 1 A03 Clamp, cord 1 A04 Rod, release, upper 1 A05 Rod, release, lower 1 A06 Guide, gear shift, A 1 A07 Guide, gear shift, B 1 A08 Guide, scanner cable 1 A09 Guide, gear 1 A10 Guide, cassette right, rear 1 A11 Guide, cassette left, rear 1 A12 Support, power supply switch 1 A13 Foot 2 Internal components 359 Table 8-5 Internal components (1 of 3) (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A14 Spacer, frame 2 A15 Side plate, drum drive 1 A16 Cap, drum gear 1 A17 Bushing 1 A18 Spring, compression 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 360 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Internal components 361 Figure 8-7 Internal components (2 of 3) *A02 *A04 *A02 *A02 *A03 14 *A02 (J93) (J86) *A04 (J145) *A03 *A02 *A33 15 (J191) *A20 *A32 *A02 *A16 *A14 *A09 *A28 *A23 7 (J77) (CL101) *A08 (SL101) (M101) *A05 (J72) 21 *A29 A *A27 *A01 *A26 *A19 *A02 *A05 2 *A05 *A07 *A25 *A13 12 *A24 *A18 *A17 1 *A12 (J91) *A02 17 4 11 19 16 *A02 20 18 *A01 *A15 *A06 (J74) *A21 A *A02 8 *A22 *A02 *A02 22 13 (J92) *A11 9 *A02 5 3 *A10 10 (PS107) 501 (PS907) (PS101) *A30 *A31 6 362 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-6 Internal components (2 of 3) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Laser scanner assembly RM1-5465-000CN 1 2 Motor, DC, 24 V, main drive RL1-1657-000CN 1 3 Shaft, retard drive RL1-1658-000CN 1 4 Solenoid RK2-0270-000CN 1 5 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN 1 6 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 7 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-4532-000CN 1 8 Tag holder assembly RM1-4539-000CN 1 9 Paper feed shaft Z assembly RM1-4562-000CN 1 10 Feeder sensor cable assembly 11 Ring, E XD9-0232-000CN 1 12 Cable, feed motor RM1-5089-000CN 1 13 Right front guide assembly RM1-4576-000CN 1 14 Cable, laser RM1-5087-000CN 1 15 Rod, switch RC2-2667-000CN 1 16 Bushing RC1-0206-000CN 1 17 Bushing, feed shaft RC1-0264-000CN 1 18 Gear, 18T RU5-0045-020CN 1 19 Gear, 23T RU6-0159-000CN 1 20 Bushing RC2-5783-000CN 2 21 Spring, tension RU6-2115-000CN 2 22 Spring, compression RC1-0213-000CN 1 501 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 XB4-7300-809CN 2 A01 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 1 A02 Screw, D, M3x8 28 A03 Spacer, scanner, front 1 A04 Spacer, scanner, rear 1 A05 Screw, tap, M3x6 10 A06 Guide, front 1 A07 Support, DCU 1 A08 Bushing 1 A09 Guide, cable, right front 1 A10 Lever, height prevention 1 A11 Holder, sheet sensor 1 1 Internal components 363 Table 8-6 Internal components (2 of 3) (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A12 Guide, EPU, rear 1 A13 Clip, cable 1 A14 Saddle, wire 1 A15 Guide, lower 1 A16 Duct, scanner protective, 1 1 A17 Flag, shutter 1 A18 Spring, torsion 1 A19 Plate, RW crossmember 1 A20 Lever, lens 1 A21 Stopper, C right (P4015/P4515) 1 A21 Stopper, C right (P4014) 1 A22 Stopper, C left (P4015/P4515) 1 A22 Stopper, C left (P4014) 1 A23 Mount, lever 1 A24 Right stopper assembly 1 A25 Side plate, paper feed drive 1 A26 Gear, 29T 1 A27 Gear, 35T 1 A28 Gear, 37T/18T 1 A29 Gear, 17T/25T 1 A30 Spring, torsion 1 A31 Flag, paper presence detect 1 A32 Lid, scanner protective duct 1 A33 Duct, scanner protective, 2 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 364 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Internal components 365 Figure 8-8 Internal components (3 of 3) (J106) 15 *A32 (J90) (J76) 17 (J176) (PS104) *A24 20 *A12 *A03 *A33 *A06 8 *A06 (SW101) *A06 *A17 *A11 12 9 *A06 *A29 A (J78) *A18 *A30 *A28 7 *A27 *A26 *A14 (FN102) *A25 *A23 21 (J88) *A31 (J105) *A06 *A05 *A34 *A20 *A19 1 *A01 *A06 *A34 (J77) *A06 *A15 10 *A34 *A16 (M299) *A22 11 (J89) *A13 (J221) 501 13 *A10 A 5 *A06 (J79) (FN103) *A05 *A02 *A06 4 3 (J64) (J63) (TH3) *A06 *A06 (FN101) *A21 *A07 (M103) (J83) 18 (J73) 14 *A06 19 (J170) 6 *A05 *A09 (FN301) *A04 (J118) *A08 16 2 (J70) (J66) 366 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-7 Internal components (3 of 3) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Right guide assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4558-000CN 1 1 Right guide assembly (P4014) RM1-5451-000CN 1 2 Cable, panel RM1-5082-000CN 1 3 Thermistor unit RK2-0359-000CN 1 4 Fan RK2-1988-000CN 1 5 Fan RK2-1989-000CN 1 6 Fan RK2-1991-000CN 1 7 Fan RK2-1992-000CN 1 8 Bushing, paper delivery RC1-0136-000CN 1 9 Paper delivery drive assembly RM1-4526-000CN 1 10 DC controller PCA RM1-4582-000CN 1 11 Fuser motor assembly RM1-5051-000CN 1 12 Cable, door switch RM1-5080-000CN 1 13 Cable, fuser motor RM1-5088-000CN 1 14 Lifter drive assembly RM1-4585-000CN 1 15 Cable, full sensor RM1-5081-000CN 1 16 Cable, envelope feeder RM1-5085-000CN 1 17 IC, photo interrupter WG8-5624-000CN 1 18 Spring, tension RC1-0198-000CN 1 19 Support, lifter drive assembly 20 Paper delivery assembly (also see Figure 8-12 Paper delivery assembly on page 380) RM1-4529-000CN 1 21 Fuser assembly (110-127 V) (also see Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly on page 382) CB506-67901 1 21 Fuser assembly (220-240 V) (also see Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly on page 382) CB506-67902 1 501 Screw, with washer, M3x6 XB2-7300-607CN 2 A01 Cover, connector 1 A02 Case, envelope 1 A03 Holder, sensor 1 A04 Front cassette LF guide assembly 1 A05 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 6 A06 Screw, D, M3x8 28 A07 Holder, sensor 1 A08 Guide, cartridge, right 1 A09 Rod, third fan 1 1 Internal components 367 Table 8-7 Internal components (3 of 3) (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A10 Crossmember, front 1 A11 Crossmember, option, left 1 A12 Guide, rear 1 A13 Duct, second fan 1 A14 Duct, fourth fan 1 A15 Holder, DCU 1 A16 Guide, flat flexible cable 1 A17 Holder, check pin 1 A18 Spring, grounding 1 A19 Guide, left 1 A20 Guide, left, upper 1 A21 Holder, sensor 1 A22 Rod, din board 1 A23 Gear, 23T/19T 1 A24 Crossmember, option, right 1 A25 Side plate, fuser drive 1 A26 Gear, 17T 1 A27 Gear, 15T 1 A28 Gear, 25T/91T 1 A29 Gear, 33T 1 A30 Gear 35T 1 A31 Cable, option feeder 1 A32 Cable, OPT DEL 1 A33 Clamp, cable 1 A34 Screw, tap, M3x6 5 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 368 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Internal components 369 Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly *A01 3 *A03 502 *A05 4 501 5 *A02 *A08 *A06 *A04 1 *A07 (J82) (J124DB) (J124DA) (J128) (J84) (J85) (J95) (J96) 2 370 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-8 Power supply assembly 1 ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper feed assembly RM1-4548-000CN 1 2 Electrical components assembly (110-127 V) RM1-4549-000CN 1 2 Electrical components assembly (220-240 V) RM1-4578-000CN 1 3 Cable, inlet (110-127 V) RM1-5078-000CN 1 3 Cable, inlet (220-240 V) RM1-5079-000CN 1 4 Connector, drawer, 6P VS1-7514-006CN 1 5 Screw, flat head RS, M3x6 XA9-1464-000CN 1 501 Screw, machine, pan head, M3x6 XB1-1300-605CN 1 502 Screw, with washer, M4x6 XB2-7400-606CN 1 A01 Holder, inlet 1 A02 Holder, connector 1 A03 Guard, edge 1 A04 Spring, leaf 1 A05 Crossmember, fusing 1 A06 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 2 A07 Screw, D, M3x8 3 A08 Screw, with washer, M3x6 3 Only orderable parts have part numbers. Internal components 371 Figure 8-10 500-sheet cassette *A23 *A24 *A05 *A04 *A06 *A34 *A36 *A10 *A26 *A21 *A20 *A17 *A35 *A30 *A03 *A38 *A25 *A28 *A02 *A27 *A39 *A29 *A01 *A15 *A12 *A32 *A08 *A16 *A14 *A40 *A09 *A13 *A22 A *A07 *A31 *A11 *A33 *A18 1 A 2 *A37 *A19 372 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-9 500-sheet cassette Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty 500-sheet cassette RM1-4559-000CN 1 1 Limiter, cassette torque RC2-5262-000CN 1 2 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 A01 Pin, front guide lock, right 1 A02 Cover, gear 1 A03 Flag, size sensing 1 A04 Arm, lifter 1 A05 Support, lifter arm 1 A6 Bushing, lift arm 1 A07 Holder, retard gear 1 A08 Spring, tension 1 A09 Spring, tension 1 A10 Gear, 20T 1 A11 Body, cassette 1 A12 Roller, positioning 1 A13 Claw, cassette 1 A14 Roller, LU 1 A15 Flange, positioning roller, right 1 A16 Shaft, positioning roller auxiliary 1 A17 Roller, RD 1 A18 Gauge, fuel 1 A19 Pin, cassette lock, left 1 A20 Shaft, RD roller 1 A21 Spring, torsion 1 A22 Guide, nip 1 A23 Plate, paper lifting 1 A24 Gear, 88T 1 A25 Gear, 14T 1 A26 Gear, 14T 1 A27 Gear, 14T 1 A28 Gear, 15T/25T 1 A29 Gear, 37T 1 A30 Shaft, size sensing 1 A31 Shaft, retard gear holder 1 Internal components 373 Table 8-9 500-sheet cassette (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A32 Ring, E 1 A33 Label, cassette operation 1 A34 Right side end support assembly 1 A35 Cassette rear assembly 1 A36 Left side end support assembly 1 A37 Front cassette assembly 1 A38 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 1 A39 Pin, dowel 1 A40 Screw, tap, M4x12 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 374 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Internal components 375 Figure 8-11 Multipurpose pickup assembly *A07 *A20 *A31 *A12 *A32 *A01 *A38 *A38 *A41 (SL102) *A38 *A24 *A08 *A23 *A25 *A09 (J71) *A18 *A36 *A06 *A13 *A14 *A27 *A35 *A26 3 *A40 (J81) (J123) *A04 *A38 *A34 *A27 (PS105) *A10 *A28 *A30 *A38 *A38 *A29 *A02 *A17 *A21 *A19 *A16 1 2 *A39 *A25 *A05 *A37 *A11 *A15 *A22 *A33 *A03 376 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-10 Multipurpose pickup assembly Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Multipurpose pickup assembly RM1-4563-000CN 1 Multipurpose tray kit (contains 1 pickup roller, 1 feed roller, 1 separation roller) CB506-67905 1 1 Roller, pickup RL1-1641-000CN 1 2 Roller, feed RL1-1663-000CN 1 3 Roller, separation RL1-1654-000CN 1 A01 Frame, multi, right 1 A02 Guide, nip, left 1 A03 Guide, nip, center 1 A04 Guide, nip, right 1 A05 Bushing 1 A6 Bushing 1 A07 Bushing 1 A08 Bushing 1 A09 Shaft, size sensing 1 A10 Hinge, multi, left 1 A11 Hinge, multi, right 1 A12 label, jam clear envelope 1 A13 Cam 1 A14 Lever 1 A15 Shaft, multipurpose cam, left 1 A16 Shaft, multipurpose cam, right 1 A17 Cover, multipurpose spring, left 1 A18 Cover, multipurpose spring, right 1 A19 Gear, 15T/21T 1 A20 Gear, 30T/34T 1 A21 Gear, 30T 1 A22 Cam/gear, 30T 1 A23 Cam/gear, 30T 1 A24 Gear, 14T 1 A25 Spring, tension 2 A26 Spring, compression 1 A27 Spring, tension 2 A28 Spring, tension 1 A29 Multipurpose guide assembly 1 Internal components 377 Table 8-10 Multipurpose pickup assembly (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A30 Presence sensor holder assembly 1 A31 Multipurpose pickup gear assembly 1 A32 Multipurpose frame assembly 1 A33 Multipurpose tray assembly 1 A34 Cable, multipurpose sensor 1 A35 Limiter, multipurpose torque 1 A36 Holder, separation 1 A37 Screw, D, M3x8 1 A38 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 7 A39 Cover, roller 1 A40 Ring, E 1 A41 Multipurpose solenoid assembly 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 378 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Internal components 379 Figure 8-12 Paper delivery assembly *A03 A *A01 *A02 *A14 1 *A05 *A15 *A04 *A16 *A17 *A12 *A13 *A10 *A06 *A19 A *A09 *A18 *A07 *A11 2 *A05 380 Chapter 8 Parts *A09 *A08 ENWW Table 8-11 Paper delivery assembly Ref 1 ENWW Description Part number Qty Paper delivery assembly RM1-4529-000CN 1 1 Spring, tension RC1-0133-000CN 1 2 Spring, grounding RU6-2105-000CN 1 A01 Roller, face-down, upper 1 A02 Deflector, delivery 1 A03 Ring, E 1 A04 Bushing, paper delivery, upper 1 A05 Bushing 2 A6 Spring, grounding 1 A07 Bushing, paper delivery, upper 1 A08 Frame, face-down 1 A09 Bushing 2 A10 Bushing 1 A11 Guide, paper delivery 1 A12 Flange, positioning roller, right 1 A13 Roller, delivery intermediate 1 A14 Roller, face-down, lower 1 A15 Gear, 21T 1 A16 Gear, 17T 1 A17 Gear, 20T 1 A18 Gear, 33T 1 A19 Gear, 18T 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. Internal components 381 Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly *A52 *A28 *A34 *A11 *A40 *A46 *A10 (J136) 2 *A47 *A39 *A05 A *A10 1 *A12 *A24 *A05 (J134) *A25 *A38 *A06 *A42 *A23 *A45 *A31 *A03 (J778) (J131) *A50 (J929) (J129) (J128LB) *A37 (J128LA) *A37 *A15 *A08 *A16 *A02 (J929) (J129) (PS700) (PS699) *A02 *A51 *A43 *A07 *A36 *A27 *A13 *A35 *A29 *A17 *A18 *A32 *A48 *A30 *A44 *A20 *A04 *A14 *A27 *A50 A *A17 (J136) (J128) *A49 *A19 *A21 382 Chapter 8 Parts *A49 B *A26 *A01 *A09 *A44 *A41 (J134) *A33 B *A22 ENWW Table 8-12 Fusing assembly Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Fusing assembly (110-127 V) CB506-67901 1 Fusing assembly (220-240 V) CB506-67902 1 1 Roller, pressure 1 2 Sleeve guide assembly (110-127 V) 1 2 Sleeve guide assembly (220-240 V) 1 A01 Guide, paper inlet, lower 1 A02 Holder, fusing sensor 2 A03 Lever, release, left 1 A04 Sheet, fusing protective 1 A05 Bushing 2 A6 Roller, face-up 1 A07 Spring, torsion 1 A08 Spring, torsion 1 A09 Side plate, fusing, left 1 A10 Spring, compression 2 A11 Plate, pressure, right 1 A12 Plate, pressure, left 1 A13 Bushing 1 A14 Bushing 1 A15 Flag, sensor, right 1 A16 Flag, sensor, left 1 A17 Lever, sensor 2 A18 Spring, torsion 1 A19 Spring, torsion 1 A20 Guide, cable, right 1 A21 Guide, cable, left 1 A22 Spring, leaf 1 A23 Bar, filter, rear 1 A24 Eliminator 1 A25 Holder, brush 1 A26 Rib, cable guide 1 A27 Cam 2 A28 Sheet, protective, right upper 1 A29 Sheet, protective, right lower 1 Internal components 383 Table 8-12 Fusing assembly (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A30 Side plate, fusing, right 1 A31 Lever, release, right 1 A32 Guide, paper delivery, lower 1 A33 Screw, stepped 2 A34 Sheet, protective, left 1 A35 Gear, 18T 1 A36 Gear, 17T 1 A37 IC, photo interrupter 2 A38 Guide, paper delivery guide, upper 1 A39 Pressure roller gear assembly 1 A40 Upper entrance guide assembly 1 A41 Cable, FSR AC 1 A42 Cable, FSR DC 1 A43 Holder, fusing lever 1 A44 Screw, M3x8 4 A45 Screw, RS, M3x8 2 A46 Screw, D, M3x8 2 A47 Screw with washer, M3x6 1 A48 Screw with washer, M3x6 1 A49 Screw, tap, S 2 A50 Ring, E 2 A51 Lever, paper delivery sensor 1 A52 Label, “Caution, high temp.” 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 384 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Internal components 385 PCAs Figure 8-14 PCAs—base unit 1 3 2 386 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-13 PCAs—base unit ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 DC controller PCA RM1-4582-000CN 1 2 Electrical components assembly (110-127 V) RM1-4549-000CN 1 2 Electrical components assembly (220-240 V) RM1-4578-000CN 1 3 Formatter assembly (base models) CB437-69001 (exchange) 1 3 Formatter assembly (network models) CB438-69001 (exchange) 1 3 Formatter assembly (base models) CB437-67901 (new) 1 3 Formatter assembly (network models) CB438-67901 (new) 1 PCAs 387 Figure 8-15 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder PCA 1 388 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-14 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder PCA ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA RM1-6214-000CN 1 PCAs 389 Figure 8-16 Multi-bin mailbox PCA 1 390 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-15 Multi-bin mailbox PCA ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Multi-bin mailbox PCA RM1-6224-000CN 1 PCAs 391 Input devices Figure 8-17 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body (J105L) 9 5 *A28 (J105LA) (J105LB) (J1602) *A28 *A13 *A28 *A28 (J1606) (J1608) 4 (J1621) *A12 *A28 *A28 C 8 *A26 (J1623) 7 *A28 B *A01 *A25 11 C 3 A *A29 *A29 *A28 *A08 (J1605) *A28 10 *A28 *A02 *A06 *A28 *A28 *A29 *A04 *A27 1 2 *A19 *A16 *A31 *A10 *A23 (SL1600) (J1604) *A17 *A09 *A20 *A30 *A03 *A05 *A07 B *A14 *A18 *A15 *A21 *A29 *A11 *A31 *A29 *A29 *A24 A 6 *A28 *A28 *A22 392 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-16 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) CB506-67904 1 1 Solenoid 1 2 Size detect assembly 1 3 Paper feed roller assembly 4 Front top plate assembly 1 5 Cable, interface, upper 1 6 Pickup drive side plate 1 7 Cable, size sensor 1 8 500-page feeder driver PCA 1 9 Connector, drawer, 6P 1 10 Lifter driver assembly 1 11 Paper pickup roller assembly A01 Spring, tension 1 A02 Support, lifter drive assembly 1 A03 Bushing 1 A04 Guide, cassette right, rear 1 A05 Guide, cassette left, rear 1 A06 Plate, reinforcement 1 A07 Guide, left 1 A08 Guide, cable 1 A09 Shaft, lock joint 1 A10 Arm, lock 1 A11 Lever, lock 1 A12 Upper plate, rear 1 A13 Upper plate, right 1 A14 Shaft, retard drive 1 A15 Gear, 23T 1 A16 Gear, 14T 1 A17 Gear, 16T 1 A18 Spring, tension 1 A19 Left frame assembly 1 A20 Right frame assembly 1 A21 Front cassette left guide assembly 1 A22 Lower frame assembly 1 RM1-0037-020CN RM1-0036-020CN 1 1 Input devices 393 Table 8-16 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A23 Lock side plate assembly 1 A24 Right front guide assembly 1 A25 Right guide assembly 1 A26 Screw, with washer, M3x6 2 A27 screw, tap, M3x6 1 A28 Screw, D, M3x8 33 A29 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 13 A30 Ring, E 1 A31 Ring, E 2 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 394 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Input devices 395 Figure 8-18 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette *A23 *A24 *A05 *A04 *A06 *A34 *A36 *A10 *A26 *A21 *A20 *A17 *A35 *A30 *A03 *A38 *A25 *A28 *A02 *A27 *A39 *A29 *A01 *A15 *A12 *A32 *A08 *A16 *A14 *A40 *A09 *A13 *A22 A *A07 *A31 *A11 *A33 *A18 1 A 2 *A37 *A19 396 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-17 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette RM1-4559-000CN 1 1 Limiter, cassette torque RC2-5262-000CN 1 2 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) CB506-67904 1 A01 Pin, front guide lock, right 1 A02 Cover, gear 1 A03 Flag, size sensing 3 A04 Arm, lifter 1 A05 Support, lifter arm 1 A06 Bushing, lifter arm 1 A07 Holder, retard gear 1 A08 Spring, tension 1 A09 Spring, torsion 1 A10 Gear, 20T 1 A11 Body, cassette 1 A12 Roller, positioning 1 A13 Claw, cassette 1 A14 Roller, LU 1 A15 Flange, positioning roller, right 1 A16 Shaft, positioning roller, auxiliary 1 A17 Roller, RD 1 A18 Gauge, fuel 1 A19 1 A20 1 A21 Spring, torsion 1 A22 Guide, nip 1 A23 Plate, paper lifting 1 A24 Gear, 88T 1 A25 Gear, 14T 1 A26 Gear, 14T 1 A27 Gear, 14T 1 A28 Gear, 15T/25T 1 A29 Gear, 37T 1 A30 Shaft, size sensing 1 Input devices 397 Table 8-17 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A31 Shaft, retard gear holder 1 A32 Ring, E 1 A33 Label, cassette operation 1 A34 Right side end support assembly 1 A35 Cassette rear assembly 1 A36 Left side end support assembly 1 A37 Front cassette assembly 1 A38 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 1 A39 Pin, dowel 1 A40 Screw, tap, M4x12 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 398 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Input devices 399 Figure 8-19 Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers 1 6 2 *A05 A *A04 6 5 *A02 *A04 *A03 7 A 7 4 6 3 400 Chapter 8 Parts *A01 6 8 ENWW Table 8-18 Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers 1 ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, rear RC2-2640-000CN 1 2 Cover, right RC2-2641-000CN 1 3 Cover, left RC2-2642-000CN 1 4 Cover, left lower RC2-2643-000CN 1 5 Cover, lock RC2-2584-000CN 1 6 Screw, with washer, M3x8 XA9-1420-000CN 4 7 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 XB4-7401-007CN 2 8 Front door assembly RM1-5255-000CN 1 A01 Arm, front cover support 1 A02 Stopper, front door 1 A03 Spring, torsion 1 A04 Shaft, front cover hinge 2 A05 Gear, 16T 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. Input devices 401 Figure 8-20 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly 2 1 402 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-19 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly RM1-5255-000CN 1 1 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 2 Limiter, cassette torque RC2-5262-000CN 1 Input devices 403 Figure 8-21 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) 11 *A40 *A40 *A40 13 A (J105LB) (J105L) 12 2 (J105LA) *A29 *A39 5 6 *A40 (J1706) (J1701) *A40 *A01 *A40 7 *A37 *A31 *A40 *A40 *A18 *A40 *A40 *A41 (M1700) (J1703) *A40 *A33 1 (J1704) *A08 *A26 8 4 (J1722) *A40 *A17 *A20 *A40 A *A34 *A40 *A17 *A40 *A32 *A40 404 Chapter 8 Parts *A40 ENWW Table 8-20 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Motor, stepping RH7-1603-020CN 1 2 Cable, interface RM1-5126-000CN 1 4 Cable, door sensor RM1-5128-000CN 1 5 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-5262-000CN 1 6 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA RM1-6214-000CN 1 7 Oil damper assembly RM1-0289-030CN 1 8 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1136-000CN 1 11 Numbering assembly RM1-5265-000CN 1 12 Connector, drawer, 6P VS1-7500-006CN 1 13 Paper pickup assembly (see Figure 8-23 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 412) 1 A01 Holder, connector 1 A02 Pin, lifter tray stopper 1 A03 Sheet, solenoid damper 1 A04 Latch, front cover, upper 1 A05 Block, front cover pushing 1 A06 Guide, paper set, right 1 A07 Guide, paper set, left 1 A08 Block, paper size sensor 1 A09 Reel, lifter wire 2 A10 Cover, lifter wire reel 2 A11 Support, wire pulley 8 A12 Cover, pulley 8 A13 Shaft, lifter drive 1 A14 Pulley, wire, front 2 A15 Pulley, wire, rear 6 A16 Cover, lifter wire reel 2 A17 Plate, lifter wire cover 2 A18 Plate, damper support 1 A19 Support, release hook, left 1 A20 Holder, hinge shaft, lower 1 A21 Guide, paper set, front 1 A22 Bushing 1 A23 Gear, 14T 1 A24 Gear, 15T 1 Input devices 405 Table 8-20 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A25 Gear, 19T/39T 1 A26 Spring, tension 1 A27 Spring, tension 2 A28 Spring, torsion 1 A29 Gear, 16T 1 A30 Spacer, screw 2 A31 Frame, rear 1 A32 Frame, lower 1 A33 Frame, right 1 A34 Frame, left 1 A35 Saddle, wire 1 A36 Lifter tray assembly 1 A37 Paper pickup side plate assembly 1 A38 Left hook assembly 1 A39 Screw, with washer, M3x8 4 A40 Screw, tap, M3x6 67 A41 Screw, with washer, M3x6 2 A42 Ring, E 2 A43 Ring, E 3 A44 Pin, dowel 3 A45 Foot 2 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 406 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Input devices 407 Figure 8-22 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) *A02 *A36 *A27 *A40 *A11 *A12 *A15 *A40 *A27 *A21 *A33 *A40 *A42 *A23 (J1702) *A40 *A42 *A11 3 *A12 *A15 (J1720) *A40 *A40 10 *A11 *A35 *A12 *A15 *A03 *A40 *A11 *A12 *A14 *A06 *A15 *A12 *A11 *A40 *A15 *A12 *A11 *A19 *A40 *A13 *A34 *A04 *A43 *A25 *A44 *A43 *A07 *A40 *A40 *A38 *A28 *A15 *A12 *A14 *A11 *A12 *A40 *A11 *A40 9 *A40 408 Chapter 8 Parts *A22 *A16 *A44 *A09 *A45 *A10 *A43 *A24 *A05 *A40 *A32 *A10 *A44 *A09 *A16 *A40 *A30 *A39 *A40 *A30 *A39 ENWW Table 8-21 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Cable, size sensor RM1-5127-000CN 1 9 Remnant indication assembly RM1-5259-000CN 1 10 Paper size detect assembly RM1-5261-000CN 1 A01 Holder, connector 1 A02 Pin, lifter tray stopper 1 A03 Sheet, solenoid damper 1 A04 Latch, front cover, upper 1 A05 Block, front cover pushing 1 A06 Guide, paper set, right 1 A07 Guide, paper set, left 1 A08 Block, paper size sensor 1 A09 Reel, lifter wire 2 A10 Cover, lifter wire reel 2 A11 Support, wire pulley 8 A12 Cover, pulley 8 A13 Shaft, lifter drive 1 A14 Pulley, wire, front 2 A15 Pulley, wire, rear 6 A16 Cover, lifter wire reel 2 A17 Plate, lifter wire cover 2 A18 Plate, damper support 1 A19 Support, release hook, left 1 A20 Holder, hinge shaft, lower 1 A21 Guide, paper set, front 1 A22 Bushing 1 A23 Gear, 14T 1 A24 Gear, 15T 1 A25 Gear, 19T/39T 1 A26 Spring, tension 1 A27 Spring, tension 2 A28 Spring, torsion 1 A29 Gear, 16T 1 A30 Spacer, screw 2 A31 Frame, rear 1 Input devices 409 Table 8-21 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A32 Frame, lower 1 A33 Frame, right 1 A34 Frame, left 1 A35 Saddle, wire 1 A36 Lifter tray assembly 1 A37 Paper pickup side plate assembly 1 A38 Left hook assembly 1 A39 Screw, with washer, M3x8 4 A40 Screw, tap, M3x6 67 A41 Screw, with washer, M3x6 2 A42 Ring, E 2 A43 Ring, E 3 A44 Pin, dowel 3 A45 Foot 2 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 410 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Input devices 411 Figure 8-23 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly *A22 *A20 B *A25 A *A26 *A21 *A23 *A29 *A24 *A22 *A20 A B *A30 *A28 *A11 *A32 *A31 *A27 *A19 *A28 *A32 *A10 *A10 *A15 *A17 3 (J1705) *A16 *A06 *A08 *A10 (J1723) *A10 *A10 5 *A14 *A12 *A14 *A09 *A13 *A07 2 *A01 *A05 *A03 *A10 4 *A04 *A02 *A18 *A10 412 Chapter 8 Parts 1 ENWW Table 8-22 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly Ref ENWW Description Part number Qty Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) CB506-67904 1 1 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 2 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN 1 3 Paper detect sensor assembly RM1-5264-000CN 1 4 Flag, paper detect RC2-2524-000CN 1 5 Cable, feed, sensor RM1-5129-000CN 1 A01 Bushing, feed shaft 1 A02 Gear, 23T 1 A03 Arm, pick 1 A04 Plate, swing 1 A05 Support, feed bushing 1 A06 Holder, feed shaft 1 A07 Gear, 18T 1 A08 Spring, compression 1 A09 Gear, 16T 1 A10 Screw, tap, M3x6 12 A11 Gear, 14T 1 A12 Spring, compression 1 A13 Ring, retainer 1 A14 Ring, slider 2 A15 Arm, paper load limit 1 A16 Shaft, load limit arm 1 A17 Holder, load limit arm 1 A18 Guide, paper outlet 1 A19 Lack, paper end limit, upper 1 A20 Bushing 2 A21 Roller, paper feed 1 A22 Roller, paper feed 2 A23 Shaft, paper feed roller 1 A24 Flag, paper feed sensor 1 A25 Holder, paper feed sensor flag 1 A26 Spring, torsion 1 A27 Plate, front upper 1 A28 Bushing 2 Input devices 413 Table 8-22 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A29 Spring, compression 2 A30 Guide, paper feed sensor cable 1 A31 IC, photo interrupter 1 A32 Ring, E 2 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 414 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Input devices 415 Output devices Figure 8-24 Multi-bin mailbox covers 4 2 5 3 9 *A03 (J1308) 11 *A02 (SL1301) 8 *A03 (J1301) 1 *A01 6 (J300LA) (J1300LB) 10 (J300L) *A03 7 416 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-23 Multi-bin mailbox covers 1 ENWW Ref Description Part number 1 Cover, front 1 2 Cover, top 1 3 Left cover assembly 1 4 Right cover assembly 1 5 Rear door assembly 1 6 Cable, stacker drawer 1 7 Joint, left 1 8 Joint, right 1 9 Lever, in flapper link 1 10 Connector, 8P 11 IN solenoid assembly 1 A01 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 1 A02 Frame, base 1 A03 Screw, P, M3x8 3 VS1-7500-008CN Qty 1 Only orderable parts have part numbers. Output devices 417 Figure 8-25 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) 2 3 *A29 A 4 B *A07 *A31 C 3 D A *A16 *A16 *A25 *A25 B *A12 *A10 C D *A31 *A33 *A16 *A28 *A27 *A14 *A25 *A24 *A16 *A30 *A14 *A16 *A25 *A15 12 *A25 *A31 (SL1302) (SL1303) (SL1304) (SL1305) 1 *A32 5 (J1321L) (J1322L) (J1323L) (J1324L) 13 (J1321D) (J1322D) (J1323D) 9 *A02 (J1324D) (J1307) 418 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-24 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number 1 Paper sensing flag assembly 1 2 Top bin flapper assembly 1 3 Bin flapper assembly 2 4 Center bin flapper assembly 1 5 Bin solenoid assembly 9 Cable, bin solenoid 1 12 Bin assembly 5 13 Solenoid 4 14 Frame, base 1 A01 Pad, arm 1 A02 Guide, cable, L 1 A03 Latch, rear door 1 A04 Bushing 1 A05 Stopper, rear door 1 A06 Spring, tension 1 A07 Pin 5 A08 Roller, delivery, inlet 1 A09 Bushing, pressure roller 2 A10 Bushing 5 A11 Roller, intermediate 1 A12 Cover, crossmember 1 A13 Spacer 1 A14 Pulley, 24T 4 A15 Gear, 34T/Pulley, 24T 1 A16 Pulley, 24T 5 A17 Bushing 4 A18 Spring, compression 2 A19 Gear, 24T 1 A20 Gear, 41T 1 A21 Gear, 24T/35T/48T 1 A22 Gear, 35T 1 A23 Gear, 26T 1 A24 Pulley/Gear, 34T 1 A25 Belt, timing 5 RM1-5266-000CN Qty 1 Output devices 419 Table 8-24 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A26 Delivery inlet roller assembly 1 A27 Lever, bin flapper 4 A28 Base, bin lever 4 A29 Guide, crossmember 1 A30 Spring, compression 4 A31 Screw, D, M3x8 29 A32 Screw, machine, truss head, M3x4 8 A33 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 6 A34 Screw, tap, pan head, MM4x10 1 A35 Ring, E 2 A36 Sheet, bottom frame, right 2 A37 Sheet, bottom frame, left 2 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 420 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW ENWW Output devices 421 Figure 8-26 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) *A06 *A34 *A03 *A04 *A11 *A01 *A05 *A31 *A13 *A26 *A17 (J1326) *A35 10 *A08 *A18 (J1305) 11 7 *A09 *A17 *A22 *A17 *A35 *A37 *A23 *A21 *A20 *A18 *A09 *A36 *A17 *A19 *A36 *A37 *A31 (M1301) 8 6 (J1306) *A31 14 *A31 422 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-25 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 6 Drive assembly RM1-5267-000CN 1 7 Sensor assembly RM1-5096-000CN 1 8 Multi-bin mailbox PCA RM1-6224-000CN 1 10 Cable, sensor PCA 1 11 Cable guide assembly 1 14 Frame, base 1 A01 Pad, arm 1 A02 Guide, cable, L 1 A03 Latch, rear door 1 A04 Bushing 1 A05 Stopper, rear door 1 A06 Spring, tension 1 A07 Pin 5 A08 Roller, delivery, inlet 1 A09 Bushing, pressure roller 2 A10 Bushing 5 A11 Roller, intermediate 1 A12 Cover, crossmember 1 A13 Spacer 1 A14 Pulley, 24T 4 A15 Gear, 34T/Pulley, 24T 1 A16 Pulley, 24T 5 A17 Bushing 4 A18 Spring, compression 2 A19 Gear, 24T 1 A20 Gear, 41T 1 A21 Gear, 24T/35T/48T 1 A22 Gear, 35T 1 A23 Gear, 26T 1 A24 Pulley/Gear, 34T 1 A25 Belt, timing 5 A26 Delivery inlet roller assembly 1 A27 Lever, bin flapper 4 A28 Base, bin lever 4 Output devices 423 Table 8-25 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) (continued) 1 Ref Description Part number Qty A29 Guide, crossmember 1 A30 Spring, compression 4 A31 Screw, D, M3x8 29 A32 Screw, machine, truss head, M3x4 8 A33 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 6 A34 Screw, tap, pan head, MM4x10 1 A35 Ring, E 2 A36 Sheet, bottom frame, right 2 A37 Sheet, bottom frame, left 2 Only orderable parts have part numbers. 424 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Alphabetical parts list Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list Description Part number Table and page Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA RM1-6214-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder PCA on page 389 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA RM1-6214-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 500-page feeder driver PCA ENWW Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 500-sheet cassette RM1-4559-000CN 500-sheet cassette on page 373 500-sheet tray cassette RM1-4559-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Arm, front cover support Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Arm, lifter 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Arm, lifter Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Arm, lock Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Arm, paper load limit Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Arm, pick Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Arm, release, A RC2-2480-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Arm, release, B RC2-2481-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Bar, filter, rear Fusing assembly on page 383 Base, bin lever Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Base, bin lever Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Belt, timing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Belt, timing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Alphabetical parts list 425 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Bin assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bin flapper assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bin solenoid assembly RM1-5266-000CN Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Block, front cover pushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Block, front cover pushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Block, paper size sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Block, paper size sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Body, cassette 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Body, cassette Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Bushing Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Bushing RC1-0206-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Bushing RC2-5783-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Bushing Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing Fusing assembly on page 383 426 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Table and page Bushing Fusing assembly on page 383 Bushing Fusing assembly on page 383 Bushing Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Bushing, feed shaft RC1-0264-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Bushing, feed shaft Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Bushing, lift arm 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Bushing, lifter arm Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Bushing, paper delivery ENWW Part number RC1-0136-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Bushing, paper delivery, upper Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing, paper delivery, upper Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing, pressure roller Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Alphabetical parts list 427 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Bushing, pressure roller Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Cable guide assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Cable, bin solenoid Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Cable, door sensor RM1-5128-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Cable, door switch RM1-5080-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, drum motor RM1-5090-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Cable, envelope feeder RM1-5085-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, feed motor RM1-5089-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Cable, feed, sensor RM1-5129-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Cable, FSR AC Fusing assembly on page 383 Cable, FSR DC Fusing assembly on page 383 Cable, full sensor RM1-5081-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, fuser motor RM1-5088-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, inlet (110-127 V) RM1-5078-000CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Cable, inlet (220-240 V) RM1-5079-000CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Cable, interface RM1-5126-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Cable, interface, upper Cable, laser Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 RM1-5087-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Cable, multipurpose sensor Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cable, OPT DEL Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, option feeder Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, panel 428 Chapter 8 Parts RM1-5082-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Cable, sensor PCA Cable, size sensor Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 RM1-5091-000CN Cable, size sensor Cable, size sensor Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 RM1-5127-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Cable, stacker drawer Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Cam Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cam Fusing assembly on page 383 Cam/gear, 30T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cam/gear, 30T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cap, drum gear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Case, envelope Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cassette rear assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Cassette rear assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Center bin flapper assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Clamp, cable Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Clamp, cord Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Claw, cassette 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Claw, cassette Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Clip, cable Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Connector, 8P VS1-7500-008CN Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Connector, drawer, 6P VS1-7514-006CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Connector, drawer, 6P ENWW Table and page Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Alphabetical parts list 429 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Connector, drawer, 6P VS1-7500-006CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Control panel assembly (P4014) RM1-5060-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Control panel assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-5059-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, connector Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cover, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Cover, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Cover, duplexing outer (P4014) RC2-5760-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, duplexing outer (P4015/P4515) RC2-2510-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, envelope RL1-1667-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Cover, envelope connector (P4014) RC2-5759-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, envelope connector (P4015/P4515) RC2-2476-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, formatter (P4014) RC2-5757-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, formatter (P4015/P4515) RC2-2468-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, front Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Cover, gear 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Cover, gear Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Cover, left RC2-2642-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Cover, left lower RC2-2643-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Cover, legal (P4014) RC2-5761-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, legal (P4015/P4515) RC2-5239-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, lifter wire reel 430 Chapter 8 Parts Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Table and page Cover, lifter wire reel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Cover, lifter wire reel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Cover, lifter wire reel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Cover, lock RC2-2584-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Cover, multipurpose spring, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cover, multipurpose spring, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cover, option ENWW Part number RC2-2459-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Cover, pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Cover, rear RC2-2640-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Cover, right RC2-2641-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Cover, right front (P4014) RC2-5758-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, right front (P4015/P4515) RC2-2475-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, right rear (P4014) RC2-5768-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, right rear (P4015/P4515) RC2-2478-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Cover, roller Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cover, top Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Crossmember, front Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Crossmember, fusing Power supply assembly on page 371 Crossmember, option, left Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Alphabetical parts list 431 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Crossmember, option, right Table and page Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 DC controller PCA RM1-4582-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 DC controller PCA RM1-4582-000CN PCAs—base unit on page 387 Deflector, delivery Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Delivery inlet roller assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Delivery inlet roller assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Drive assembly RM1-5267-000CN Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Duct, fourth fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Duct, scanner protective, 1 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Duct, scanner protective, 2 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Duct, second fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Electrical components assembly (110-127 V) RM1-4549-000CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Electrical components assembly (110-127 V) RM1-4549-000CN PCAs—base unit on page 387 Electrical components assembly (220-240 V) RM1-4578-000CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Electrical components assembly (220-240 V) RM1-4578-000CN PCAs—base unit on page 387 Eliminator Fusing assembly on page 383 Face-up tray assembly (P4014) RM1-5448-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Face-up tray assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4531-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Fan RK2-1988-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Fan RK2-1989-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Fan RK2-1991-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Fan RK2-1992-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Feeder sensor cable assembly 432 Chapter 8 Parts Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Flag, paper detect RC2-2524-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Flag, paper feed sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Flag, paper presence detect Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Flag, sensor, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Flag, sensor, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Flag, shutter Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Flag, size sensing 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Flag, size sensing Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Flange, positioning roller, right 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Flange, positioning roller, right Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Flange, positioning roller, right Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Foot Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Foot Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Foot Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Formatter assembly (base models) CB437-69001 (exchange) PCAs—base unit on page 387 Formatter assembly (base models) CB437-67901 (new) PCAs—base unit on page 387 Formatter assembly (network models) CB438-69001 (exchange) PCAs—base unit on page 387 Formatter assembly (network models) CB438-67901 (new) PCAs—base unit on page 387 Frame, base Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Frame, base Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Frame, base Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Frame, face-down Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Alphabetical parts list 433 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Frame, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Frame, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Frame, multi, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Frame, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Frame, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Front cassette assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Front cassette assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Front cassette left guide assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Front cassette LF guide assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Front cover assembly RM1-4534-000CN Front door assembly RM1-5255-000CN Front top plate assembly Covers—base unit on page 357 Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Fuser assembly (110-127 V) (also see Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly on page 382) CB506-67901 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Fuser assembly (220-240 V) (also see Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly on page 382) CB506-67902 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Fuser motor assembly RM1-5051-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 434 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Fusing assembly (110-127 V) CB506-67901 Fusing assembly on page 383 Fusing assembly (220-240 V) CB506-67902 Fusing assembly on page 383 Gauge, fuel 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gauge, fuel Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear 35T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 14T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 14T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 14T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 14T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 14T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 14T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Gear, 14T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 15T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 15T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 15T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Gear, 15T/21T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 15T/25T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Alphabetical parts list 435 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Gear, 15T/25T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 16T Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 17T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 17T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 17T Fusing assembly on page 383 Gear, 17T/25T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 18T RU5-0045-020CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 18T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 18T Fusing assembly on page 383 Gear, 18T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 193T Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Gear, 19T/39T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 19T/39T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Gear, 20T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 20T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 20T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 21T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 436 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Gear, 23T RU6-0159-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 23T Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Gear, 23T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 23T/19T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 24T/35T/48T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 24T/35T/48T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 25T/91T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 26T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 26T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 29T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 30T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 30T/34T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 33T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 33T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 34T/Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 34T/Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 35T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 35T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 35T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 37T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Alphabetical parts list 437 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Gear, 37T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 37T/18T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 41T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 41T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 88T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 88T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Grounding plate assembly RM1-5461-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guard, edge Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guard, edge Power supply assembly on page 371 Guide, cable Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, cable, L Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Guide, cable, L Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Guide, cable, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, cable, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, cable, right front Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, cartridge, right Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, cassette left, rear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, cassette left, rear Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, cassette right, rear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, cassette right, rear Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, connecting cable RC1-0386-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Guide, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 438 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description ENWW Part number Table and page Guide, EPU, rear Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, flat flexible cable Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, front Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, gear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, gear shift, A Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, gear shift, B Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, left Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, left Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, left, upper Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, lower Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, nip 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Guide, nip Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Guide, nip, center Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Guide, nip, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Guide, nip, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Guide, paper delivery Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Guide, paper delivery guide, upper Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, paper delivery, lower Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, paper feed sensor cable Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Guide, paper inlet, lower Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, paper outlet Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Guide, paper set, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Alphabetical parts list 439 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Guide, paper set, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Guide, paper set, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Guide, paper set, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Guide, paper set, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Guide, paper set, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Guide, rear Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, scanner cable Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Hinge, multi, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Hinge, multi, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Holder, brush Fusing assembly on page 383 Holder, check pin Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, connector Power supply assembly on page 371 Holder, connector Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Holder, connector Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Holder, DCU Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, feed shaft Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Holder, fusing lever Fusing assembly on page 383 Holder, fusing sensor Fusing assembly on page 383 Holder, hinge shaft, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 440 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Table and page Holder, hinge shaft, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Holder, inlet Power supply assembly on page 371 Holder, load limit arm Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Holder, paper feed sensor flag Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Holder, retard gear 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Holder, retard gear Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Holder, sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, separation Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Holder, sheet sensor Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 IC, photo interrupter ENWW Part number WG8-5624-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 IC, photo interrupter Fusing assembly on page 383 IC, photo interrupter Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 IN solenoid assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Joint, left Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Joint, right Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Label, cassette operation 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Label, cassette operation Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 label, jam clear envelope Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Label, “Caution, high temp.” Fusing assembly on page 383 Alphabetical parts list 441 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Lack, paper end limit, upper Laser scanner assembly Table and page Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 RM1-5465-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Latch, front cover, upper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Latch, front cover, upper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Latch, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Latch, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Left cover assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Left cover assembly (P4014) RM1-5450-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Left cover assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4551-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Left frame assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Left hook assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Left hook assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Left side end support assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Left side end support assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Lever Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Lever, bin flapper Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Lever, bin flapper Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Lever, height prevention Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Lever, in flapper link Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Lever, lens Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 442 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Lever, lock Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Lever, paper delivery sensor Fusing assembly on page 383 Lever, release, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Lever, release, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Lever, sensor Fusing assembly on page 383 Lid, scanner protective duct Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Lifter drive assembly RM1-4585-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1136-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Lifter driver assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Lifter tray assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Lifter tray assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Limiter, cassette torque RC2-5262-000CN 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Limiter, cassette torque RC2-5262-000CN Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Limiter, cassette torque RC2-5262-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly on page 403 Limiter, multipurpose torque Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Lock side plate assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Lower frame assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Motor, DC, 24 V, drum drive RL1-1659-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Motor, DC, 24 V, main drive RL1-1657-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Motor, stepping RH7-1603-020CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Mount, lever Multi-bin mailbox PCA ENWW Table and page Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-6224-000CN Multi-bin mailbox PCA on page 391 Alphabetical parts list 443 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Multi-bin mailbox PCA RM1-6224-000CN Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Multipurpose frame assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose guide assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose pickup assembly RM1-4563-000CN Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose pickup gear assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose solenoid assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose tray assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose tray kit (contains 1 pickup roller, 1 feed roller, 1 separation roller) CB506-67905 Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose tray pickup assembly RM1-4563-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Numbering assembly RM1-5265-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Oil damper assembly RM1-0289-030CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly RM1-5255-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly on page 403 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette RM1-4559-000CN Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Pad, arm Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pad, arm Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Paper delivery assembly RM1-4529-000CN Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Paper delivery assembly (also see Figure 8-12 Paper delivery assembly on page 380) RM1-4529-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Paper delivery drive assembly RM1-4526-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Paper detect sensor assembly RM1-5264-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Paper feed assembly RM1-4548-000CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-4527-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 444 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly on page 403 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Paper feed shaft Z assembly RM1-4562-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Paper pickup assembly (see Figure 8-23 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 412) Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-4532-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-5262-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Paper pickup side plate assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Paper pickup side plate assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Paper sensing flag assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Paper size detect assembly ENWW Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-5261-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pickup drive side plate Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Pin Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Alphabetical parts list 445 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Pin Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pin, cassette lock, left 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Pin, dowel 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Pin, dowel Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Pin, dowel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pin, dowel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pin, front guide lock, right 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Pin, front guide lock, right Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Pin, lifter tray stopper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pin, lifter tray stopper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pin, option RC1-0306-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Plate, damper support Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Plate, damper support Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Plate, front upper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Plate, lifter wire cover Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Plate, lifter wire cover Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Plate, paper lifting 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Plate, paper lifting Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Plate, pressure, left Fusing assembly on page 383 446 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description ENWW Part number Table and page Plate, pressure, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Plate, reinforcement Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Plate, RW crossmember Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Plate, swing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Power-supply assembly, 110-127 V (see Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly on page 370) Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Power-supply assembly, 220-240 V (see Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly on page 370) Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Presence sensor holder assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Pressure roller gear assembly Fusing assembly on page 383 Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) CB506-67904 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) CB506-67904 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) CB506-67904 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pulley, wire, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pulley, wire, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pulley, wire, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pulley, wire, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pulley/Gear, 34T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pulley/Gear, 34T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Alphabetical parts list 447 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Rear door assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Reel, lifter wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Reel, lifter wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Registration assembly RM1-5460-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Remnant indication assembly RM1-5259-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Rib, cable guide Fusing assembly on page 383 Right cover assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Right cover assembly (P4014) RM1-5449-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Right cover assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4550-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Right frame assembly Right front guide assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 RM1-4576-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Right front guide assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Right guide assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Right guide assembly (P4014) RM1-5451-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Right guide assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4558-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Right side end support assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Right side end support assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Right stopper assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Ring, E XD9-0232-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Ring, E 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Ring, E Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 448 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Table and page Ring, E Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Ring, E Fusing assembly on page 383 Ring, E Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Ring, E Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Ring, E Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Ring, E Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Ring, E Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Ring, retainer Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Ring, slider Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Rod, din board Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Rod, release, lower Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Rod, release, upper Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Rod, switch ENWW Part number RC2-2667-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Rod, third fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Roller, delivery intermediate Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Alphabetical parts list 449 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Roller, delivery, inlet Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Roller, delivery, inlet Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Roller, face-down, lower Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Roller, face-down, upper Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Roller, face-up Fusing assembly on page 383 Roller, feed RL1-1663-000CN Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Roller, intermediate Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Roller, intermediate Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Roller, LU 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Roller, LU Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Roller, paper feed Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Roller, paper feed Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Roller, pickup RL1-1641-000CN Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Roller, positioning 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Roller, positioning Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Roller, pressure Fusing assembly on page 383 Roller, RD 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Roller, RD Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Roller, separation RL1-1654-000CN Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Saddle, wire Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Saddle, wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 450 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Table and page Saddle, wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Screw with washer, M3x6 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw with washer, M3x6 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, D, M3x8 Covers—base unit on page 357 Screw, D, M3x8 XA9-1671-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Screw, D, M3x8 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Screw, D, M3x8 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Screw, D, M3x8 Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, D, M3x8 Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Screw, D, M3x8 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, D, M3x8 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Screw, D, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, D, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Screw, flat head RS, M3x6 XA9-1464-000CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, M3x8 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, M4x5 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Screw, machine, pan head, M3x6 XB1-1300-605CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, machine, truss head, M3x4 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, machine, truss head, M3x4 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Screw, P, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Screw, RS, M3x8 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, stepped Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 ENWW Part number XB4-7300-809CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Alphabetical parts list 451 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Screw, tap, M3x6 XA9-1503-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Screw, tap, M3x6 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Screw, tap, M3x6 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Screw, tap, M4x12 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Screw, tap, M4x12 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 XB4-7401-007CN Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Screw, tap, pan head, MM4x10 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, tap, pan head, MM4x10 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 452 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Table and page Screw, tap, S Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10 Covers—base unit on page 357 Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10 XB4-7401-007CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Screw, with washer, M3x6 XB2-7300-607CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Screw, with washer, M3x8 ENWW Part number XA9-1420-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Screw, with washer, M3x8 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Screw, with washer, M3x8 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Screw, with washer, M4x6 XB2-7400-606CN Power supply assembly on page 371 Sensor assembly RM1-5096-000CN Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Shaft, front cover hinge Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Shaft, lifter drive Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Shaft, lifter drive Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Shaft, load limit arm Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Shaft, lock joint Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Shaft, multipurpose cam, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Shaft, multipurpose cam, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Alphabetical parts list 453 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Shaft, paper feed roller Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Shaft, positioning roller auxiliary 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Shaft, positioning roller, auxiliary Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Shaft, RD roller 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Shaft, retard drive RL1-1658-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Shaft, retard drive Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Shaft, retard gear holder 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Shaft, retard gear holder Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Shaft, size sensing 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Shaft, size sensing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Shaft, size sensing Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Sheet, bottom frame, left Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Sheet, bottom frame, left Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Sheet, bottom frame, right Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Sheet, bottom frame, right Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Sheet, fusing protective Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, protective, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, protective, right lower Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, protective, right upper Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, solenoid damper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Sheet, solenoid damper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Side plate, drum drive Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 454 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Table and page Side plate, fuser drive Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Side plate, fusing, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Side plate, fusing, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Side plate, paper feed drive Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Size detect assembly RM1-4525-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Size detect assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Sleeve guide assembly (110-127 V) Fusing assembly on page 383 Sleeve guide assembly (220-240 V) Fusing assembly on page 383 Solenoid RK2-0270-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Solenoid Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Solenoid Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spacer Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spacer Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Spacer, frame Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Spacer, scanner, front Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spacer, scanner, rear Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spacer, screw Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spacer, screw Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spring, compression Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Spring, compression ENWW Part number RC1-0213-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spring, compression Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, compression Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, compression Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Alphabetical parts list 455 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Spring, compression Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Spring, compression Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Spring, grounding Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Spring, grounding RU6-2105-000CN Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Spring, grounding Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Spring, leaf Power supply assembly on page 371 Spring, leaf Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, tension RU6-2115-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spring, tension RC1-0198-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Spring, tension 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Spring, tension 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Spring, tension Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, tension Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, tension Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, tension RC1-0133-000CN Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Spring, tension Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Spring, tension Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Spring, tension Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 456 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description ENWW Part number Table and page Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spring, tension Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spring, tension Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Spring, torsion Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spring, torsion Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spring, torsion 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Spring, torsion Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Stopper, C left (P4014) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Stopper, C left (P4015/P4515) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Alphabetical parts list 457 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Stopper, C right (P4014) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Stopper, C right (P4015/P4515) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Stopper, front door Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Stopper, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Stopper, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Support, DCU Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Support, feed bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Support, lifter arm 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Support, lifter arm Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Support, lifter drive assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Support, lifter drive assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Support, power supply switch Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Support, release hook, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Support, release hook, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Support, wire pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Support, wire pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Tag holder assembly RM1-4539-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Thermistor unit RK2-0359-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Top bin flapper assembly Top cover assembly (P4014) 458 Chapter 8 Parts Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 RM1-5250-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Top cover assembly (P4015/P4515) RM1-4552-000CN Covers—base unit on page 357 Transfer roller assembly CB506-67903 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Upper entrance guide assembly Fusing assembly on page 383 Upper plate, rear Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Upper plate, right Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Alphabetical parts list 459 Numerical parts list Table 8-27 Numerical parts list Part number 460 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10 Covers—base unit on page 357 Screw, D, M3x8 Covers—base unit on page 357 Screw, M4x5 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Power-supply assembly, 110-127 V (see Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly on page 370) Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Power-supply assembly, 220-240 V (see Figure 8-9 Power supply assembly on page 370) Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Gear, 193T Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guard, edge Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Clamp, cord Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Rod, release, upper Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Rod, release, lower Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, gear shift, A Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, gear shift, B Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, scanner cable Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, gear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, cassette right, rear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Guide, cassette left, rear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Support, power supply switch Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Foot Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Spacer, frame Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Side plate, drum drive Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Cap, drum gear Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Bushing Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Spring, compression Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 Feeder sensor cable assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Screw, D, M3x8 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spacer, scanner, front Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spacer, scanner, rear Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Screw, tap, M3x6 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, front Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Support, DCU Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Bushing Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, cable, right front Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Lever, height prevention Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Holder, sheet sensor Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, EPU, rear Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Clip, cable Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Saddle, wire Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Guide, lower Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Duct, scanner protective, 1 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Flag, shutter Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spring, torsion Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Plate, RW crossmember Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Numerical parts list 461 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 462 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Lever, lens Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Stopper, C right (P4015/P4515) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Stopper, C right (P4014) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Stopper, C left (P4015/P4515) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Stopper, C left (P4014) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Mount, lever Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Right stopper assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Side plate, paper feed drive Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 29T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 35T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 37T/18T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Gear, 17T/25T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Spring, torsion Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Flag, paper presence detect Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Lid, scanner protective duct Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Duct, scanner protective, 2 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Support, lifter drive assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cover, connector Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Case, envelope Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Front cassette LF guide assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Screw, D, M3x8 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, cartridge, right Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Rod, third fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Crossmember, front Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Crossmember, option, left Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, rear Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Duct, second fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Duct, fourth fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, DCU Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, flat flexible cable Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, check pin Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Spring, grounding Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, left Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Guide, left, upper Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Rod, din board Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 23T/19T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Crossmember, option, right Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Side plate, fuser drive Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 17T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 15T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Numerical parts list 463 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 464 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Gear, 25T/91T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear, 33T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Gear 35T Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, option feeder Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Cable, OPT DEL Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Clamp, cable Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Screw, tap, M3x6 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Holder, inlet Power supply assembly on page 371 Holder, connector Power supply assembly on page 371 Guard, edge Power supply assembly on page 371 Spring, leaf Power supply assembly on page 371 Crossmember, fusing Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, D, M3x8 Power supply assembly on page 371 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Power supply assembly on page 371 Pin, front guide lock, right 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Cover, gear 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Flag, size sensing 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Arm, lifter 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Support, lifter arm 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Bushing, lift arm 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Holder, retard gear 500-sheet cassette on page 373 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Spring, tension 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Spring, tension 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 20T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Body, cassette 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Roller, positioning 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Claw, cassette 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Roller, LU 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Flange, positioning roller, right 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Shaft, positioning roller auxiliary 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Roller, RD 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gauge, fuel 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Pin, cassette lock, left 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Shaft, RD roller 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Spring, torsion 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Guide, nip 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Plate, paper lifting 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 88T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 14T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 14T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 14T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 15T/25T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Gear, 37T 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Numerical parts list 465 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 466 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Shaft, size sensing 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Shaft, retard gear holder 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Ring, E 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Label, cassette operation 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Right side end support assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Cassette rear assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Left side end support assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Front cassette assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Pin, dowel 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Screw, tap, M4x12 500-sheet cassette on page 373 Frame, multi, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Guide, nip, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Guide, nip, center Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Guide, nip, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Bushing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Shaft, size sensing Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Hinge, multi, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Hinge, multi, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page label, jam clear envelope Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cam Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Lever Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Shaft, multipurpose cam, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Shaft, multipurpose cam, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cover, multipurpose spring, left Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cover, multipurpose spring, right Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 15T/21T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 30T/34T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 30T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cam/gear, 30T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cam/gear, 30T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Gear, 14T Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, tension Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, compression Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, tension Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Spring, tension Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose guide assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Presence sensor holder assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose pickup gear assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose frame assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose tray assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Numerical parts list 467 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 468 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Cable, multipurpose sensor Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Limiter, multipurpose torque Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Holder, separation Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Screw, D, M3x8 Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Cover, roller Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Ring, E Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Multipurpose solenoid assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 Roller, face-down, upper Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Deflector, delivery Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Ring, E Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing, paper delivery, upper Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Spring, grounding Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing, paper delivery, upper Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Frame, face-down Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Bushing Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Guide, paper delivery Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Flange, positioning roller, right Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Roller, delivery intermediate Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Roller, face-down, lower Paper delivery assembly on page 381 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Gear, 21T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 17T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 20T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 33T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Gear, 18T Paper delivery assembly on page 381 Roller, pressure Fusing assembly on page 383 Sleeve guide assembly (110-127 V) Fusing assembly on page 383 Sleeve guide assembly (220-240 V) Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, paper inlet, lower Fusing assembly on page 383 Holder, fusing sensor Fusing assembly on page 383 Lever, release, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, fusing protective Fusing assembly on page 383 Bushing Fusing assembly on page 383 Roller, face-up Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Side plate, fusing, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, compression Fusing assembly on page 383 Plate, pressure, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Plate, pressure, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Bushing Fusing assembly on page 383 Bushing Fusing assembly on page 383 Flag, sensor, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Flag, sensor, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Lever, sensor Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, torsion Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, cable, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, cable, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Spring, leaf Fusing assembly on page 383 Bar, filter, rear Fusing assembly on page 383 Numerical parts list 469 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 470 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Eliminator Fusing assembly on page 383 Holder, brush Fusing assembly on page 383 Rib, cable guide Fusing assembly on page 383 Cam Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, protective, right upper Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, protective, right lower Fusing assembly on page 383 Side plate, fusing, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Lever, release, right Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, paper delivery, lower Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, stepped Fusing assembly on page 383 Sheet, protective, left Fusing assembly on page 383 Gear, 18T Fusing assembly on page 383 Gear, 17T Fusing assembly on page 383 IC, photo interrupter Fusing assembly on page 383 Guide, paper delivery guide, upper Fusing assembly on page 383 Pressure roller gear assembly Fusing assembly on page 383 Upper entrance guide assembly Fusing assembly on page 383 Cable, FSR AC Fusing assembly on page 383 Cable, FSR DC Fusing assembly on page 383 Holder, fusing lever Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, M3x8 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, RS, M3x8 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, D, M3x8 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw with washer, M3x6 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw with washer, M3x6 Fusing assembly on page 383 Screw, tap, S Fusing assembly on page 383 Ring, E Fusing assembly on page 383 Lever, paper delivery sensor Fusing assembly on page 383 Label, “Caution, high temp.” Fusing assembly on page 383 Solenoid Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Size detect assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Front top plate assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Cable, interface, upper Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Pickup drive side plate Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Cable, size sensor Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 500-page feeder driver PCA Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Connector, drawer, 6P Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Lifter driver assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Spring, tension Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Support, lifter drive assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Bushing Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, cassette right, rear Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, cassette left, rear Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Plate, reinforcement Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, left Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Guide, cable Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Shaft, lock joint Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Arm, lock Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Lever, lock Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Upper plate, rear Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Upper plate, right Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Shaft, retard drive Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Gear, 23T Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Numerical parts list 471 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 472 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Gear, 16T Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Spring, tension Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Left frame assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Right frame assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Front cassette left guide assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Lower frame assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Lock side plate assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Right front guide assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Right guide assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Screw, D, M3x8 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Ring, E Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Ring, E Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Pin, front guide lock, right Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Cover, gear Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Flag, size sensing Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Arm, lifter Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Support, lifter arm Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Bushing, lifter arm Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Holder, retard gear Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page Spring, tension Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Spring, torsion Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 20T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Body, cassette Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Roller, positioning Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Claw, cassette Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Roller, LU Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Flange, positioning roller, right Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Shaft, positioning roller, auxiliary Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Roller, RD Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gauge, fuel Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 ENWW Spring, torsion Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Guide, nip Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Plate, paper lifting Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 88T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 14T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 15T/25T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Gear, 37T Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Numerical parts list 473 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 474 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Shaft, size sensing Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Shaft, retard gear holder Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Ring, E Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Label, cassette operation Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Right side end support assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Cassette rear assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Left side end support assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Front cassette assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Pin, dowel Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Screw, tap, M4x12 Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 Arm, front cover support Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Stopper, front door Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Shaft, front cover hinge Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 Paper pickup assembly (see Figure 8-23 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 412) Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Holder, connector Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pin, lifter tray stopper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Sheet, solenoid damper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Latch, front cover, upper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Block, front cover pushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Guide, paper set, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Guide, paper set, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Block, paper size sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Reel, lifter wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Cover, lifter wire reel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Support, wire pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Cover, pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Shaft, lifter drive Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pulley, wire, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pulley, wire, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Cover, lifter wire reel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Plate, lifter wire cover Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Plate, damper support Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Support, release hook, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Numerical parts list 475 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 476 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Holder, hinge shaft, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Guide, paper set, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 14T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 15T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 19T/39T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Spacer, screw Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Frame, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Saddle, wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Lifter tray assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Paper pickup side plate assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Left hook assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Screw, with washer, M3x8 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Pin, dowel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Foot Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 Holder, connector Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pin, lifter tray stopper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Sheet, solenoid damper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Latch, front cover, upper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Block, front cover pushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Guide, paper set, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Numerical parts list 477 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 478 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Guide, paper set, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Block, paper size sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Reel, lifter wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Cover, lifter wire reel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Support, wire pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Cover, pulley Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Shaft, lifter drive Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pulley, wire, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pulley, wire, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Cover, lifter wire reel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Plate, lifter wire cover Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Plate, damper support Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Support, release hook, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Holder, hinge shaft, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Guide, paper set, front Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Gear, 14T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Gear, 15T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Gear, 19T/39T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spring, tension Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Spacer, screw Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Frame, rear Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Frame, lower Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Frame, right Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Frame, left Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Saddle, wire Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Lifter tray assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Paper pickup side plate assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Left hook assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Numerical parts list 479 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 480 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Screw, with washer, M3x8 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Screw, with washer, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Pin, dowel Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Foot Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 Bushing, feed shaft Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 23T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Arm, pick Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Plate, swing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Support, feed bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Holder, feed shaft Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 18T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Spring, compression Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 16T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Screw, tap, M3x6 Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Gear, 14T Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Spring, compression Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Ring, retainer Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Ring, slider Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Arm, paper load limit Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Shaft, load limit arm Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Holder, load limit arm Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Guide, paper outlet Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Lack, paper end limit, upper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Roller, paper feed Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Roller, paper feed Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Shaft, paper feed roller Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Flag, paper feed sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Holder, paper feed sensor flag Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Numerical parts list 481 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 482 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Spring, torsion Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Plate, front upper Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Bushing Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Spring, compression Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Guide, paper feed sensor cable Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 IC, photo interrupter Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Ring, E Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 Cover, front Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Cover, top Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Left cover assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Right cover assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Rear door assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Cable, stacker drawer Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Joint, left Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Joint, right Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Lever, in flapper link Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 IN solenoid assembly Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Frame, base Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Screw, P, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 Paper sensing flag assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Top bin flapper assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bin flapper assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Center bin flapper assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Cable, bin solenoid Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bin assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Solenoid Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Frame, base Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pad, arm Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Guide, cable, L Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Latch, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Stopper, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spring, tension Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pin Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Roller, delivery, inlet Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bushing, pressure roller Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Roller, intermediate Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Cover, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spacer Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Numerical parts list 483 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number 484 Chapter 8 Parts Description Table and page Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 34T/Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 41T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 24T/35T/48T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 35T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Gear, 26T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Pulley/Gear, 34T Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Belt, timing Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Delivery inlet roller assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Lever, bin flapper Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Base, bin lever Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Guide, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, D, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, machine, truss head, M3x4 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Screw, tap, pan head, MM4x10 Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Ring, E Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number ENWW Description Table and page Sheet, bottom frame, right Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Sheet, bottom frame, left Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 Cable, sensor PCA Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Cable guide assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Frame, base Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pad, arm Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Guide, cable, L Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Latch, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Stopper, rear door Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Spring, tension Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pin Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Roller, delivery, inlet Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Bushing, pressure roller Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Roller, intermediate Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Cover, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Spacer Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 34T/Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pulley, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Bushing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Numerical parts list 485 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 24T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 41T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 24T/35T/48T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 35T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Gear, 26T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Pulley/Gear, 34T Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Belt, timing Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Delivery inlet roller assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Lever, bin flapper Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Base, bin lever Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Guide, crossmember Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Spring, compression Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Screw, D, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Screw, machine, truss head, M3x4 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Screw, tap, pan head, MM4x10 Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Ring, E Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Sheet, bottom frame, right Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 Sheet, bottom frame, left Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 CB437-67901 (new) Formatter assembly (base models) PCAs—base unit on page 387 CB437-69001 (exchange) Formatter assembly (base models) PCAs—base unit on page 387 CB438-67901 (new) Formatter assembly (network models) PCAs—base unit on page 387 486 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page CB438-69001 (exchange) Formatter assembly (network models) PCAs—base unit on page 387 CB506-67901 Fuser assembly (110-127 V) (also see Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly on page 382) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 CB506-67901 Fusing assembly (110-127 V) Fusing assembly on page 383 CB506-67902 Fuser assembly (220-240 V) (also see Figure 8-13 Fusing assembly on page 382) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 CB506-67902 Fusing assembly (220-240 V) Fusing assembly on page 383 CB506-67903 Transfer roller assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 CB506-67904 Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 CB506-67904 Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 CB506-67904 Product roller kit (contains 2 feed rollers, 1 pickup roller) Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 CB506-67905 Multipurpose tray kit (contains 1 pickup roller, 1 feed roller, 1 separation roller) Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 RC1-0133-000CN Spring, tension Paper delivery assembly on page 381 RC1-0136-000CN Bushing, paper delivery Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RC1-0198-000CN Spring, tension Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RC1-0206-000CN Bushing Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RC1-0213-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RC1-0264-000CN Bushing, feed shaft Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RC1-0306-000CN Pin, option Covers—base unit on page 357 RC1-0386-000CN Guide, connecting cable Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RC2-2459-000CN Cover, option Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-2468-000CN Cover, formatter (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-2475-000CN Cover, right front (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-2476-000CN Cover, envelope connector (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 Numerical parts list 487 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RC2-2478-000CN Cover, right rear (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-2480-000CN Arm, release, A Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RC2-2481-000CN Arm, release, B Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RC2-2510-000CN Cover, duplexing outer (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-2524-000CN Flag, paper detect Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 RC2-2584-000CN Cover, lock Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 RC2-2640-000CN Cover, rear Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 RC2-2641-000CN Cover, right Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 RC2-2642-000CN Cover, left Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 RC2-2643-000CN Cover, left lower Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 RC2-2667-000CN Rod, switch Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RC2-5239-000CN Cover, legal (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-5262-000CN Limiter, cassette torque 500-sheet cassette on page 373 RC2-5262-000CN Limiter, cassette torque Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 RC2-5262-000CN Limiter, cassette torque Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly on page 403 RC2-5757-000CN Cover, formatter (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-5758-000CN Cover, right front (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-5759-000CN Cover, envelope connector (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-5760-000CN Cover, duplexing outer (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-5761-000CN Cover, legal (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RC2-5768-000CN Cover, right rear (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 488 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RC2-5783-000CN Bushing Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RH7-1603-020CN Motor, stepping Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RK2-0270-000CN Solenoid Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RK2-0359-000CN Thermistor unit Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RK2-1988-000CN Fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RK2-1989-000CN Fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RK2-1991-000CN Fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RK2-1992-000CN Fan Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RL1-1641-000CN Roller, pickup Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 RL1-1654-000CN Roller, separation Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 RL1-1657-000CN Motor, DC, 24 V, main drive Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RL1-1658-000CN Shaft, retard drive Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RL1-1659-000CN Motor, DC, 24 V, drum drive Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RL1-1663-000CN Roller, feed Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 RL1-1667-000CN Cover, envelope Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-0036-020CN Paper pickup roller assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-0036-020CN Paper pickup roller assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 RM1-0036-020CN Paper pickup roller assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly 500-sheet cassette on page 373 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Optional 500-sheet paper feeder main body on page 393 Numerical parts list 489 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly on page 403 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 RM1-0289-030CN Oil damper assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-1136-000CN Lifter drive assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-4525-000CN Size detect assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-4526-000CN Paper delivery drive assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-4527-000CN Paper feed roller assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-4529-000CN Paper delivery assembly (also see Figure 8-12 Paper delivery assembly on page 380) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-4529-000CN Paper delivery assembly Paper delivery assembly on page 381 RM1-4531-000CN Face-up tray assembly (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-4532-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 Front cover assembly Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-4539-000CN Tag holder assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-4548-000CN Paper feed assembly Power supply assembly on page 371 RM1-4549-000CN Electrical components assembly (110-127 V) Power supply assembly on page 371 RM1-4549-000CN Electrical components assembly (110-127 V) PCAs—base unit on page 387 RM1-4550-000CN Right cover assembly (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-4551-000CN Left cover assembly (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-4552-000CN Top cover assembly (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-4558-000CN Right guide assembly (P4015/P4515) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-4534-000CN 490 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-4559-000CN 500-sheet tray cassette Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-4559-000CN 500-sheet cassette 500-sheet cassette on page 373 RM1-4559-000CN Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette Optional 500-sheet feeder cassette on page 397 RM1-4562-000CN Paper feed shaft Z assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-4563-000CN Multipurpose tray pickup assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-4563-000CN Multipurpose pickup assembly Multipurpose pickup assembly on page 377 RM1-4576-000CN Right front guide assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-4578-000CN Electrical components assembly (220-240 V) Power supply assembly on page 371 RM1-4578-000CN Electrical components assembly (220-240 V) PCAs—base unit on page 387 RM1-4582-000CN DC controller PCA Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-4582-000CN DC controller PCA PCAs—base unit on page 387 RM1-4585-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-5051-000CN Fuser motor assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-5059-000CN Control panel assembly (P4015/P4515) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-5060-000CN Control panel assembly (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-5078-000CN Cable, inlet (110-127 V) Power supply assembly on page 371 RM1-5079-000CN Cable, inlet (220-240 V) Power supply assembly on page 371 RM1-5080-000CN Cable, door switch Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-5081-000CN Cable, full sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-5082-000CN Cable, panel Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-5085-000CN Cable, envelope feeder Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-5087-000CN Cable, laser Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-5088-000CN Cable, fuser motor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 Numerical parts list 491 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RM1-5089-000CN Cable, feed motor Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-5090-000CN Cable, drum motor Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-5091-000CN Cable, size sensor Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-5096-000CN Sensor assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 RM1-5126-000CN Cable, interface Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-5127-000CN Cable, size sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 RM1-5128-000CN Cable, door sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-5129-000CN Cable, feed, sensor Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 RM1-5250-000CN Top cover assembly (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-5255-000CN Front door assembly Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 RM1-5255-000CN Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder front door assembly on page 403 RM1-5259-000CN Remnant indication assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 RM1-5261-000CN Paper size detect assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (2 of 2) on page 409 RM1-5262-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-5264-000CN Paper detect sensor assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder paper pickup assembly on page 413 RM1-5265-000CN Numbering assembly Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-5266-000CN Bin solenoid assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (1 of 2) on page 419 RM1-5267-000CN Drive assembly Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 492 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-5448-000CN Face-up tray assembly (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-5449-000CN Right cover assembly (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-5450-000CN Left cover assembly (P4014) Covers—base unit on page 357 RM1-5451-000CN Right guide assembly (P4014) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 RM1-5460-000CN Registration assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-5461-000CN Grounding plate assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 RM1-5465-000CN Laser scanner assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RM1-6214-000CN 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA Optional 1,500-sheet feeder PCA on page 389 RM1-6214-000CN 1,500-sheet feeder driver PCA Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 RM1-6224-000CN Multi-bin mailbox PCA Multi-bin mailbox PCA on page 391 RM1-6224-000CN Multi-bin mailbox PCA Multi-bin mailbox main body (2 of 2) on page 423 RU5-0045-020CN Gear, 18T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RU6-0159-000CN Gear, 23T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 RU6-2105-000CN Spring, grounding Paper delivery assembly on page 381 RU6-2115-000CN Spring, tension Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 VS1-7500-006CN Connector, drawer, 6P Optional 1,500-sheet feeder main body (1 of 2) on page 405 VS1-7500-008CN Connector, 8P Multi-bin mailbox covers on page 417 VS1-7514-006CN Connector, drawer, 6P Power supply assembly on page 371 WG8-5624-000CN IC, photo interrupter Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 XA9-1420-000CN Screw, with washer, M3x8 Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 XA9-1464-000CN Screw, flat head RS, M3x6 Power supply assembly on page 371 Numerical parts list 493 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page XA9-1503-000CN Screw, tap, M3x6 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 XA9-1671-000CN Screw, D, M3x8 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 XB1-1300-605CN Screw, machine, pan head, M3x6 Power supply assembly on page 371 XB2-7300-607CN Screw, with washer, M3x6 Internal components (3 of 3) on page 367 XB2-7400-606CN Screw, with washer, M4x6 Power supply assembly on page 371 XB4-7300-809CN Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 XB4-7401-007CN Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 359 XB4-7401-007CN Screw, tap, pan head, M4x10 Optional 1,500-sheet paper feeder covers on page 401 XD9-0232-000CN Ring, E Internal components (2 of 3) on page 363 494 Chapter 8 Parts ENWW A Service and support Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP LaserJet P4014, P4014n, P4015n, P4015tn, P4015x, P4515n, P4515tn, P4515x, P4515xm One-year limited warranty HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/ region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 495 SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. Print cartridge limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 496 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product. Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used. ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service 497 Customer support Get telephone support, free during your warranty period, for your country/region Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. Get 24-hour Internet support www.hp.com/support/hpljp4010series or www.hp.com/ support/hpljp4510series Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer www.hp.com/go/macosx Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information www.hp.com/go/ljp4010series_software or www.hp.com/go/ ljp4510series_software Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack 498 Appendix A Service and support ENWW HP maintenance agreements HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs. Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services may vary by area. Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you. On-site service agreements To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs, HP has on-site service agreements with a selection of response times. Next-day on-site service This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request. Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP’s designated service zones are available on most onsite agreements (for additional charges). Weekly (volume) on-site service This agreement provides scheduled weekly on-site visits for organizations with many HP products. This agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products, including devices, plotters, computers, and disk drives. Repacking the device If HP Customer Care determines that your device needs to be returned to HP for repair, follow the steps below to repack the device before shipping it. CAUTION: Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is the customer’s responsibility. To repack the device 1. Remove and retain any DIMMs cards that you have purchased and installed in the device. Do not remove the DIMM that came with the device. CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the device. To remove the DIMMs, see Install memory on page 84. 2. Remove and retain the print cartridge. CAUTION: It is extremely important to remove the print cartridge before shipping the device. A print cartridge that remains in the device during shipping will leak and entirely cover the device engine and other parts with toner. To prevent damage to the print cartridge, avoid touching the roller on it, and store the print cartridge in its original packing material or so that it is not exposed to light. ENWW 3. Remove and retain the power cable, interface cable, and optional accessories. 4. If possible, include print samples and 50 to 100 sheets of paper or other print media that did not print correctly. 5. In the U.S., call HP Customer Care to request new packing material. In other areas, use the original packing material, if possible. Hewlett-Packard recommends insuring the equipment for shipment. HP maintenance agreements 499 Extended warranty HP Support provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP-supplied internal components. The hardware maintenance covers a 1- to 3-year period from date of the HP product purchase. The customer must purchase HP Support within the stated factory warranty. For more information, contact the HP Customer Care Service and Support group. 500 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B ENWW Specifications ● Physical specifications ● Electrical specifications ● Acoustic specifications ● Operating environment 501 Physical specifications Table B-1 Product dimensions and weights Product model Height Depth Width Weight HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series base and n models 394 mm (15.5 in) 4515 mm (17.8 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) 23.6 kg (51.9 lb) HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series tn models 514 mm (20.25 in) 451 mm (17.8 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) 30.4 kg (66.8 lb) HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series x models 514 mm (20.25 in) 533 mm (21.0 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) 32.6 kg (71.7 lb) HP LaserJet P4510 Series xm model 955 mm (37.6 in) 533 mm (21.0 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) 39.6 kg (87.1 lb) Optional 500-sheet feeder 121 mm (4.8 in) 448.4 mm (17.7 in) 415 mm (16.3 in) 6.7 kg (14.7 lb) Optional 1500-sheet tray 263.5 mm (10.4 in) 511.5 mm (20.1 in) 421 mm (16.6 in) 13 kg (28.7 lb) Optional duplexing unit 154 mm (6.1 in) 348 mm (13.7 in) 332 mm (13.1 in) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) Optional envelope feeder 113 mm (4.4 in) 354 mm (13.9 in) 328 mm (12.9 in) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) Optional stapler/stacker 371 mm (14.6 in) 430 mm (16.9 in) 387 mm (15.2 in) 4.2 kg (9.3 lb) Optional stacker 304 mm (12 in) 430 mm (16.9 in) 378 mm (14.9 in) 3.2 kg (7.1 lb) Optional multi-bin mailbox 522 mm (20.6 in) 306 mm (12 in) 353 mm (13.9 in) 7.0 kg (15.4 lb) Optional printer stand 114 mm (4.5 in) 653 mm (25.7 in) 663 mm (26.1 in) 13.6 kg (30 lb) Table B-2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened Product model Height Depth Width HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series base and n models 394 mm (15.5 in) 864 mm (34.0 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series tn models 514 mm (20.25 in) 864 mm (34.0 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series x models 514 mm (20.25 in) 864 mm (34.0 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) HP LaserJet P4510 Series xm model 955 mm (37.6 in) 902 mm (35.5 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) Electrical specifications WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the product and void the product warranty. Table B-3 Power requirements Specification 110-volt models 220-volt models Power requirements 100 to 127 volts (± 10%) 220 to 240 volts (± 10%) 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz) 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz) 10.7 Amps 5.7 Amps Rated current 502 Appendix B Specifications ENWW Table B-4 Power consumption (average, in watts) 1 2 ENWW Product model Printing Ready Sleep Off HP LaserJet P4014 models 800 W 18 W 13 W Less than 0.1 W HP LaserJet P4015 models 840 W 18 W 13 W Less than 0.1 W HP LaserJet P4515 models 910 W 20 W 13 W Less than 0.1 W Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/hpljp4010series or www.hp.com/support/hpljp4510series for current information. Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages. 3 Default time from Ready mode to Sleep = 30 minutes. 4 Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 70 BTU/hour. 5 Recovery time from Sleep to start of printing = less than 15 seconds. 6 HP LaserJet P4014 speed is 45 ppm Letter size. HP LaserJet P4015 speed is 52 ppm Letter size. HP LaserJet P4515 speed is 62 ppm Letter size. Electrical specifications 503 Acoustic specifications Table B-5 Sound power and pressure level Product model Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 HP LaserJet P4014 models Printing LWAd= 7.1 Bels (A) [71 dB(A)] Ready LWAd= 4.0 Bels (A) [40 dB(A)] Printing LWAd= 7.2 Bels (A) [72 dB(A)] Ready LWAd= 4.1 Bels (A) [41 dB(A)] Printing LWAd= 7.4 Bels (A) [74 dB(A)] Ready LWAd= 4.8 Bels (A) [48 dB(A)] Product model Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296 HP LaserJet P4014 models Printing LpAm=58 dB (A) Ready LpAm=27 dB (A) Printing LpAm=58 dB (A) Ready LpAm=27 dB (A) Printing LpAm=60 dB (A) Ready LpAm=31 dB (A) HP LaserJet P4015 models HP LaserJet P4515 models HP LaserJet P4015 models HP LaserJet P4515 models 1 Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/support/hpljp4010series or www.hp.com/support/hpljp4510series for 2 HP LaserJet P4014 speed is 45 ppm Letter size. HP LaserJet P4015 speed is 52 ppm Letter size. HP LaserJet P4515 speed current information. is 62 ppm Letter size. 3 Configuration tested (HP LaserJet P4014): LJ P4014n model, printing on A4-size paper in simplex mode 4 Configuration tested (HP LaserJet P4015): LJ P4015x model, printing on A4-size paper in simplex mode 5 Configuration tested (HP LaserJet P4515): LJ P4515x model, printing on A4-size paper in simplex mode Operating environment Table B-6 Necessary conditions Environmental condition Printing Storage/standby Temperature (product and print cartridge) 7.5° to 32.5°C (45.5° to 90.5°F) 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Relative humidity 5% to 90% 35% to 85% 504 Appendix B Specifications ENWW C ENWW Regulatory information ● FCC regulations ● Declaration of conformity ● Safety statements 505 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase separation between equipment and receiver. ● Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located. ● Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. 506 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of conformity Declaration of conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1, DoC#: BOISB-0702-00-rel.1.0 Manufacturer's Name: Manufacturer's Address: Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard, Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet P4014 series, P4015 series, and P4515 series Regulatory Model Number3): Product Options: BOISB-0702-02 ALL Print Cartridges: CC364A /CC364X conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11 IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) GB4943-2001 EMC: CISPR22:2005 / EN 55022:2006 - Class B1) EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2 EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1 EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2) / ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly. 1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the marketing name or the product number(s). Boise, Idaho , USA June 29, 2007 For regulatory topics only: European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe,, Herrenberger Strasse 140, , D-71034, Böblingen, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143), http://www.hp.com/go/certificates USA Contact: ENWW Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, , (Phone: 208-396-6000) Declaration of conformity 507 Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation. Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. « Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». » VCCI statement (Japan) Power cord statement (Japan) EMI statement (Korea) 508 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet P4014, P4014n, P4015n, P4015tn, P4015x, P4515n, P4515tn, P4515x, P4515xm, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP LaserJet P4014, P4014n, P4015n, P4015tn, P4015x, P4515n, P4515tn, P4515x, P4515xm kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser. ENWW Safety statements 509 Substances table (China) 510 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics 1,500-sheet tray door, removing 232 driver PCA, removing 235 feed rollers, removing 225 left-side cover, removing 229 lift-drive assembly, removing 236 loading 59 motor, removing 234 paper jams 312 rear cover, removing 227 right-side cover, removing 228 separation roller, removing 226 500-sheet tray loading 57 paper jams 311 A A4 paper settings 27, 28 accessibility features 7 accessories available 6 ordering 342 part numbers 342 acoustic specifications 504 after service checklist 132 alerts, e-mail 16 anticounterfeit supplies 79 AppleTalk settings 40 assembly locations 352 auto continue setting 35 B binding edge settings 27 bins, output jams, clearing 320 paper path test 45 ENWW removing rear 150 selecting 63 blank pages suppressing 29 blank pages, troubleshooting 334 blurred print, problemsolving 333 Bonjour Settings 16 both sides, printing on binding edge settings 27 Macintosh settings 16 Show Me How menu 23 usage page 25 browser requirements embedded Web server 71 buttons, control panel 20 C cables network, troubleshooting 334 USB, troubleshooting 334 Canadian DOC regulations 508 card stock fuser modes 30 output bin, selecting 63 carriage returns, settings 29 cartridges authentication 79 density settings 32 EconoMode 31, 78 features 7 genuine HP 78 non-HP 78 ordering through embedded Web server 73 part numbers 344 replacement intervals 78 replacing 80 status messages 20 storage 78 warranty 496 cartridges, print paper jams 307 replacing 139 cartridges, staple loading 82 characters, misformed 331 checklists after service 132 before service 132 preservice 132 circuit diagram 274 cleaning exterior 95 fuser 280 cleaning page 32 cleaning page, printing 280 clearable warnings setting 35 clearing jams 1,500-sheet tray 312 500-sheet tray 311 duplexer 314 envelope feeder 309 fuser area 315 locations 307 output area 320 staple 322 top-cover 307 Tray 1 311 component locations 352, 358 configuration page Macintosh 16 Configure Device menu 27 connectors locating 268 control panel blank, troubleshooting 242 buttons 20 Index 511 cleaning page, automatic 95, 281 cleaning page, printing 95 clearable warning settings 35 Configure Device menu 27 date/time settings 33 Diagnostics menu 45 display 20 I/O menu 38 Information menu 25 language, selecting 36 lights 20 menus 22 Paper Handling menu 26 Print Quality menu 30 Printing menu 27 Resets menu 44 Retrieve Job menu 24 security 76 Show Me How menu 23 System Setup menu 33 controlling print jobs 62 cooling fan FN101, replacing 202 cooling fan FN102, replacing 176 cooling fan FN103, replacing 178 cooling fan FN301, replacing 204 copies, default number of 27 copying quality, troubleshooting 329 counterfeit supplies 79 counts, page 338 Courier font settings 28 covers 1,500-sheet tray, removing 227 envelope accessory, removing 147 formatter, removing 152 front, removing 174 left-side, removing 166 right-side, removing 163 top, removing 161 creased paper, problemsolving 332 crooked pages 331 curled paper, problemsolving 331 custom-size paper tray settings 27 512 Index customer support embedded Web server links 73 HP Printer Utility pages 16 online 498 repacking device 499 D darkness, setting 32 date, setting 33 DC controller PCA, locating 268 removing 188 replacing 153 declaration of conformity 507 default settings, restoring 44 defects examples of 329 repeating 280 density problem-solving 329 settings 16, 32 device discovery 18 device languages settings 35 diagnostics manual sensor test 250 network 41 Diagnostics menu 45 dimensions, product 502 DIMMs installing 84 memory 141 part numbers 345 types available 84 verifying installation 88 disk file directory, printing 25 initialization 338 installing 93 removing 94 DLC/LLC 40 DNS settings 39 documentation 2 dots, problem-solving 329, 332 double-sided printing binding edge settings 27 Macintosh settings 16 Show Me How menu 23 usage page 25 dpi, settings 16, 31 draft quality printing 31 drivers included 6 paper types 50 supported 16 dropouts, problem-solving 329 drum drive, removing 199 drum drive, replacing 199 duplex printing accessory jams 314 part number 344 duplexer Macintosh settings 16 paper path test 45 settings 27 Show Me How menu 23 usage page 25 E e-mail alerts 16 EconoMode setting 31, 78 EIO cards installing 93 part numbers 345 removing 94 settings 38 electrical specifications 502 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 130 embedded Web server features 71 security 75 energy specifications 502 envelope accessory, front covers, removing 147 envelope feeder paper jams 309 part number 344 envelopes default size, setting 27 output bin, selecting 63 wrinkled, problem-solving 332 envelopes, loading 55 environment for product specifications 504 error messages e-mail alerts 16 event log 45 ENWW lights, control panel 20 settings 35 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 130 Ethernet cards, part numbers 345 event log 45 Explorer, versions supported embedded Web server 71 extended warranty 500 F factory defaults, restoring 44 fan FN101, removing 202 fan FN102, removing 176 fan FN103, removing 178 fan FN301, removing 204 fans troubleshooting 242 fasteners, types of 134 FastRes 6, 31 features 3 feed and pickup rollers, replacing Tray 1 154 feed rollers, replacing 83 feed rollers, replacing tray 2 143 file directory, printing 25 File Upload, Macintosh 16 Finnish laser safety statement 509 firewall settings 41 Firmware Update, Macintosh 16 firmware, upgrading 96 fonts Courier 28 included 6 list, printing 25 permanent resources 88 settings 29 Upload Macintosh 16 formatter replacing 153 security 77 formatter cage, removing 152 formatter cover, removing 152 formatter lights 245 formatter, removing 152 fraud hotline 79 front cover, removing 174 ENWW fuser cleaning 280 modes 30 paper jams 315 replacing 83, 151 fuser motor, removing 197 fuser motor, replacing 197 G Getting Started Guide 2 gray background, problemsolving 330 guides. See documentation H hard disk initialization 338 heartbeat LED 245 heavy paper fuser modes 30 output bin, selecting 63 held jobs Retrieve Job control panel menu 24 settings 33 Help button, control panel 20 help, Show Me How menu 23 HP Customer Care 498 HP Easy Printer Care description 14 downloading 14 opening 68 options 68 supported browsers 14 supported operating systems 14 HP fraud hotline 79 HP Jetdirect print server firmware updates 99 installing 93 lights 245 part numbers 345 removing 94 settings 38 HP paper, ordering 346 HP Printer Utility 14, 16 HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 14 HP SupportPack 500 HP Web Jetadmin firmware updates 98 HP-UX software 17 humidity specifications 504 I I/O menu 38 image quality. See print quality image repetition, problemsolving 333 Information menu 25 information pages printing 66 Information tab, embedded Web server 72 initializing hard disk 338 NVRAM 338 installing EIO cards 93 memory (DIMMs) 84 USB devices 90 internal components 358 Internet Explorer, versions supported embedded Web server 71 IP address displaying 33 IP addressing 18 IP Security 75 IPsec 75 IPSEC status 41 IPV6 settings 39 IPX/SPX settings 40 J jams 1,500-sheet tray 312 500-sheet tray 311 common causes of 304 duplexer 314 envelope feeder 309 fuser area 315 locations 307 output bin 320 recovery 325 recovery setting 36 Show Me How menu 23 staple 322 top-cover 307 Tray 1 311 Index 513 Japanese VCCI statement 508 Jetadmin firmware updates 98 Jetadmin, HP Web 13, 74 Jetdirect print server firmware updates 99 installing 93 lights 245 part numbers 345 removing 94 settings 38 jobs Macintosh settings 16 Retrieve Job menu 24 K kit, maintenance part number 344 kit, printer maintenance using 83 Korean EMI statement 508 L labels fuser modes 30 output bin, selecting 63 landscape orientation setting as default 29 language, control panel 36 languages, device settings 35 laser safety statements 508, 509 laser/scanner removing 219 left-side cover, removing 166 letter paper, override A4 settings 27 letterhead fuser modes 30 light print problem-solving 329 setting toner density 32 lights formatter 245 lights, control panel 20 line spacing, setting default 29 lines, problem-solving 330, 332, 333 link speed 43 Linux software 17 514 Index loading 1,500-sheet tray 59 500-sheet tray 57 Show Me How menu 23 staples 82 Tray 1 56 Lock Resources, Macintosh 16 loose toner, problem-solving 330 M Macintosh AppleTalk settings 40 HP Printer Utility 14 support 498 main assemblies locating 263 maintenance agreements 499 maintenance kit part number 344 using 83 manual feed settings 28 manuals. See documentation margins settings 30 media A4 settings 27, 28 custom-size 27 default size, setting 27 Show Me How menu 23 supported sizes 48 tray settings 26 usage page 25 memory installing DIMMs 84 NVRAM initialization 338 part numbers 345 permanent resources 88 RAM disk settings 36 upgrading 84 verifying installation 88 memory DIMMs security 77 menu map 25 menus, control panel accessing 20 Configure Device 27 Diagnostics 45 I/O 38 Information 25 Paper Handling 26 Print Quality 30 Printing 27 Resets 44 Retrieve Job 24 Show Me How 23 System Setup 33 messages e-mail alerts 16 event log 45 lights, control panel 20 settings 35 misformed characters, problemsolving 331 models, feature comparison 3 motors troubleshooting 242 N Netscape Navigator, versions supported embedded Web server 71 network port troubleshooting 334 Networking tab, embedded Web server 72 networks device discovery 18 diagnostics 41 HP Web Jetadmin 74 IP address 18 link speed 43 Macintosh settings 16 protocols 38, 43 protocols supported 18 security settings 41 settings 38 troubleshooting printing 335 next-day on-site service 499 noise specifications 504 non-HP supplies 78 nonvolatile memory initialization 338 number of copies, setting default 27 NVRAM initialization 338 O on-site service agreements 499 ENWW online support 498 operating environment specifications 504 ordering paper, HP 346 part numbers for 342 supplies and accessories 342 supplies through embedded Web server 73 orientation, page default, setting 29 output bins paper jams 320 removing rear 150 output quality defect examples 329 repeating defects 280 troubleshooting 329 override A4/letter 27 P packaging device 499 page counts 338 page orientation default, setting 29 pages blank 334 not printing 334 printing slowly 334 paper A4 settings 27, 28 curled 331 custom-size 27 default size, setting 27 fuser modes 30 HP, ordering 346 loading 1,500-sheet tray 59 loading 500-sheet tray 57 loading Tray 1 56 Show Me How menu 23 skewed 331 supported sizes 48 supported types 50 tray settings 26 usage page 25 wrinkled 332 Paper Handling menu 26 paper jams 1,500-sheet tray 312 500-sheet tray 311 ENWW duplexer 314 envelope feeder 309 fuser area 315 locations 307 output bin 320 top-cover 307 Tray 1 311 paper path test 45 paper-delivery assembly removing 221 part numbers assemblies 352 cables 345 EIO cards 345 internal components 358 maintenance kit 344 memory 345 paper, HP 346 print cartridges 344 trays 343 parts removal-order list 135 PCAs diagrams and part numbers 386 PCL drivers 16 PCL font list, printing 25 PCL, setting as device language 35 PDF error pages 28 PDF files, printing 84 perform printer maintenance message 83 permanent resources 88 personalities settings 35 physical specifications 502 pickup and feed rollers, replacing Tray 1 154 pickup rollers, replacing 83 pickup rollers, replacing tray 2 143 pickup-drive assembly removing 192 ping test 336 pliers, required 131 portrait orientation setting as default 29 ports supported 6 post-service tests 133 postcards output bin, selecting 63 PostScript setting as device language 35 PostScript error pages settings 28 power troubleshooting 242 power specifications 502 power supply, high voltage removing 208 preprinted paper fuser modes 30 prepunched paper fuser modes 30 preservice checklist 132 print cartridges authentication 79 density settings 32 EconoMode 31, 78 features 7 genuine HP 78 non-HP 78 ordering through embedded Web server 73 paper jams 307 part numbers 344 replacement intervals 78 replacing 80, 139 status messages 20 storage 78 warranty 496 print jobs retention 33 print quality blurred 333 defect examples 329 dropouts 329 gray background 330 light print 329 lines 330 loose toner 330 misformed characters 331 repeating defects 280, 331 repetitive images 333 scattered lines 333 settings 31 smeared toner 330 specks 329 Index 515 test 133 tire tracks 332 troubleshooting 329 white lines 332 white spots 332 Print Quality menu 30 print-quality test 133 printer languages settings 35 printer maintenance kit using 83 printer stand part number 344 printing troubleshooting 334 Printing menu 27 problem-solving blurred print 333 curled paper 331 dropouts 329 e-mail alerts 16 event log 45 gray background 330 light print 329 lines 330, 332 repeating defects 331 repetitive images 333 scattered lines 333 Show Me How menu 23 skewed pages 331 smeared toner 330 specks 329 text quality 331, 333 tire tracks 332 white spots 332 wrinkled paper 332 processor speed 6 product electrostatic discharge (ESD) 130 product comparison 3 product status HP Easy Printer Care 68 ProRes 6 protocols, network 18, 38, 43 Proxy Server settings 40 PS Emulation drivers 16 PS error pages settings 28 PS font list, printing 25 516 Index PS, setting as device language 35 punched paper fuser modes 30 Q quality defect examples 329 repeating defects 280 troubleshooting 329 quick copy jobs 33 R RAM disk settings 36 rear output bin paper jams 320 printing to 63 removing 150 recovery, jam 36 registration assembly removing 159 registration settings 30 remote firmware update (RFU) 96 removing order of parts 135 parts, order 135 screws 130 removing parts cautions for 130 checklists 132 order 135 tools, required 131 repacking device 499 repeating defects 280 repeating defects, problemsolving 331, 333 replacing screws 130 replacing printing cartridges 80 required tools user-replaceable parts 131 Resets menu 44 resolution features 6 settings 16, 31 troubleshooting quality 329 Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) 16, 31 resource saving 88 restoring default settings 44 REt (Resolution Enhancement technology) 16, 31 retention, job Retrieve Job menu 24 settings 33 Retrieve Job menu 24 right-side cover removing 163 rollers 1,500-sheet tray, removing 225 locating 263 repetitive defects 280 transfer, replacing 145 Tray 1 pickup and feed, replacing 154 tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed, replacing 143 rollers, replacing 83 rough paper output bin, selecting 63 S safety statements 508, 509 saving resources, memory 88 screwdrivers, required 131 screws removing 130 replacing 130 screws, types of 134 security network settings 41 security features 75 sensors manual test 250 separation roller replacing 157 separation rollers, replacing tray 2 143 service after-service check list 132 before service checklist 132 checklist, after service 132 checklist, before service 132 checklist, post-service 132 checklist, preservice 132 post-service checklist 132 preservice checklist 132 ENWW repacking device 499 tools, required 131 service agreements 499 Service ID 339 settings restoring defaults 44 Settings tab, embedded Web server 72 shipping device 499 Show Me How menu 23 show-me-how pages printing 66 SIMMs, incompatibility 84 skewed pages 331 Sleep mode delay, setting 34 power specifications 502 turning on or off 44 small paper, printing on 63 smeared toner, problemsolving 330 software embedded Web server 13 HP Easy Printer Care 14, 68 HP Printer Utility 14 HP Web Jetadmin 13 Solaris software 17 special media guidelines 53 special paper guidelines 53 specifications acoustic 504 electrical 502 operating environment 504 physical 502 specks, problem-solving 329, 332 speed resolution settings 31 spots, problem-solving 329, 332 stacker part number 344 printing to 64 staple cartridges loading 82 part numbers 344 staple jams 322 stapler/stacker jams, staple 322 ENWW loading staples 82 part number 344 printing to 64 static precautions 130 status embedded Web server 72 HP Easy Printer Care 68 HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 16 supplies page, printing 25 status, supplies control panel messages 20 storage, job Macintosh settings 16 Retrieve Job menu 24 settings 33 stored jobs security 75 storing print cartridges 78 straight-through paper path 63 strategy parts, removal 130 parts, replacement 130 supplies authentication 79 counterfeit 79 non-HP 78 ordering 342 ordering through embedded Web server 73 part numbers 344 replacement intervals 78 replacing print cartridges 80 status page, printing 25 status, viewing with embedded Web server 72 status, viewing with HP Printer Utility 16 supplies, status control panel messages 20 HP Easy Printer Care 68 support embedded Web server links 73 HP Printer Utility pages 16 online 498 repacking device 499 supported media 48 SupportPack, HP 500 symbol sets 29 system requirements embedded Web server 71 System Setup menu 33 T TCP/IP settings 38 technical support online 498 repacking device 499 temperature specifications 504 tests manual sensor test 250 network 41 post-service 133 print-quality 133 text, problem-solving blurred 333 misformed characters 331 three-hole punched paper fuser modes 30 time, setting 33 timeout settings held jobs 33 I/O 38 Sleep mode 34 timing chart 273 tire tracks, problem-solving 332 toner density setting 16, 32 EconoMode 31, 78 output quality, problemsolving 330 toner cartridges. See print cartridges tools, required user-replaceable parts 131 top cover paper jams, clearing 307 top cover, removing 161 top output bin paper jams 320 printing to 63 transfer roller replacing 145 transfer rollers, replacing 83 transparencies fuser modes 30 HP, ordering 348 output bin 63 Index 517 Tray 1 loading 56 manual feed settings 28 paper jams 311 pickup and feed rollers, replacing 154 settings 26 tray 1 paper-pickup assembly, removing 216 separation roller, replacing 157 Tray 2 settings 26 tray 2 extension door, removing 149 separation, pickup, and feed rollers, replacing 143 Tray 3 physical specifications 502 trays configure 61 custom-size settings 27 loading 1,500-sheet tray 59 loading 500-sheet tray 57 loading Tray 1 56 Macintosh settings 16 manual feed settings 28 paper jams 307, 311, 312 paper orientation 54 paper path test 45 part numbers 343 registration settings 30 settings 26 Show Me How menu 23 trays, status HP Easy Printer Care 68 troubleshooting 1,500-sheet tray paper jams 312 500-sheet tray paper jams 311 blank pages 334 checklist 240 duplexer jams 314 duplexing 328 envelope feeder jams 309 fuser-area paper jams 315 network cable 334 network printing 335 518 Index output bin jams 320 pages not printing 334 pages printing slowly 334 paper jams 307 power-on 242 print quality 329 process 242 quality 329 repeating defects 280 staple jams 322 top-cover paper jams 307 Tray 1 paper jams 311 USB cable 334 two-sided printing binding edge settings 27 Macintosh settings 16 Show Me How menu 23 usage page 25 U UNIX carriage return settings 29 UNIX software 17 upgrading firmware 96 upgrading memory 84 usage page 25 USB cable, part number 345 USB devices installing 90 USB port supported 6 troubleshooting 334 User Guide 2 user-replaceable parts required tools 131 tools required 131 wavy paper, problem-solving 331 Web browser requirements embedded Web server 71 Web Jetadmin firmware updates 98 Web sites customer support 498 fraud reports 79 HP Web Jetadmin, downloading 74 Macintosh customer support 498 ordering supplies 342 weekly on-site service 499 weight, product 502 white lines or spots, problemsolving 332 Wide A4 settings 28 Windows drivers supported 16 wrinkled paper, problemsolving 332 V vertical spacing, setting default 29 voltage specifications 502 W wake time changing 35 warnings setting 35 warranty customer self repair 497 extended 500 print cartridges 496 product 495 ENWW © 2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *CB506-90950* *CB506-90950* CB506-90950
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes Page Count : 534 Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-14, framework 1.6 About : uuid:3f501659-35d2-4131-95cc-0242eae24ec6 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows) Modify Date : 2008:03:05 12:38:55-07:00 Create Date : 2008:02:29 12:49:10-07:00 Metadata Date : 2008:03:05 12:38:55-07:00 Creator Tool : XSL Formatter V3.4 MR5a (3,4,2006,0718) for Windows Document ID : uuid:27bb8b49-c916-4fe8-a89a-6bd4b18da564 Format : application/pdf Creator : HP LaserJet Information Engineering Title : HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series Printers Service Manual - ENWW Author : HP LaserJet Information Engineering Keywords : Edition 1, 3/2008EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools